iplex version 5.0 web gui guide

USER GUIDE

Web InterfaceiPlex

Software Version 5.0

iPlex

112-0114-02 Rev A

www.tandbergtv.com

May, 2009

Published By TANDBERG® Television455 DeGuigne DriveSunnyvale, CA 94085-3890Copyright © 1998-2007 by TANDBERG Television.All rights reserved. No part of the contents of this book may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any meanswithout the written permission of the publisher.

Contributors Technical Publications: Lena Jacobson

TANDBERG Television Engineering Department

Restricted Rights This document contains proprietary and confidential information of TANDBERG Television. The contentsof this document may not be disclosed to third parties, copied or duplicated in any form, in whole or in part,without the prior written permission of TANDBERG Television.Use, duplication, or disclosure of the technical data contained in this document is subject to restrictions as setforth in subdivision (c)(1)(ii) of the Rights in Technical Data and Computer Software clause at DFARS52.227-7013 and/or in similar or successor clauses in the FAR, or in the DOD or NASA FAR Supplement.Unpublished rights reserved under the Copyright Laws of the United States. Contractor/manufacturer isTANDBERG Television, 455 DeGuigne Drive, Sunnyvale, CA 94085-3890, USA. TANDBERG is aregistered trademark of TANDBERG Television. All other names are trademarks of their respective owners.TANDBERG Television owns the following patents: U.S. Patent No. 6351474, 6351471, 6292490, 6246701,6195368, 6148082, 6111896, 6064676 and has additional U.S. patents pending.

GoAhead SoftwareLicence

Copyright © 2001 GoAhead Software, Inc. All Rights Reserved. Unless GoAhead otherwise instructs, the year 2001 is to bereplaced with the year during which the release of the Original Code containing the notice is issued by GoAhead. If this year isnot supplied with Documentation, GoAhead will supply it upon request at http://www.goahead.com

Dolby DigitalTrademark License

Dolby Laboratories encourages use of the Dolby Digital trademark to identify soundtracks that are encoded in Dolby Digital.This is an effective way to inform listeners of the soundtrack format, and the use of a standard logo promotes easyrecognition in the market place. However, like any trademark, the Dolby Digital logo may not be used without permission.Dolby Laboratories therefore provides a standard trademark license agreement for companies who wish to use Dolbytrademarks. This agreement should be signed by the company that owns the program material being produced. Recordingstudios or production facilities which provide audio production or encoding services for outside clients generally do notrequire a trademark license. If you would like more information on obtaining a Dolby trademark license, please contact DolbyLaboratories Licensing Corporation. Information on trademark licensing plus instructions for using the Dolby Digitaltrademark and marking audio formats can also be found on-line at http://www.dolby.com.

Dolby Laboratories Licensing Corporation, 100 Potrero Ave., San Francisco, CA 94520 USA.Phone: 415-558-0200, Fax: 415-863-1373, E-mail: [email protected], http://www.dolby.com.

Technical Support For technical support, contact TANDBERG Television Customer Support through the World Wide Web (www.tandbergtv.com/services/skysupport_request.asp), via e-mail ([email protected]) or the Hot Line 1-877-475-9787.Document Number: 112-0114-02 Rev A .

www.tandbergtv.com

http://www.GoAhead.com

http://www.dolby.com

http://www.dolby.com

AgencyCompliance

and Cautions

Safety: UL 60950 Third Edition, CSA-C22.2 No. 950-95, EN60950, IEC 950, CB Certificate, AS/NZ 3260,TS 001, Laser Safety: 21CRF1040Emissions: FCC Part 15 Class A, CISPR 22 Class A, EN55022 Class A, AS/NZ 3548Immunity: EN61000-4-2, EN61000-4-3, EN61000-4-4, EN61000-4-5, EN61000-4-6, EN61000-4-11,EN61000-3-2, EN61000-3-3, EN300-386-2Telcordia: GR-63-CORE, GR-1089-CORE, SR-3580 NEBS Level 3ETSI: EN300-019-1-1, EN300-019-1-2, EN300-019-1-3, EN300-132, EN300-386-2

FCC Class ACompliance

TANDBERG Television iPlex equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for aClass A digital device, pursuant to part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to providereasonable protection against harmful interference when the equipment is operated in a commercialenvironment. This equipment generates, uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if notinstalled and used in accordance with the instruction manual, may cause harmful interference toradio communications. Operation of this equipment in a residential area is likely to cause harmfulinterference, in which case the user will be required to correct the interference at personal expense.

ImportantSafety

Information!

Please note the following:1 The TANDBERG Television iPlex is intended for indoor use only.2 In case of emergency, disconnect the power cords.3 If power cords are not provided:

- In the United States, use standard computer power cords (as specified below).- In Europe, for 230 volt operation, use a cord set marked “HAR” and consisting of a min 3 coreH05VVF3G075 cord that has a minimum 0.75 square mm diameter conductors, provided with an IEC320 receptacle and a male plug for the country of installation, rated 6A, 250V.

4 Do not block the equipment vents.

Read the following safety information thoroughly before installing this TANDBERG Television product. Failure to follow this safety information may lead to personal injury or damage to the equipment.

Power Supply

• This unit must be grounded.• The unit must be connected to a grounded outlet to comply with product safety standards.• Do not connect the power supply unit to an AC outlet without a ground connection.• All power cords must be disconnected before servicing.Power Cords

The plug on the power supply cords are considered to be the equipment disconnect device and mustbe approved for the country where it is used.For USA and Canada:

• The cord set must be UL-approved and CSA-certified.• The attachment plug must be an earth-grounding type with a NEMA 5-15P (15A 125V) plug

and a EN60320/IEC320 receptacle.

3

SystemSpecifications

• Dimensions (H x W x D): 23.50 X 17.40 X 1.75 in (59.69 x 44.20 x 4.45 cm)

• Rack Mount: 1 Rack Unit: Standard 19 inch EIA rack

• Weight: 24.5 lbs (11.14 kg) fully-configured

• Shipping Weight: 39 lbs. (17.69 kg)

• Airflow: 86 CFM normal operation 126 CFM maximum

• Operating Temperature Range: 0° C to +40° C (+32° F to +104° F)

• Short-term Operating Temperature Range: -5° C to +55° C (+23° F to 131° F)

• Non-operating Temperature Range: -40° C to +70° C (-40° F to +158° F)

• Operating Humidity: 7% to 95% Non-condensing

• Non-Operating Humidity: 5% to 95% Non-condensing

• Operating Altitude: to 13,123 ft (4000 meters)

• Input Power Requirement: 100-240 V AC 47/63 Hz @ 3/6 AmpsDC: -48 V @ 10 Amps max

4

ContentsCover, Notices, and Disclaimers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1

Contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5

Chapter 1: Introducing TANDBERG Television iPlex . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21

Introduction to the Web Interface User Guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22Other iPlex Guides . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22

Contacting TANDBERG Television Customer Support . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23Contact Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23Support Check List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23

TANDBERG Television iPlex Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24iPlex Chassis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25Switch Controller Module (SCM) Subsystem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25Media Controller Module (MCM) Subsystem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25MCM Submodules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25

ASI Input and Output Submodules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26ATM Network Interfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27Real-Time MPEG-2 Encoder Plus (RTME Plus) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29Real-Time MPEG-4 AVC Encoder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29Real-Time MPEG-4 AVC Ultracompression Encoders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29Real-Time MPEG-4 AVC Ultracompression Single-slot Encoders . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32DSP 4PAC (Media Processor) Submodule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33DSP 6PAC Transrating Submodule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34MPEG-4 AVC Ultracompression Transcoder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34MPEG-4 AVC Ultracompression Single-slot Transcoder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35ASIPlus Submodule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36

Control Station Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37Web GUI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37

Web Browser . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37Real-Time Monitoring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37

CLI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37Telnet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37SSH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37

SNMP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37

Chapter 2: Basic Concepts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39

5

iPlex Web Interface User Guide

DVB Transport Stream . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40Data Injection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40

Ports and Packetizers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40Input Port Packetizers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40SME Network Interface Packetizers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41

MPEG-2 Transport Stream Packets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41MPEG Sections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41Packetizing Sections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42

MPEG Transport Over Packet Networks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42iPlex Supported Protocols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42MPEG Encapsulation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43

IPv6 Support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45VLANs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45UDPOut/RTPOut . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45

Chapter 3: Using the Web Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47

The iPlex Web GUI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48Logging In . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48

IP Address . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48Login Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48Default User Names and Access Rights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49

Elements of the Web GUI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49Home Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49Main Menu (Left side) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50Command Bar (Top Right side) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51Screen-related Navigation Buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52

Logging Out . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53

Managing the iPlex Using the Web GUI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54Managing User Access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55

View the List of Users . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55Add a New User . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55Edit a User’s Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55Delete a User . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55

User Activity Logging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55Information Logged . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56Examples of Logs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56Enabling User Logging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57Viewing User Logs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57

6


Changing Passwords . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57Setting the System Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58Changing the Session Timeout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58Backing up the System Configuration File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58Looking up the Status of Optional Licenses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58Looking up the Software Version . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59Upgrading the Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59

Non-redundant Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60Redundant MCM with Non-redundant SCM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61

Fully-redundant Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61Changing the Unit’s IP Address . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62

Initial Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62Operational Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62

Managing the Memory Resources . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62Memory Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62Configuration Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63Data Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63Log Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63Software Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64

The Statistics Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65iPlex Statistics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65Sensors Statistics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67Redundancy Statistics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68

Redundancy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68Alarm Statistics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69

Media Routes Statistics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69Interfaces Statistics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70Port Statistics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72

Physical and Logical Ports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73ASIIn Port List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73All Ports List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73All In Port List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74All Out Port List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74All Control Port List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74All Network Ports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74Alarms Statistics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74

Config File Statistics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75Running Config . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75Show Config . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75Compare Config . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75

Data File Statistics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76

7


Show Data File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76IP Routing Statistics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77

Network Routes Statistics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77RIP Statistics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78VLAN Statistics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79Multicast Statistics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80Spanning Tree Statistics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81

SCM Statistics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82SCM General Statistics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82Software Statistics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84SNMP Statistics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84GE Statistics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86CPU Statistics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88NTP Status Statistics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89License Statistics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90Logging Statistics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91Notification Log . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91Security Statistics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92nCompass Statistics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92

MCM Statistics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92MCM Blade Statistics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93Blade Ports Statistics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94Interfaces Statistics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95Summary Interfaces List—Card Slot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95ATM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95SME . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95SMD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96Network Statistics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96

DSP 4PAC (Media Processor) Submodule Statistics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99

The Configuration Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100Creating a Network Port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101Configuring Redundancy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101

Configuring Alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102Synchronizing Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103

Configuring Media Routing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103Basics of Media Routing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103Setup Media Routing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104Media Routing Panels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105Port Panels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106Program Route . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109Stream Route . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111Managing Custom Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112Managing Custom Element . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115DVB Standard PID Numbers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119

8


Ports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120Alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120Configuration File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121

Apply Config . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121Copy Startup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122Copy Running . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123Remove Config . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124Upload Config . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124Download Config . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124Edit Config . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125Push Config . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126

Data File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127Download Data File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127Remove Data File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128

IP Routing Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128Network Routing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128Configuring Static ARP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131Configuring RIP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132Configuring a VLAN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133Configuring Multicast . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134Configuring Spanning Tree . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135

SCM Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137SCM General Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137Reboot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139SCM Software Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139Configuring SCM SNMP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140GE Ports Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142Configuring Licenses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144Configuring SCM Logging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144Notification Log . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146Security Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146CAS Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147nCompass Control and Status GUI Support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148

Configuring an MCM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149Configuring an MCM Blade . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149Reboot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150Reconnect . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150Ports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150Network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151

Configuring a DSP 4PAC (Media Processor) Submodule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155Specifying the Processing Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156

The Maintenance Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158

9


User Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159Administration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159

User List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160Add User . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160Set Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160

The Diagnostics Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161Log . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161

Log File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161Clear Log . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161Upload Log . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161

Utilities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163Ping Utility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163

Technical Support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164Show . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164Send . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165

Alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166Active Alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166Clear Alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166

Chapter 4: Port Configuration and Statistics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167

Overview of Connecting Inputs to Outputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168

Overview of Logical Ports Structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169Packetizers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169Output Stream Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170

iPlex Interface Naming Convention . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170Configuration and Statistics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170Screen Navigation Buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171

Navigating through Ports/ Interfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172Backing Up the Configuration File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173

Physical Input Ports: ASIIn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174Configuring ASIIn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174

Interface ASIIn I/O . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174Transport Stream . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175

ASIIn Statistics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176Interface ASIIn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176Device Errors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176Transport Stream . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177CAT Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178

Physical Input Ports: Encoders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179

10


Encoder Plus General Configuration and Statistics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179Encoder Plus General Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179Encoder Plus General Statistics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183Configuring Encoder Plus MPEG-1 Layer II Audio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185Encoder Plus MPEG-1 Layer II Audio Statistics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186Configuring Encoder Plus Dolby Digital Audio (AC-3) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188Encoder Plus Dolby Digital Audio AC-3 Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189Encoder Plus Dolby Digital (AC-3) Audio Statistics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190

Encoder Plus Advanced Configuration and Statistics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191Encoder Advanced Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191Encoder Advanced Statistics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200

MPEG-4 AVC Encoder General Configuration and Statistics . . . . . . . . . . 200MPEG-4 AVC Encoder General Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200VBI Support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203MPEG-4 AVC Encoder General Statistics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204Audio Channel 1 Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206Channel 2 Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207Channel 1 Statistics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207Channel 2 Statistics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208

MPEG-4 AVC Encoder Advanced Configuration and Statistics . . . . . . . . 208MPEG-4 AVC Encoder Advanced Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208MPEG-4 AVC Encoder Advanced Statistics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213

MPEG-4 AVC Ultracompression HD Encoder (AVCEnc HD) General Configuration and Statistics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214

Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214AVCEnc HD General Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214AVCEnc HD General Statistics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217AVCEnc HD Audio Channels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218Configuring AVCEnc HD MPEG-1 Layer II Audio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219AVCEnc HD MPEG-1 Layer II Audio Statistics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221Configuring AVCEnc HD Dolby Digital AC-3 Audio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222AVCEnc HD Dolby Digital AC-3 Audio Statistics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226

MPEG-4 AVC Ultracompression HD Encoder (AVCEnc HD) PIP Configuration and Statistics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227

Configuring AVCEnc HD PIP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227AVCEnc HD PIP Statistics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228

MPEG-4 AVC Ultracompression HD Encoder (AVCEnc HD) Advanced Configuration and Statistics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229

AVCEnc HD Advanced Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229AVCEnc HD Advanced Statistics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231

MPEG-4 AVC Ultracompression SD Encoder (AVCEnc SD) General Configuration and Statistics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233

AVCEnc SD General Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233

11


AVCEnc SD General Statistics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234AVCEnc SD Audio Channels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235Configuring AVCEnc SD MPEG-1 Layer II Audio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 236AVC Encoder SD MPEG-1 Layer II Audio Statistics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238AVCEnc SD Dolby Digital AC-3 Audio Configuration and Statistics . . . . . . . . . . . 239VBI Support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239

MPEG-4 AVC Ultracompression SD Encoder PIP Configuration and Statistics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241MPEG-4 AVC Ultracompression SD Encoder Advanced Configuration and Statistics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242

AVCEnc SD Advanced Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242AVCEnc SD Advanced Statistics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245

MPEG-4 AVC Ultracompression (Single Slot) Encoder General Configuration and Statistics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248

Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248AVCEnc Single HD General Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248AVCEnc HD Single General Statistics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251AVCEnc Single HD Audio Channels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253Configuring AVCEnc Single HD MPEG-1 Layer II Audio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255AVCEnc Single HD MPEG-1 Layer II Audio Statistics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255Configuring AVCEnc Single HD AAC Audio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256AVCEnc Single HD AAC Audio Statistics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257Configuring AVCEnc Single HD Dolby Digital AC-3 Audio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258AVCEnc Single HD Dolby Digital AC-3 Audio Statistics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 259

MPEG-4 AVC Ultracompression (Single Slot) HD Encoder PIP Configuration and Statistics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260

Configuring AVCEnc Single HD PIP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260AVCEnc Single HD PIP Statistics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260

MPEG-4 AVC Ultracompression (Single Slot) Encoder HD Advanced Configuration and Statistics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261

AVCEnc Single HD Advanced Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261AVCEnc Single HD Advanced Statistics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263

MPEG-4 AVC Ultracompression (Single Slot) Encoder SD General Configuration and Statistics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 264

AVCEnc Single SD General Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265AVCEnc Single SD General Statistics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266AVCEnc Single SD Audio Channels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266Configuring AVCEnc Single SD MPEG-1 Layer II Audio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268AVCEnc Single SD MPEG-1 Layer II Audio Statistics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268AVCEnc Single SD AAC Audio Configuration and Statistics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269Configuring AVCEnc Single SD Dolby Digital AC-3 Audio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269AVCEnc Single SD Dolby Digital AC-3 Audio Statistics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270

MPEG-4 AVC Ultracompression (Single Slot) SD Encoder PIP Configuration

12


and Statistics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 271MPEG-4 AVC Ultracompression (Single Slot) Encoder SD Advanced Configuration and Statistics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 272

AVCEnc Single SD Advanced Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 272AVCEnc Single SD Advanced Statistics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 274

Physical Output Ports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 276ASIOut General Configuration and Statistics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 276

Configuring ASIOut . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 276ASIOut Statistics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 280

ASIOut Advanced Configuration and Statistics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 281ASIOut Advanced Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 281Descriptors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 281ASIOut Advanced Statistics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287

Creating Logical Ports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 289

Logical Input Ports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 290TCPIn Ports Configuration and Statistics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 291

Configuring TCPIn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 291TCPIn Statistics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 293Configuring External Data Sources to Connect to the iPlex . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 294IP Tunneling for TCPIn Port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 294TCPIn Statistics - IP Tunneling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 296Routing TCPIn Data to One or More Output Ports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 297

UDPIn Port Configuration and Statistics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 298Configuring UDPIn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 298UDPIn Statistics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300

RTPIn Port Configuration and Statistics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300Configuring RTPIn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300RTPIn Statistics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 303

ATMIn Port Configuration and Statistics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 305Configuring ATMIn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 305ATMIn Statistics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 306

FileIn Port Configuration and Statistics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307Configuring FileIn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307FileIn Statistics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 308

Logical Output Ports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 309CBR Padding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 309

Configuring CBR Padding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 309CBR Padding Statistics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 310CBR Padding Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 311

Output Port Advanced Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 312

13


UDPOut Port Configuration and Statistics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 314Configuring UDPOut . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 314UDPOut Statistics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 318Configuring a UDP Backhaul Port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 319

RTPOut Configuration and Statistics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 320Configuring RTPOut . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 320RTPOut Statistics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 324

ATMOut Configuration and Statistics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 326Configuring ATMOut . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 326ATMOut Statistics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 328

Control Ports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 330MediaProc Submodule Ports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 330

DVB-S2 Support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 331ASIPlus Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 331Selecting ACM or CCM Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 331Input Ports and Packetizers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 333

Creating Input Ports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 333ASIOut Port and Bandwidth Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 334ACM Mode Ports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 335

IPFwd In Configuration and Statistics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 335UDPIn Configuration and Statistics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 336TCPIn Configuration and Statistics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 338ASIOut Port and Bandwidth Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 340ASIOut Port General Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 340ASIOut Port General Statistics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 342ASIOut Advanced Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 342ASIOut Advanced Statistics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 343

CCM Mode Ports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 344IPFwd IN Configuration and Statistics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 344UDPIn Configuration and Statistics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 345TCPIn Configuration and Statistics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 347ASIOut Configuration and Statistics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 349

Transrater Ports: XrtrIn and XrtrOut . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 351Configuring XrtrIn and XrtrOut Ports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 352XrtrIn Statistics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 353XrtrOut Statistics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 353

Transcoder Ports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 354MPEG-4 AVC Transcoder Input (XcdrIn) Configuration and Statistics . . 354

XcdrIn General Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 354XCdrIn General Statistics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 356

14


XcdrIn Audio Channel 1 Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 357XcdrIn Audio Channel 1 Statistics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 358XcdrIn Audio Channel 2 Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 358XcdrIn Audio Channel 2 Statistics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 358XcdrIn Advanced Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 358XcdrIn Advanced Statistics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 360

MPEG-4 AVC Transcoder Output (XcdrOut) Configuration and Statistics 360XcdrOut Port Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 360XcdrOut Port Statistics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 362

MPEG-4 AVC Ultracompression Transcoder Input Port (AVCXcdrIn) Configuration and Statistics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 364

AVCXcdrIn Port General Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 364 AVCXcdrIn Port General Statistics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 366 Configuring AVCXcdrIn Port Audio Channels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 368Configuring AVCXcdrIn Port PIP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 375AVCXcdrIn Port PIP Statistics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 377 AVCXcdrIn Port Advanced Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 377AVCXcdrIn Port Advanced Statistics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 379

MPEG-4 AVC Ultracompression Output Port (AVCXcdrOut) Configuration and Statistics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 380

AVCXcdrOut Port Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 380AVCXcdrOut Port Statistics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 384

MPEG-4 AVC Ultracompression (Single Slot) Transcoder Input Port Configuration and Statistics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 387

AVCXcdrIn Single Port General Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 387AVCXcdrIn Single Port General Statistics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 389Configuring AVCXcdrIn Port Audio Channels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 391Configuring AVCXcdrIn Single Port PIP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 394AVCXcdrIn Single Port PIP Statistics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 395AVCXcdrIn Single Port Advanced Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 396AVCXcdrIn Single Port Advanced Statistics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 396

MPEG-4 AVC Ultracompression (Single Slot) Output Port Configuration and Statistics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 398

AVCXcdrOut Single Port Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 398AVCXcdrOut Single Port Statistics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 399

Data Type Packetizers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 402M2T Packetizer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 402

M2T Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 402M2T Statistics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 402

Section Packetizer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 404Section Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 404Section Statistics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 404

Data Pipe Packetizer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 404

15


Data Pipe Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 404Data Pipe Statistics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 404

IP Tunneling Packetizer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 405IP Tunneling Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 405IP Tunneling Statistics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 405

Programs, Elements and Streams List Statistics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 406Programs List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 406Elements List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 407Streams List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 408

Real-Time Monitoring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 409Installing the Java Plug-in . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 409Stream Chart Button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 410Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 410

View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 410Scale . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 414Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 414Sample . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 414

Chapter 5: Configuration Scenarios . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 415

Configuration Scenarios Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 416Scenario 1: Routing a Single Program from ASIIn to UDPOut . . . . . . . . . 417

STEP 1: Setting up the VLAN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 418STEP 2: Configuring ASIIn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 419STEP 3: Checking ASIIn Statistics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 419STEP 4: Creating the UDPOut Port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 419STEP 5: Configuring Media Routing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 421STEP 6: Checking Port Statistics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 422

Scenario 2: Routing a Custom Program from ASIIn to UDPOut . . . . . . . 423STEP 1: Creating a UDPOut Port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 423STEP 2: Configuring Media Routing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 425STEP 3: Checking Port Statistics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 425

Configuration Questions and Answers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 426Topic 1: UDPOut Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 426Topic 2: iPlex IP Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 427

Chapter 6: Redundancy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 429

Network Redundancy Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 430The TANDBERG Television (1+1) Redundancy Solution . . . . . . . . . . . . . 430Input Redundancy Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 431

16


Output Redundancy Options for IPTV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 432

iPlex Unit Pairing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 435Redundancy Port on iPlex . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 435Control Port on iPlex . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 435Example Redundant iPlex System (Set up) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 436Example Redundant iPlex System (Flip) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 438Example Redundant iPlex System (Failover) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 440Example Redundant iPlex System (Upgrade) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 441

Operational Aspects of Redundancy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 442Configuration Changes and Redundancy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 442Operating Method Using External Redundancy Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 442

Automatic Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 442Manual Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 442

Alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 443Sync Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 443

Appendix A: Packet Formats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 445

Packet Formats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 446MPEG Section Packet Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 446MPE Packetizer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 447

Multiprotocol Encapsulation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 448Transport Header . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 448Datagram Section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 449The MAC Address Field . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 450IP Datagram Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 451LLC_SNAP Header . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 451

Data Piping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 451Transport Header . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 451Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 451

Appendix B: Video Traffic Shaping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 453

Video Traffic Shaping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 454What is Traffic Shaping? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 454Why Use Video Traffic Shaping? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 454Classes of Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 455

Single Stream MPEG-2 Traffic Shaping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 455Video Traffic Descriptors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 455

Appendix C: Finding MAC Addresses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 457

17


Finding the MAC Address of a Network Device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 458

Appendix D: Former Media Routing Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 459

Configuring Media Routing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 460Basics of Media Routing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 461Program Routing vs. Stream Routing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 461How to set up Media Routing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 462

Configuration Scenario 1: Routing a Single Program from ASIIn to UDPOut . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 473

STEP 1: Setting up the VLAN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 474STEP 2: Configuring ASIIn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 475STEP 3: Checking ASIIn Statistics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 475STEP 4: Creating the UDPOut Port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 475STEP 5: Configuring Media Routing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 477STEP 6: Checking Port Statistics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 479STEP 7: Selecting the Channel at an IP Set-Top Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 480

Scenario 2: Routing a Custom Program from ASIIn to UDPOut . . . . . . . 481STEP 1: Creating a UDPOut Port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 482STEP 2: Configuring Media Routing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 483STEP 3: Checking Port Statistics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 486STEP 4: Selecting the Channel at an IP Set-Top Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 486

Scenario 3: Transrating a Program from ASIIn to UDPOut . . . . . . . . . . . . 487Phase 1 Input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 487Phase 2 Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 491

Scenario 4: Transrating Stream Routes from ASIIn to UDPOut . . . . . . . . 494Phase 1 Input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 494Phase 2 Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 498

Scenario 5: Defining a Program without Setting the PID to Transrate . . . 502Create Audio Element . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 505Apply Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 505

Scenario 6: Audio-only Encoding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 507

Appendix E: Glossary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 509

Acronyms, Abbreviations, and Definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 510

Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 525

18


This page is intentionally left blank.

19


This page is intentionally left blank.

20

Introducing TANDBERGTelevision iPlex

Chapter 1

21


Introduction to the Web Interface User GuideUse this guide to help you understand features and tasks that can be performed with iPlex using the Web graphical user interface.

Topics discussed in this guide include:

• How to contact technical support.

• iPlex hardware overview (also in the Installation & Hardware Specification Guide).

• Basic concepts that are helpful to understand in order to get the most out of the iPlex.

• Scenarios that may help you figure out the best configuration for your needs.

• Graphical user interface features and functions.

• Port configuration procedures and their related statistics.

• Setting up and understanding redundancy.

Other iPlex GuidesIn addition to this guide, you can also refer to the following documents:

• Installation & Hardware Specifications Guide, for information on:

■ Hardware specifications■ Hardware installation and configuration■ Software installation and configuration

• Network Management & Monitoring Reference Guide, for information on:

■ SNMP formats, messages, and conceptual row creation■ MIBs■ HP Openview information

• Command Line Interface Reference Guide, for information on

■ CLI basics, conventions, and connection method.■ Command definitions■ Show commands and Config commands

22


Contacting TANDBERG Television Customer Support

For information on TANDBERG Television support hours and how to contact TANDBERG Television support, please refer to the literature that came with your support contract. To contact TANDBERG Television about the purchase a sup-port contract, please refer to the contact information below.

Basic support is available to TANDBERG Television customers either by e-mail or on the Web (refer to contact information below). Please send a detailed mes-sage, and you will be contacted during regular business hours (see the Support Check List).

Contact Information

Support Check ListWhen contacting Customer Support, please provide the following information:

• Your name, company name, e-mail address, and phone number

• TANDBERG Television product name and version number

• A complete network diagram with IP addresses

• The name and version of the network software

• If set-top boxes are involved, please indicate brand and software version

• Syslog entries for the period over which the problem occurred

• iPlex Tech Support Dump

• A full description of the problem:

■ Did this problem occur just after making a network change?■ Did this problem occur just after adding or removing hardware or software?

E-mail: [email protected]

Web: http://www.tandbergtv.com/contactingsupport.ink

23


TANDBERG Television iPlex OverviewTANDBERG Television’s iPlex is the industry’s first networking device with advanced content manipulation techniques that enable efficient bandwidth-saving delivery of the highest quality video and audio, regardless of the content’s point of origin or format. iPlex is a carrier class, modular, reliable, and expandable chassis-based hardware-networking platform.

iPlex is designed for the efficient delivery of Internet data (IP), video (MPEG-2 and MPEG-4 AVC), and streaming (IP) video/audio across any broadband net-work or IP backbone, such as DSL or fiber. iPlex is content-aware, and enables the connection of different transmission media at different rates. It can multiplex, de-multiplex, format and inject IP data in-band into MPEG-2 transport streams, retrieve IP content from MPEG-2 transport streams, and transmit IP and MPEG-2 data with full Quality of Service (QoS).

iPlex can function as a content switching, routing, video rate changing and multi-plexing device in the core of the network, connecting multiple streams of data and MPEG traffic, and intelligently routing the traffic to its appropriate destination. The final client can be a PC with appropriate client application, a digital set-top box, or a residential gateway capable of accepting video/data streams and provid-ing video outputs to standard television sets.

The following are features of the TANDBERG Television iPlex:

• 1 RU unit

• 8 PMC slots, which support all of the current PMCs

• Front panel with LCD and six keys

• Built-in ports (10/100 Ethernet, two GE on SFPs for data transfer, console serial port)

• Routing of IP traffic

• Video encoding

• Delivery of MPEG-2 and MPEG-4 AVC over IP networks

• Configuration via Web GUI, CLI, or SNMP interfaces

• High reliability with all components redundant

• NEBS level 3 compliant and certified

NEBS compliant (NetworkEquipment Building Systems

compliant) Adhering to standardsfrom Telcordia for equipment

used in telco central offices(COs). Most equipment must beNEBS certified before it can beintegrated into carrier facilities.NEBS specifications deal withpower management, electricalshielding, disaster preparation

and hardware interfaces.

24


iPlex ChassisThe iPlex is designed for both central and co-location offices. iPlex is NEBS Level 3 certified. It provides room for 8 submodules. The Switch Controller Module (SCM) subsystem provides the overall chassis monitoring, control, and backplane connectivity. The Media Controller Module (MCM) subsystem provides the sub-moduel slots and submoduel connectivity and processing..

Switch Controller Module (SCM) Sub-systemThe Switch Controller Module (SCM) subsystem provides backplane connectivity for all PMCs inside the chassis.

The SCM subsystem provides Gigabit Ethernet ports for connectivity and 10/100 Fast Ethernet ports for network management. It also provides a serial console port for local access to the command line interface (CLI), a flash module—for storing software loads and configuration data.

Media Controller Module (MCM) Sub-systemThe Media Controller Module (MCM) subsystem provides submodule connectiv-ity. The MCM subsystem provides a standards-based PCI mezzanine interface for up to eight submodules. The submodules supported include ASI Input/Output, Real-Time MPEG-2 Encoder Plus (RTME Plus), Real-Time MPEG-4 AVC Encoder, MPEG-4 AVC Ultracompression SD Encoder, MPEG-4 AVC Ultra-compression HD Encoder, and MPEG-4 AVC Ultracompression Transcoder, ATM OC/3 Network Interface (ANI), ATM DS3 Network Interface (ANI), and ATM E3 Network Interface (ANI). The ASI submodule is capable of supporting up to 160 Mbps.

MCM SubmodulesThe MCM supports the following submodules:

• ASI Input: Contains two ASI input ports, page 26.

• ASI Output: Contains two ASI output ports, page 26.

• ATM Network Interface (ANI) Single-mode: Contains one standard ATM OC-3/STM-1Single-mode interface, page 27.

4321

4321

CONTROL

REDUNDANCY

CONSOLE

ALARM

GE1

GE2

100/240 VAC~6A

LINK

STATU

S

IN

OU

TATM

/DS3

LINK

ATM/E3

STATU

S

IN

OU

TSTATUS

MM

LINK OC-3/STM

-1A

TMSTATUS

SM

LINK OC-3/STM

-1A

TM

RD

YA

CT

RD

YA

CT

AS

I OU

T

1A1B2A2BAUDIO

AV

Cenc

CI/Y

/SD

I

C2/CRDY

ACT

AUDIO

AV

Cenc

CI/Y

/SD

I

C2/CRDY

ACT

RD

YA

CT

RD

YA

CT

AS

I IN

1A1B2A2B

25


• ATM Network Interface (ANI) Multi-mode: Contains one standard ATM OC-3/STM-1Multi-mode interface, page 27.

• ATM Network Interface (ANI) ATM E3 and ATM DS3. These interface cards each use twoBNCs instead of an optical SC connector, spage 27.

• Real-Time MPEG-2 Encoder Plus (RTME Plus): Contains one analog video input and fouraudio channels (two stereo pairs), page 29.

• Real-Time MPEG-4 AVC Encoder: Contains one analog video input and four audio channels(two stereo pairs), page 29.

• Real-Time MPEG-4 AVC Ultracompression HD Encoder: Supports High Definitionuncompressed digital video inputs, page 29 and page 32.

• Real-Time MPEG-4 AVC Ultracompression SD Encoder: Supports Standard Definitionuncompressed digital video inputs, page 29 and page 32.

• DSP 4PAC, or Media Processor: Uses four high-speed DSPs to provide a wide range offunctionality, including MPEG-2 to MPEG-4 Advanced Transcoding, page 33.

• DSP 6PAC Transrating: Provides transrating capability for up to six individual videoprograms, page 34.

• MPEG-4 AVC Ultracompression Transcoder: Provides transcoding capability for video andaudio streams, page 34 and page 35.

• ASI Plus: Provides DVB-CAS content scrambling functionality, which is independent of theASI ports, page 36.

ASI Input andOutput

Submodules

The ASI Input submodule contains two independent DVB-ASI ports. Each port contains two physical input connectors that are software-selectable. The total input rate is supported, application dependent. The submodule itself has a limitation of 160 Mbps (combined rate across both ports).

RDY ACT

RDY ACT

ASI IN

1A

1B

2A

2B

26


The ASI output submodule contains two independent DVB-ASI ports, each with two output connectors. The output submodule can feed modulators (satellite or cable) or video multiplexers.

ATM NetworkInterfaces

The iPlex supports the following bidirectional ATM Network Interfaces:■ ATM OC-3 at 155.52 Mb/s on single-mode fiber

■ ATM OC-3 at 155.52 Mb/s on multi-mode fiber

RDY ACT

RDY ACT

ASI OUT

1A

1B

2A

2B

STATUS

SM

LINK

OC-3/STM-1ATM

STATUS

MM

LINK

OC-3/STM-1ATM

27


■ ATM DS3 at 44.736 Mb/s on coaxial cable

■ ATM E3 at 34.368 Mb/s on coaxial cable

The following IP encapsulation modes are supported on all ATM Network Inter-faces (PVC mode only):

■ RFC-2684, routed mode (Classical IP over ATM)■ RFC-2684, Ethernet bridged mode

The ATM Network Interfaces also support raw MPEG over ATM AAL-5, as per the ATM Forum's “Audiovisual Multimedia Services: Video On Demand Specifi-cation 1.0".

Additionally, the OC-3 interfaces support output traffic shaping in VBR, CBR or UBR mode. The E3 and DS3 interfaces only support UBR mode.

LINK

STATUS

IN

OUTATM/DS3

LINK

ATM/E3

STATUS

IN

OUT

28


Real-TimeMPEG-2 EncoderPlus (RTME Plus)

This RTME Plus encoder offers more audio encoding options. It supports four channels (two stereo pairs) of audio for encoding into either MPEG-1 Layer II or Dolby Digital AC-3 audio. The audio source can come from any of the following input interfaces: unbalanced, balanced, AES or embedded Serial Digital Interface (SDI). The encoder supports analog and digital video sources. For an analog video signal, S-Video or composite video inputs are available for configuration. Alter-nately, the encoder can receive digital video input through the SDI.

Real-TimeMPEG-4 AVC

Encoder

The MPEG-4 AVC Encoder uses the same front end as the Encoder Plus. It sup-ports H.264/MPEG-4 AVC video and four channel (two stereo pairs) of audio for encoding using the H.264/MPEG-4 AVC for video and AAC/MPEG-1 Layer 2 codec for audio. The audio source can come from any of the following input inter-faces: unbalanced, balanced, AES or embedded Serial Digital Interface (SDI).

Real-TimeMPEG-4 AVC

UltracompressionEncoders

The Real-Time MPEG-4 AVC Ultracompression Encoder submodule uses two daughter cards: one for Standard Definition video and another for High Definition uncompressed digital video. Accordingly, the MPEG-4 AVC Ultracompression encoder offers two factory-installed input interface options:

• MPEG-4 AVC Ultracompression HD Encoder with HD-SDI Interface: this interface onlysupports digital uncompressed video. It can be configured to accept either HD-SDI or SD-SDI inputs.

AUDIO

MPEG-2 ENC

CI/Y/SDI

C2/C

RDY ACT

AUDIO

ADVEnc

CI/Y/SDI

C2/C

RDY ACT

NOTEHD operation requires a license key.

29


• MPEG-4 AVC Ultracompression SD Encoder with SD Interface: this interface only supportsstandard definition video signals, both analog Composite, S-Video, and digital (SD-SDI), inthe exact same arrangement as the MPEG-2 Encoder Plus and the H.264 MPEG-4 AVCEncoder.

These encoders use dual slots, see the illustrations. Both encoders compress the input video to MPEG-4 Part 10 (H.264). Both interfaces support embedded audio in the digital interface, as well as analog balanced or unbalanced audio. They also support digital AES audio.

The encoders support between four and six audio stereo pairs, depending on the selected audio compression scheme. The first two audio pairs can be analog-bal-anced or unbalanced signals, connected through the 37-pin micro-D connector. When using AES signals, the 37-pin micro-D connector allows for up to four ste-reo pairs, plus an optional clock sync output.

The remaining channels are only available as embedded audio in the HD or SD Encoders.

HD Encoder The HD encoder provides one BNC for uncompressed digital video input, with support for both HD-SDI and SD-SDI interfaces, as well as the audio interface (see the illustration). The upper part of the front view is a blank-face panel.

NOTEThe clock for the AES audio inputs MUST be synchronized with thevideo frame rate.

NOTEThe audio cables used in the MPEG-2 Encoder Plus and in the MPEG-4 AVC Encoder are compatible with this module.

30


SD Encoder The SD encoder option provides two BNCs for uncompressed analog or digital video input. These two BNCs can be configured in software to be two composite inputs, one S-Video input, or one SDI input. The SD encoder also includes the audio interface, which is identical to that of the HD encoder.

NOTEAny analog video input to the card must be time-base stable and any inputs coming directly from any kind of VTR (such as ½” con-sumer VCRs) may show as very unstable inputs without the use of a time-base corrector/frame synchronizer.

31


Real-TimeMPEG-4 AVC

UltracompressionSingle-slotEncoders

The single-slot Ultracompression encoders are a denser version of the dual-slot module, with improved functionality. The advantages for a single-slot encoder are:

• Fits in a single slot, so 8 of them can be fitted in one iPlex chassis.

• Improved video quality compared to the dual-slot encoder.

• Up to 8 stereo audio pairs can be encoded by each card, regardless of encoding mode.

HD Single-slotEncoder

The Single-slot HD encoder provides one BNC for uncompressed digital video input, with support for both HD-SDI and SD-SDI interfaces, as well as the audio interface. The interface details are the same as those of the dual-slot version.

32


SD Single-slotEncoder

The Single-slot SD encoder option provides two BNCs for uncompressed analog or digital video input. These two BNCs can be configured in software to be two composite inputs, one S-Video input, or one SDI input. The SD encoder also includes the audio interface, which is identical to that of the HD encoder.

DSP 4PAC (MediaProcessor)Submodule

The DSP 4PAC, or Media Processor, submodule is a high performance, program-mable platform for the video headend platform. Software is licensable from TANDBERG Television to give the Media Processor a wide range of functionality, including MPEG-2 to MPEG-4 AVC Transcoding. The DSP 4PAC (Media Pro-cessor) Submodule uses four DSPs to give it the performance needed to meet these applications’ demands.

As multi-function devices, 4PACs or Media Processors can do transcoding or tran-srating. When they do transcoding, the 4 DSPs work cooperatively, and provide ONE channel of transcoding, or, one transcoder input and one transcoder output ports. When configured to do transrating, they can provide multiple transrator input and output ports. The number of ports they provide depends on the config-uration of the Media (DSP 4PAC) Processor:

• If configured for High, it is one service per DSP, and a 4PAC will provide 4 transrator input /output ports.

33


• If configured for Medium, it is two services per DSP, and a 4PAC will provide 8 transratorinput / output ports.

• If configured for Low, it is three services per DSP, and a 4PAC will provide 12 transrator input/ output ports.

DSP 6PACTransratingSubmodule

The DSP 6PAC Transrating Submodules are plug-in modules that provide the per stream video processing capability needed for rate shaping and rate reduction. Each DSP submodule provides transrating capability for up to six individual video programs.

MPEG-4 AVCUltracompression

Transcoder

The MPEG-4 AVC Ultracompression Transcoder provides real-time transcoding from MPEG-2 to H.264. H.264 Video provides a better quality as well as 40-60 % lower bitrates compared to MPEG-2. The transcoder also provides full live video compression up to HD. This is a dual-slot transcoder.

The MPEG-4 AVC Ultracompression Transcoder accepts both SD and HD Video Format inputs. It provides six Audio channels and Dual Mono Split with a repli-cated channel. The Codec transitions between the two channels seamlessly (except possibly for a signal level discontinuity) and without a restart.

Video stream is always transcoded. Audio streams in the input program can be selected for pass-through or transcoding. For transcoding, either two stereo pairs or one 5.1 channel is supported.

The output of AVC Ultracompression Transcoder contains two programs:

MEDIAPROCESSOR

MP 1

MP 2

MP 3

MP 4

34


• The first program contains the main video and all the transcoded audio streams and passedthrough streams. The program number for the first program is the same as the programnumber of the input source.

• The second program contains the PIP video. The PIP program number is one plus the mainprogram number. The PMT PID for PIP is dynamically generated to be a unique one.

The PIP video PID is by default 0x201. If this PID already exists in the input pro-gram, a unique PID is generated for the PIP video stream.

Unique PID values are also dynamically generated for any audio channels that are replicated and transcoded.

The transcoder has a scan conversion capability, which controls the picture resiz-ing, see page 382.

An AVC Ultracompression Transcoder card’s profile and its front on a daughter card are shown as follows.

MPEG-4 AVCUltracompression

Single-slotTranscoder

The single-slot Ultracompression transcoders are a denser version of the dual-slot module, with improved functionality. The advantages for a single-slot transcoder are:


• Improved video quality compared to the dual-slot transcoder.

35


• Up to 8 stereo audio pairs can be encoded by each card, regardless of encoding mode.

An AVC Ultracompression Single-slot Transcoder card’s profile and its front are shown as follows.

ASIPlusSubmodule

The ASI Plus submodule provides bidirectional ASI ports and scrambling capabil-ity. The submodule contains four physical connectors; each pair of connectors can be independently configured as two ASI inputs or one ASI output, replicated over the two connectors. The ASI inputs can be used to receive content from profes-sional satellite or cable receivers, video servers, table generators, or any other device with ASI outputs. The ASI outputs can be used to drive multiplexers, satel-lite or cable modulators, or any other device requiring an ASI signal.

This submodule also provides DVB Common Scrambling functionality, which is independent of the physical ASI ports. Connection to Subscriber Management System is done through the chassis Gigabit Ethernet ports.

The ASIPlus submodule is distinguished by its label (ASI Plus) and by BNC con-nectors (red PMS 032).

36


Control Station RequirementsAn iPlex unit can be managed by a number of different methods.

Web GUIUse either HTTP or HTTPS (secure).

Web Browser The Web GUI can run on any of the following browsers:

• Firefox 2.0+

• Internet Explorer 6.0+

Older versions may not work properly.

Real-TimeMonitoring

The real-time monitoring feature (see Real-Time Monitoring on page 409) uses a Java Plug-in that automatically launches when you click the Stream Chart button at the bottom of a port statistics page.

CLIUse either the serial port, telnet, or SSH (secure).

Telnet The unit will work with any compliant implementation. Examples include:

• Microsoft Telnet supplied with Windows

• PuTTY (freeware)

• Standard Unix Telnet

• TeraTerm Pro (freeware)

SSH The unit will work with any compliant implementation. Examples include:

• PuTTY (freeware)

• SSH client from OpenSSH (freeware)

• TeraTerm SSH (freeware)

SNMPUse either v2 or v3 (secure).

• HP-OpenView (commercial): http://www.openview.hp.com

• Mbrowser (freeware): http://www.kill-9.org/mbrowse/index.html

• MG-Soft (commercial): http://www.mg-soft.com

• Net-SNMP (freeware): http://www.net-snmp.org

37

http://www.net-snmp.org

http://www.kill-9.org/mbrowse/index.html

http://www.mg-soft.com

http://www.openview.hp.com


38

Basic Concepts Chapter 2

39


DVB Transport StreamA Digital Video Broadcasting (DVB) Transport Stream includes video, audio, or data, Service Information (SI), and Conditional Access System (CAS) informa-tion. The Conditional Access System contains the entitlement for specific pro-grams and customer service information. This information has two forms: Entitlement Management Messages (EMMs); that is, who can receive programs and what programs they can receive; and Entitlement Control Messages (ECMs); that is, how to unscramble the program information.

Data InjectionThe purpose of data injection is to format and inject data into an MPEG-2 Trans-port Stream. Data needs to be formatted into transport packets in order to be injected.

Ports and PacketizersPorts are the means by which data is input to an iPlex. If data is not in transport format, a packetizer is used to convert the data to a transport format.

Input Port PacketizersMPEG-2 Transport Stream (M2T) Packetizer

■ Input: Data that is already in MPEG-2 TS packet format, but the continuitycounter may need fixing.

■ Operation: Delimits the packets and passes them to the multiplexer.

Data Piping Packetizer

■ Input: Byte stream or UDP datagram.■ Operation: Copies the input data into the payload of MPEG-2 TS packet

format.MPEG-2 Section Packetizers

■ Input: Data is in sections.■ Operation: Divides the sections into MPEG-2 TS packet format.

ECM (Entitlement ControlMessage) Private conditional

access information that carriesthe control word in a secure

manner along with privateentitlement information.

EMM (Entitlement ManagementMessage) Private conditional

access information that specifiesthe authorization levels of

subscribers or groups ofsubscribers for services or

events.

40


SME Network Interface PacketizersIP Traffic Packetizers

■ Input: IP payload.■ Operation: Adds an MPE header to create a section then divides the sections

into MPEG-2 TS packet format.

MPEG-2 Transport Stream PacketsThe MPEG-2 Transport Stream packet is 188 bytes long, with 4 bytes of header.

The main fields in the header are as follows:

• sync byte—always 0x47, which allows delimitation;

• a packet identifier (PID) differentiates between multiple streams;

• continuity counter counts from 0 to 15 on consecutive packets of the same PID.

MPEG SectionsSections are blocks of data of up to 4096 bytes in size. They are divided into Trans-port Stream packets for transmission. MPEG-2 PSI and DVB SI tables are always in sections.

The private data area can be up to 4093 bytes, with 3 bytes of header.

41


Packetizing SectionsSections become the payload of MPEG-2 Transport Stream (TS) packets; how-ever, they can be larger or smaller than the TS packets themselves. Section packing improves the efficiency of the stream.

MPEG Transport Over Packet NetworksThe iPlex supports transmission and reception of MPEG Transport Streams over traditional packet networks. In general terms, a number of 188-byte MPEG Trans-port Packets combine to form the payload of a network PDU. The diagram below illustrates the Network Encapsulation Process. The Protocol Header and Protocol Trailer are specific to the network protocol used.

iPlex Supported ProtocolsThe iPlex supports the following protocol combinations:

MPEG Over UDP/IP

PDU (Protocol Data Unit) Thetechnical name for a frame of

data transmitted over a data link(layer II) in a communications

network.

42


• Over Gigabit Ethernet

• Over ATM

■ Using RFC-2684 LLC Encapsulation for routed non-NLPID protocols(Classical IP)

■ Using RFC-2684 LLC Encapsulation for bridged protocols (Bridged Ethernet)

MPEG Over RTP/UDP/IP

Using RFC 2250 (MPEG2 over RTP) and RFC 1889 (RTP):

• Over Gigabit Ethernet

• Over ATM

■ Using RFC-2684 LLC Encapsulation for routed non-NLPID protocols(Classical IP)

■ Using RFC-2684 LLC Encapsulation for bridged protocols (Bridged Ethernet)

MPEG Over AAL-5 Native ATM.

MPEG EncapsulationThe following two figures illustrate MPEG packet formats over Gigabit Ethernets: The first diagram shows MPEG over UDP/IP over Gigabit Ethernet encapsula-tion, while the second shows RTP encapsulation over Gigabit Ethernet. Note that the only difference between these two is the addition of the RTP header in the Protocol Header section.

The next diagram illustrates MPEG over UDP/IP over ATM, with Classical IP encapsulation (RFC 2684 LLC encapsulation of routed protocols). The AAL-5 payload contains the IP packet plus a RFC 2684 header and a trailer. The whole AAL-5 PDU is then submitted to the ATM layer for further segmentation into ATM cells. The other RFC 2684 ATM encapsulations are similar the changes would show the presence of an RTP header after the UDP header for RTP, and the

43


presence of an Ethernet MAC header before the IP header for bridged Ethernet encapsulation.

The last diagram shows the MPEG over Native ATM encapsulation. It is very sim-ilar to the previous diagram; the difference is the removal of the UDP/IP and RFC 2684 layers (this is why this mode is called “native” ATM, as it does not have any additional protocols). This mode has an empty protocol header and is more band-width-efficient than the other ATM modes. However, the presence of UDP/IP headers in the other modes allows for support of multiple Single-Program Trans-port Streams over a single ATM Virtual Circuit; this is not possible in native mode.

NOTEFor further information see Port Configuration and Statistics, sec-tions on ATMIn, page 305, and ATMOut configuration, page 326. Also see, ATM Forum, “Audiovisual Multimedia Services: Video on Demand Specification 1.1,” March 1997.

44


IPv6 SupportSupport for IPv6 is available only for the Gigabit Ethernet ports.

VLANsA VLAN configured with IPv6 addressing will not accept IPv4 traffic; similarly, an IPv4 VLAN will not process any IPv6 packet.

UDPOut/RTPOutIPv6 addressing is available as an option only for the UDPOut and RTPOut ports with multicast destination address. IPv6 packets can only be routed to tagged or untagged IPv6 VLAN port. Support of an IPv6 datagram is restricted to transmis-sion out of the system; any IPv6 datagram received by the system is not processed and is dropped.

45


46

Using the Web Interface

Chapter 3

47


The iPlex Web GUIIn this chapter you will learn how to navigate and configure the TANDBERG Television iPlex using the Web GUI.

The illustration examples throughout this chapter use a specific chassis configura-tion. Your view may contain additional or different values depending upon your specific hardware and software configuration.

The Web GUI can run on either the Internet Explorer 6.0+, or Firefox 2.0+ browser. Older versions may not work properly.

Logging In

IP Address In your Web browser, you must type in the IP address of the iPlex in the address box.

Login Page The first page you will see after reaching the unit’s URL is the Login page:

NOTEThe unit’s IP address is the one entered at the time the unit was originally installed (unless it has subsequently been changed). Refer to the Installation and Hardware Specifications Guide for more infor-mation about how to set the unit’s IP address.

48


Default UserNames and

Access Rights

Type in the user name and password and click the Login button. See the Quick Start iPlex Software Guide for the method to set up the “root” password. The follow-ing table is the default user names and access rights.

The administrator has all the privileges of root, except the following menus:

• Configuration > SCM > Logging (turns on/off user logging, see Configuring SCMLogging on page 144)

• Maintenance > Administration (user administration and set chassis time, seeAdministration on page 159)

The operator can access all of the statistics screens and logs, and also clear the logs.

If you are in the root category, you can change these defaults and/or create new logins for the system (see Managing User Access on page 55).

Elements of the Web GUI

Home Page This screenshot shows the iPlex back panel with two DSP cards, two ASI cards, an ASIPlus card, an ATM card, an MPEG-4 AVC Encoder, and an Encoder Plus. Notice, also, the serial and GE ports on the right.

User Name Password Access Rights

root ******** Full administrative rights*

administrator ******** All rights except Add/Delete users

operator ******** Can only view

49


This screenshot shows the iPlex back panel with two DSP cards, two ASI cards, an ATM card, an MPEG-4 AVC Encoder, and an Encoder Plus. Notice, also, the serial and GE ports on the right.

Main Menu(Left side)

On the left side of the iPlex home page are five links in the main menu tree that give you access to the following main pages: Home, Statistics, Configuration, Maintenance, and Diagnostics. Clicking a major menu item displays additional links. The menu tree dynamically changes depending on the blades and submodules installed in your chassis.

Home The Home Page displays a graphic representation of the iPlex chassis containing all active components.

• SCM (Switch Controller Module): The iPlex system controller that is responsible for bootingthe whole system and directing the flow of data between blades.

• MCM (Media Controller Module): The iPlex subsystem that is responsible for all the video/data input, processing, and output under the control of the SCM.

• Carrier Card: A PCM (PCI-based mezzanine card). Small and compact, carrier cards enable alarge variety of PCI products to be retrofitted to other bus environments.

The status LEDs for each submodule and blade display an accurate visual repre-sentation of the iPlex.

Moving the cursor to any part of the chassis will provide the identity of the sub-module. When the cursor changes to a hand, a click will display the statistics page for that component.

If the input Transport Stream is active, you will see that both the physical submod-ule on the chassis and the graphic representation of the chassis is flashing with a green LED.

50


To view the home page completely, it is necessary to set your monitor resolution to 1280 x 1024. However, the screen is more readable at lower resolutions.

Statistics Statistics displays information about every part of the iPlex; such as MCM sub-system and SCM subsystems, carrier cards, sensors, interfaces, networks and routes.

Configuration If you are an administrator or root user, Configuration permits you to modify all the iPlex settings seen in statistics. If you are an operator, this option is not avail-able to you.

Maintenance Maintenance provides access to upgrade software, change user interface prefer-ences, and allows the administrator to add users and give permissions.

Diagnostics Diagnostics allows the user to create and monitor log files for MCMs. It also allows you to generate a tech-support file and send it to TANDBERG Television.

Command Bar(Top Right side)

The command bar on the top right-hand side of the Home Page contains the fol-lowing commands: Help, Logout, Refresh and Status. The bar also displays the name of the user.

Help Help is context-sensitive in that it launches an HTML page providing information about the current screen. Additionally, if you move your cursor over a field or parameter that changes color, you can also receive explanation on that parameter by clicking your mouse.

51


Logout Clicking Logout will take you back to the initial Login page. You cannot get back without logging in again.

Refresh Clicking Refresh will refresh the current page. This is generally necessary after a hardware reconfiguration—that is, to update the graphical view of the iPlex, when a module is inserted or removed.

Status The Status light shows green when the iPlex is in operation.

Screen-relatedNavigation

Buttons

At the top of many of the Configuration and Statistics screens there are buttons (links) like the ones displayed below.

Active (in effect) buttons are blue and inactive buttons are grey. The buttons are:

Mode: Placing the cursor on this button takes you to the Statistics page of this port if you are viewing the Configuration of it and vice versa.

Redundancy: Placing the cursor on this button takes you to the Redundancy chassis screen if redundancy is enabled or takes you to the Primary chassis if you are viewing the Redundancy page.

Navigation: Provides navigation (Next and Previous) through the list of ports or interfaces. See more details in the “Navigating through Ports/Interfaces” below.

Go: Placing the cursor on this button takes you to the:

• Advanced version of the current screen• Media Routes screen.• Media Routing screen.

For the Encoders, the Go button navigates to the Advanced, Media Routes and to the Audio screen with further navigation to the channels, Channel 1, Channel 2 and more channels for the AVC encoders.

52


Logging OutClicking Logout on the Command Bar (see Command Bar (Top Right side) on page 51) takes you back to the initial Login page (see Login Page on page 48). You cannot get back without logging in again.

NOTEThe buttons will be displayed on the screens that use navigation. The buttons may differ depending on the screen navigation needs as shown in the example above.

53


Managing the iPlex Using the Web GUIThis Using the Web Interface chapter is organized around the four main menu items on the left-hand side of the GUI (that is, Statistics, Configuration, Maintenance, and Diagnostics). While most administrative-level procedures are described in the Maintenance section of the menu (see The Maintenance Menu on page 158), some administrative-level procedures require the use of more than the Maintenance menu.

The following administrative-level procedures are described in this section:

User Management• Managing user access (page 55)

• User activity logging (page 55)

• Changing passwords (page 57)

System Management• Setting the system time (page 58)

• Changing the session timeout (page 58)

• Backing up the system configuration file (page 58)

• Looking up the status of optional licenses (page 58)

• Looking up the software version (page 59)

• Upgrading the software (page 59)

Internet Address ManagementSee Changing the Unit’s IP Address on page 62.

Redundant Systems ConfigurationFor information on redundant systems and how to set them up initially, refer to Redundancy starting on page 429.

Memory ManagementSee Managing the Memory Resources on page 62.

54


Managing User AccessYou can view a list of current users, add a new user, edit a user’s information, and delete a user. These procedures are under Maintenance and then Administration on the left-side menu.

View the List ofUsers

1 Click Maintenance and then Administration.

2 Click Users List (see User List on page 160) to see the list of current usersand their User Group (i.e., authorization level).

Add a New User 1 Click Maintenance and then Administration.

2 Click Add User and enter the requested information (see Add User on page160) to add a new user.

Edit a User’sInformation

1 Click Maintenance and then Administration.

2 Click Users List (see User List on page 160) to see the list of current users.

3 Click Edit on the row of the user in the Users List you want to edit and thenenter the requested information.

Delete a User 1 Click Maintenance and then Administration.

2 Click Users List (see User List on page 160) to see the list of current users.

3 To delete a user, click Delete on the row of the user in the Users List youwant to delete and then confirm the delete.

User Activity LoggingTo trace operator activity on iPlex, users in the root group can view logs created by User Logging.

NOTEOnly root users can exercise this feature. Users in theadministrator or operator groups will not be able to see theAdministration screens.

NOTEUse this screen to change a user’s User Group (i.e., operator, administrator, or root) and password. See Logging In on page 48.

NOTEOnly root users can enable this feature. Users in the adminis-trator or operator groups will not be able to see the User Log-ging screens.

55


User activity logging enables system administrators to track any changes made to the system. This is especially important for broadcast facilities, where an operator mistake can take channels off-air. With this feature, an audit trail is created and the system administrator can pinpoint who made what changes at what time.

InformationLogged

The iPlex will log the following information:

• The time the change happened.

• The username of the person executing the change, or the word STARTUP if it is aconfiguration being applied from boot (startup-config).

• The origin of the change request (IP address of the originating machine for SNMP or Web, orconsole name for CLI).

• The interface used (for example, web, CLI or SNMP).

• The type of operation (ADD, MODIFY, REMOVE or INFO). Operations are classified asfollows:■ ADD operation creates a new object. Example: adding a VLAN or a logical port.■ MODIFY operation changes an existing parameter. Example: change a port's

destination IP address or TTL.■ REMOVE operation deletes an object. Example: removing a VLAN or a logical

port.■ INFO operations track pages visited using the Web interface.

• The affected port, or the word SCM if the operation pertains to a system parameter.

• The actual operation performed, and any parameters of this operation (for example, if an IPaddress is changed, the new address is logged).

All the user activity logs include the word USER-LOG to facilitate filtering of this information in the system logs.

Examples of Logs The following are examples of logs:

• User Bob creates a new UDPOut port using the web, from host 192.168.4.112:Nov 4 18:15:50 iplex ctrlLayer[7551]: USER-LOG:192.168.4.112 : bob : WEB : ADD : UDPOut1/0 : Create UDPOut :Associated: ATM1/4, Status: OK

• User Tina modifies the input stream type of the ASIIn1/1 port using the SNMP v2 protocol:Nov 4 18:28:34 iplex ctrlLayer[7553]: USER-LOG :192.168.4.112 : N/A : SNMP : MODIFY : ASIIn1/1 : Input StreamType : Input Stream Type: DVB (0x1), Status: OK

■ Note that no user name is actually logged because SNMPv2 does not have thenotion of user authentication. If you need that, use SNMPv3.

NOTEThere is no logging of the operation of reading a variable or param-eter through CLI or SNMP.

56


• iPlex 3 boots and startup-config is applied:Nov 4 19:14:26 iplex ctrlLayer[7550]: USER-LOG : N/A :STARTUP : CLI : MODIFY : SCM : Apply Config : Filename:startup-config

Enabling UserLogging

To enable user activity logging, see Configuring SCM Logging on page 144. The logs will be available in the iPlex and will also be written to an external syslog server if so configured.

Viewing UserLogs

To view the user activity logs in the iPlex, see Log on page 161.

Changing PasswordsChanging a user’s password is the same thing as editing a user’s information. See Edit a User’s Information on page 55.

WARNINGDue to the limited space for logs in the iPlex, the potentially large number of messages that can be generated by this feature, and the fact that logs do not persist across reboots, TANDBERG Television strongly recommends that an external syslog server be used if log persistence is important. See SCM General Configuration on page 137.

NOTEOnly root users can enable this feature. Users in the adminis-trator or operator groups will not be able to see the User Log-ging screens.

NOTE1. TANDBERG Television recommends that you change each user’s password on a regular basis.2. Only root users can exercise this feature. Users in the admin-istrator or operator groups will not be able to see the Adminis-tration screens.

57


Setting the System Time1 Click Maintenance and then Administration.

2 Click Set Time (see Set Time on page 160) to see and set the current systemtime.

Changing the Session TimeoutThe iPlex is set to timeout 30 minutes after no activity. To change this timeout time, perform the following procedure:

1 Click Maintenance.

2 Click User Information (see User Interface on page 159) and enter the newsession timeout time.

Backing up the System Configuration FileThe iPlex uses the information in the startup configuration file whenever there is a reboot. This startup configuration then becomes the running configuration until you change the file. As you configure your system, TANDBERG Television rec-ommends that you periodically back up your running configuration file. You can do this in one of two ways:

• Copying your running configuration file to your startup configuration file. When your systemreboots, it will use the latest startup file (see Copy Running on page 123).

• Copying your running configuration file to a selected (Flash) destination. The system willreboot using your current startup file, but you can then apply the saved file to become yourrunning configuration file (see Apply Config on page 121).

To back up your running configuration file, perform the following procedure:

1 Click Configuration and then Config File.

2 Click Copy Startup (see Copy Startup on page 122) or Copy Running andfollow the instructions.

Looking up the Status of Optional LicensesSome features require optional licenses to function. To find out which features have installed licenses, see License Statistics on page 90.

NOTEOnly root users can exercise this feature. Users in the adminis-trator or operator groups will not be able to see the Administra-tion screens.

58


Looking up the Software VersionTo find out which version of the software is running on the unit, see Software Sta-tistics on page 84.

Upgrading the SoftwareWhenever software is upgraded, each element of the system must be rebooted; thus, the procedure for upgrading the software depends on whether the iPlex is configured for non-redundant or redundant operation. Redundant systems must be upgraded in a fashion that does not disrupt service as the various system ele-ments are rebooted.

The following upgrade cases are possible:

• Non-redundant systems

• Redundant SCMs with non-redundant MCMs. Redundant MCMs with non-redundant SCMs.Fully-redundant systems.

NOTES1. Upgrading the software preserves the existing configuration files. However, the system must be rebooted for the new software to take effect. The latest startup configuration file will be used for the reboot. See Backing up the System Configuration File on page 58 for guidance on backing up your configuration files.2. Service will be disrupted whenever you reboot a system that is not fully redundant. To boot more quickly to minimize the downtime, consider using a startup configuration file that has no saved defaults (see Copy Startup on page 122).

59


Non-redundantSystems

The following diagram shows the conceptual software upgrade procedure for non-redundant systems:

The steps to upgrade are:

1 Load the new software to the appropriate boot source. Click Maintenance,then Software Upgrade. See Software on page 158.

2 Select the boot source for the new software. See SCM Software Configurationon page 139 to specify the new boot source.

3 Reboot the system. Click Configuration, then SCM, then Reboot. See Rebooton page 139. In this situation, rebooting the SCM reboots also all of the othersystem components and they get whatever software the SCM has. The entireiPlex will be operating with the new software after the rebooting is finished.

4 Do this final step only if necessary. To return to the previous software, use theprocedure described in step 3 above after resetting the boot source in step 2to the previous software. The entire iPlex will be operating with the previoussoftware after the rebooting is finished.

NOTEIf you are currently booting out of Flash 1, for example, it is

recommended that you load the new software into Flash 2. Then ifyou have any issues with the new software, you can return to youroriginal configuration by rebooting out of Flash 1 while you resolvethe issues. This procedure presumes that you will “double-buffer”the boot source each time you perform a software upgrade.

NOTEService will be disrupted when you reboot the system.

SCM(active)

MCM(active)

Boot Sourcecurrent code

Boot Sourceupgraded code

FTP Server(software upgrade)

(e.g., Flash 1) (e.g., Flash 2)

Step 1: Load new software

Step 2: Select boot source

Step 3: Reboot SCM (disrupts service)

iPlex System

upgradeStep 4: Undo

(if necessary[disrupts service])

60


Redundant MCM with Non-redundant SCMThis case is identical to the non-redundant case (see Non-redundant Systems on page 60).

Fully-redundantSystems

This case allows for in-service upgrade.

In-service Upgrade

Load the new software to the appropriate boot source. Click Maintenance, thenSoftware Upgrade. See Software on page 158.

1 Select the boot source for the new software. See SCM Software Configurationon page 139 to specify the new boot source.

2 Reboot the backup unit. Click Configuration, then SCM, then Reboot. SeeReboot on page 139.

3 Make the backup unit the primary unit. Click Configuration, thenRedundancy, then Flip on the iPlex row. See Configuring Redundancy on page101.

NOTEService will be disrupted when you reboot the system.

NOTE Service is not disrupted when performing an in-service upgrade.

NOTEService is not disrupted when performing a manual upgrade.

NOTE If you are currently booting out of Flash 1, for example, TANDBERG Television recommends that you load the new software into Flash 2. Then if you have any issues with the new software, you can return to your original configuration by rebooting out of Flash 1 while you resolve the issues. This procedure presumes you will “double-buffer” the boot source each time you perform a software upgrade.

NOTE Service will not be disrupted when you reboot the backup unit.

61


4 Reboot the new backup unit. Click Configuration, then SCM, then Reboot.See Reboot on page 139.

Changing the Unit’s IP Address

Initial Installation Refer to the Installation and Hardware Specifications Guide for the information about how to set the unit’s IP address at initial installation.

OperationalStatus

Go to the SCM General Configuration screen to change the IP address. See SCM General Configuration on page 137.

Managing the Memory ResourcesThis section covers the following topics:

• Memory overview (page 62)

• Configuration files (page 63)

• Data files (page 63)

• Log files (page 63)

• Software files (page 64)

Memory Overview The memory resources available to the iPlex include the following:

Flash MemoryNon-volatile memory exists on the SCM board for storing configuration (page 63), data (page 63), and software (page 64) information.

Feature-specific MemoryNon-volatile memory exists on the SCM and other various locations for storing configuration (page 63) and log (page 63) information.

Internet LocationsInternet locations can be used for storing configuration (page 63), data (page 63), log (page 63), and software (page 64) information.

NOTE Service will not be disrupted when you reboot the new backup unit.

NOTEThe fileSystemInfoTable table in the File Management MIB indi-cates the total space, free space, and used space for the Flash memory. This information is not available through the Web GUI.

62


ConfigurationFiles

The Startup Config File is used when the system reboots and then becomes the Running Config File. As you configure the iPlex, you edit the running config file.

You can back up the running config file to Flash memory (see Copy Running on page 123) and give it a new name. You can replace the current startup config file (see Copy Startup on page 122) so that the currently running config file will be used for the next reboot. See Backing up the System Configuration File on page 58 for an overview of configuration file backup.

You can remove a backed-up config file (see Remove Config on page 124) or replace the current running config file with a backed-up config file (see Apply Con-fig on page 121).

You can download a config file from the Internet (FTP site) to Flash memory (see Download Config on page 124) or upload a config file to the Internet (see Upload Config on page 124).

The Flash memory available for storing configuration, data, and log files is 11 MBytes.

Data Files Data files are used with FileIn ports (see FileIn Port Configuration and Statistics on page 307). Before configuring the FileIn ports, you must first download the data files (see Download Data File on page 127) from the Internet (FTP sites) and store them in Flash memory. You can also remove data files from memory (see Remove Data File on page 128).


Log Files Each iPlex subsystem has log files that users can view (see Log File on page 161) and clear (see Clear Log on page 161). You can also upload (see Upload Log on page 161) log files to an FTP server. In addition to system logging, user activity can be logged. See User Activity Logging on page 55 for an overview of user activ-ity logging.

The memory available for storing log files is as follows:

• Each SCM has 979 KBytes available for storing log files. This memory is rotated internally sothat it never runs out of space (i.e., only the most latest logs are stored and the oldest logs aredeleted).

NOTEAs you configure your system, TANDBERG Television recommends that you periodically back up your running configuration file.

63



Software Files You upgrade the iPlex software by connecting each SCM in the system to a boot software source (see SCM Software Configuration on page 139) and then rebooting the unit (see Reboot on page 139). See Upgrading the Software on page 59 for the strategies on how to reboot the units to minimize or eliminate service disruptions for partially or fully redundant systems.

You can download the software files from the Internet (FTP site) and store them in Flash memory (see Software on page 158) or upload software files from Flash memory to the Internet.

• If the software file is too big to fit in the Flash 1 or Flash 2 partition, you must store it in theFlash 1+2 partition.

• You can copy a software file from the Flash 1 partition to the Flash 2 partition (or in oppositedirection).

The memory available for storing software files is as follows:

• Flash 1 partition: 13 MBytes

• Flash 2 partition: same as Flash 1 partition

• Flash 1+2 partition: 26 MBytes


NOTETANDBERG Television recommends you keep a copy of the current software somewhere before doing a software upgrade in case you need to return to the current release for any reason.

64


The Statistics MenuStatistics allows you to view information gathered from the iPlex. Click Statistics to display the following links: Config File, Data File, IP Routing, SCM and MCM subsystems. The first page gives general information on the iPlex chassis and its major components. Click the links on the tree control to displays the applicable page.

iPlex StatisticsThe iPlex Statistics screen contains Chassis Information, Blade Status, and Blade Statistics, including CPU utilization and available memory.

Chassis InformationUp Time: Shows the running time of the chassis, since the last reboot.

Blade StatusSlot: Provides the location of the blade. There are twenty slots.

Type: Provides the type of blade MCM or SCM. At this level, you can click the name and it will take you directly to the applicable statistics page. These pages are also available under the MCM and SCM links from the Statistics tree control.

State: Shows whether the subsystem is operational. The meaning of the colors are as follows:

■ Green indicates that the subsystem is ONLINE■ Blue indicates that the subsystem is OFFLINE (backup)

NOTEThe menus in this section can be accessed by users in the root, administrator, and operator groups.

SCM (Switch Controller Module):The iPlex system controller that isresponsible for booting the whole

system and directing the flow ofdata between blades.

MCM (Media Controller Module):The iPlex subsystem that is

responsible for all the video/datainput, processing, and outputunder the control of the SCM.

Carrier Card: A PCI-basedmezzanine card. Small and

compact, carrier cards enable alarge variety of PCI products to

be retrofitted to other busenvironments.

65


■ Red means that the subsystem is unreachable■ White means that the subsystem is uninitialized■ Orange means that the subsystem is being configured

Position: Shows if the blade is the primary or backup.

Software: Provides the version of software running.

Blade StatisticsSlot: Provides the location of the subsystem.

Type: Provides the type of subsystem: MCM or SCM.

CPUCPU Utilization: Shows the percentage of CPU used.

Total Memory (kB): Shows the total memory available to that blade in kilo bytes for CPU.

Free Memory (kB): Shows the free memory available to that blade in kilo bytes for CPU.

Allocated Memory (kB): Shows the allocated memory available to that blade in kilo bytes for CPU.

66


Sensors StatisticsThe Sensors Statistics screen contains Chassis operating information.

Chassis InformationSerial Number of the iPlex chassis is given here. This number is associated with the chassis itself and not with any particular blade.

Revision ID indicates which release number of the iPlex board and CPLD you are using.

Temperature Sensors tell you the temperature in components of the iPlex.

Voltage Sensors show MCM voltages.

Fan Sensors indicate the temperature and speed of the fans.

DOM indicates whether the disk on module is present and is booted.

NOTEDOMs are not present on older units.

67


Redundancy StatisticsThe Redundancy Statistics page contains iPlex unit and synchronization infor-mation.

Redundancy The page presents the following data

Backup Redundancy IP Address: Shows the backup redundancy IP address.

Enable Redundancy: Shows the current state (Yes for enabled, No for disabled).

Redundancy Mode: Specifies the external switch (Automatic or Manual). iPlex supports both automatic and manual modes found on most switching devices. If you do not have an external switch connected, the mode field is not applicable. For more information, see Chapter 6 Redundancy starting on page 429 or the Configur-ing Redundancy on page 101 in this chapter.

Primary: Gives the name and location of the subsystem that is currently the pri-mary.

Backup: Gives the name and location of the subsystem that is currently the backup.

State: Gives the synchronization status of the blade as IN SYNC or SYNCING.

68


Alarm Statistics Click the Alarms button to view the current state of the configurable alarms (Yes for enabled, No for disabled).

Redundancy Alarms Statistics displays the status of the following Config-urable Alarms: Loss of ASI Input, Loss of ATM Link, Loss of Encoder Sync, GE Link Down, and All GE Links Down.

Configurable SCM Alarm section shows:

Configurable Alarm Type: This colum includes Loss of GE1 Sync, Loss of GE2 Sync, and Loss of all GE Sync types.

Enable Status: This column shows the status Yes for enabled, No for disabled alarms.

Click Redundancy to return to the Redundancy Statistics page.

Media Routes StatisticsThe Media Routes Statistics page provides information on all the source and destination ports. Select individual ports or all ports, and then click the Show Routes button to display a table as in the example below.

69


Program Routes and Stream RoutesSource Port: Port where the content being routed originates.

Source Program: MPEG Program number of the source content in the original stream, if applicable (program route only).

Dest Port: Port where the content being routed is transmitted.

Dest Program: MPEG Program number of this content in the destination stream (program route only).

State: Shows whether program descriptors are active, inactive or deleted.■ Active: Route added—applied to running-config■ Inactive: Route added—not applied to running-config■ Deleted: Route deleted—still part of the running-config

The following parameters are applicable to the stream route only.

Source PID: MPEG PID of the source content in the original stream, if applica-ble.

Dest PID: MPEG PID for content in the destination stream, if applicable.

Interfaces StatisticsThe Interfaces Statistics page gives a list of active interfaces for the full chassis.

Summary Interfaces ListInterface Type: Gives the type of interface and a link to specific information.

SME: TANDBERG TelevisionMPE Encapsulation

SMD: TANDBERG TelevisionMPE Decapsulation.

70


Number of Interfaces: Gives the total number of a particular interface.

Clicking on the links for ATM, IP Encapsulation (SME), or IP Decapsulation (SMD) Ports will take you to that specific interface list page that provides the full chassis list for that interface and some basic information. The example shown above is the ATMInterface List. To view the other Interface list pages see MCM Statistics—Interfaces Statistics on page 95 section.

ATM, SMD, and SME Ports Interface ListName: Shows the name of the IP interface and port location.

Status: Shows if the port is up (green) or down.

IP Address: Shows the IP address of the port.

Netmask: Shows the subnet mask of the port.

MAC Address: Shows the MAC Address of the port.

MTU: Shows the maximum transmission unit (MTU) for this port.

Speed (Mbits/s): Shows the speed of the stream in megabits per second.

NOTEInterface statistics are also given at the individual MCM blade level. See MCM Statistics—Network Statistics on page 96 for more spe-cific details.

NOTESME provides a link to the SME (IP encapsulation) Statistics page and SMD (IP decapsulation) provides a link to the SMD Statistics page.

MTU (Maximum TransmissionUnit) The largest frame size that

can be transmitted over thenetwork. Messages longer than

the MTU must be divided intosmaller frames. The layer 3

protocol (IP, IPX, etc.) extractsthe MTU from the layer 2 protocol(Ethernet, FDDI, etc.), fragments

the messages into that frame sizeand makes them available to the

lower layer for transmission.

NOTE SME, SMD, and ATMInterfaces show the same parameters, as you can see here.

71


Click the name link to view that specific network interface, which provides addi-tional receiving and transmitting information.

General ATM, SMD, and SME Receiving and TransmittingStatisticsIn/Out Octets: Shows the number of bytes received/transmitted.

In/Out Unicast Packets: Shows the number of unicast packets received/trans-mitted.

In/Out Non Unicast: Shows the number of broadcast packets received/trans-mitted.

In/Out Discards: Shows the number of packets discarded received/transmitted.

In/Out Errors: Shows the number of errors received/transmitted.

In Unknown Protocols: Shows the number of discarded packets received using an unknown protocol.

Port StatisticsThe Port Statistics page gives a Summary Port List of available ports for the full chassis.

72


Physical andLogical Ports

There are two kinds of ports in the iPlex: physical ports and logical ports. Physical ports are actual submodules mounted in the MCM blades, such as ASI Inputs and Outputs, ATMIn/Out, and encoders. Logical ports are user created network inter-faces.

Summary Port ListPort Type: Gives you the name of the port type. At this level, you can click the link and it will take you directly to the specific port statistics.

The All In or All Out link displays all the input or output ports on the chassis.

The All Physical link gives the submodules installed, such as encoders, ASIIn, and ASIOut.

The All Network link shows logical ports such as UDPIn/Out, TCPIn, and FileIn.

The All Control link shows all control ports such as MediaProc ports.

The All link shows every port on the chassis.

Number of Ports: Provides the number of ports for each type.

ASIIn Port List The ASIIn Port List page shows all ASIIn ports available in the chassis and pro-vides a link to individual port statistics. It also provides a description for each port and shows the port state as one of the following: processing, idle, failure or no sync (only ASI).

These statistics are available for ASIIn/Out, encoders (ENC), UDPIn/Out, RTPIn/Out, TCPIn, FileIn, and ATMIn/Out.

All Ports List Click the ALL link to view the entire list of ports on the chassis.

NOTEPort statistics are also available at the individual MCM blade level.

73


All In Port List Click the ALL In link to view the entire list of input ports on the chassis.

All Out Port List Click the ALL Out link to view the entire list of output ports on the chassis.

For detailed information on the statistics for all ports, see Chapter 4, Port Configu-ration and Statistics starting on page 167.

All Control PortList

Click All Control link to view the list of the control ports on the chassis.

All Network Ports Click All Network link to view the list of the network ports on the chassis.

Alarms Statistics The Alarms Statistics screen shows whether the alarms (both major and minor) are enabled on the unit.

74


Config File Statistics

Running Config The Running Configuration screen shows the values for the current configura-tion. This file may take about a minute to generate. The file itself may be too long to show in an image, like the one below.

Show Config By clicking Show Config, you can select a specific configuration file to display from the drop-down menu.

Compare Config Click Compare Config. From a drop-down menu, select different configuration files to compare. From another drop-down menu, select either Compact or Long

75


and click the Show Difference button. Compact will only display the lines that are different. See the Color Legend on page 76 for differences.

Color Legend • Lines shown on a white background are the same in both files.

• Lines shown on a green background are only different in some parts of the line.

• Lines shown on a blue background are only present in the first file.

• Lines shown on an orange background are only present in the second file.

Data File StatisticsThe Data File menu item displays Show Data File.

Show Data File The Show Data File page gives a list of current data files, including their location and size.

76


.

IP Routing StatisticsThe IP Routing menu item displays the following links: Network Routes, RIP, VLAN, and Multicast.

Network RoutesStatistics

The Network Routing Statistics page gives the statistics of automatically and manually created routes for ATM, MPE, and IP Routes. You cannot edit or delete automatic routes that the iPlex creates based on your specific hardware configura-tion. You can, however, add and delete routes created manually.

NOTEThis is the list of all stored data files available for injection by the FILEIN port.

77


Network Routes

Manual/Automatic IP RouteNetwork: Base IP address for the route.

Netmask: Subnet mask for the route. Together with the IP address, it defines a block of addresses being routed.

Gateway: IP address for the next hop gateway for this route.

Manual/Automatic MPE RouteNetwork: Base IP address for the route.



PID: MPEG PID to be used on this IP injection route.

IP Mapping MAC Address: Uses the IP address to form the MAC address and set the first and second MAC bytes.

MAC Address: MAC address of the next hop to be used in this IP injection route.

Discipline: Shows the MPE discipline type (for Manual route only).

For more details on the discipline type, see Configuring SME on page 153.

Manual/Automatic ATM RouteNetwork: Base IP address for the route.



VPI: Gives Virtual Path Identifier for the PVC to be used in this route.

VCI: Gives Virtual Circuit Identifier for the PVC to be used in this route.

RIP Statistics The RIP Statistics page gives information on interfaces using the RIP routing protocol.

MPE Multi-protocolEncapsulation

PVC (Permanent Virtual Circuit) Apoint-to-point ATM connection

that is established manually (i.e.,not through signaling).

VCI (Virtual Channel Identifier) Aunique numerical tag as defined

by a 16 bit field in the ATM cellheader that identifies a virtual

channel, over which the cell is totravel.

VPI (Virtual Path Identifier) Aneight bit field in the ATM cell

header which indicates the virtualpath over which the cell should be

routed.

NOTEWhen using ATM DS3 or ATM E3 Network Interface cards, you should note the VPI/VCI ranges are limited to 0-7/0-511.

78


RIP Enable RIP: Shows if RIP is enabled or disabled (Yes or No).

RIP Version: Gives the version of RIP.

RIP SetupInterface Name: Gives the name of interface using RIP.

Enable RIP: Shows if the interface is RIP-enabled.

Passive Mode: Shows if the interface is just listening.

For more details, see Configuring RIP on page 132.

VLAN Statistics The VLAN Statistics page contains VLAN Setup information.

VLAN SetupVLAN ID: Gives the identifier number of the VLAN.

IP Address: Shows the IP address of the VLAN.

Subnet Mask: Shows the subnet mask of the VLAN.

GE1, GE2: Indicates whether or not this Gigabit Ethernet port belongs to the VLAN tagged or untagged mode.

RIP (Routing InformationProtocol) A simple routing

protocol that is part of the TCP/IPprotocol suite. It determines a

route based on the smallest hopcount between source and

destination.

VLAN (Virtual LAN) A logicalsubgroup within a local area

network that is created viasoftware rather than manually

moving cables in the wiringcloset. It combines user stations

and network devices into a singleunit regardless of the physical

LAN segment they are attachedto and allows traffic to flow more

efficiently within populations ofmutual interest.

VLAN Tagged Packets VLANtags used to define multiple LANsin the same physical segment. A

tagged packet has an extraheader added between the layer

2 and the layer 3 headers (thetag) that indicates to which VLANit belongs. Typically only switchesand routers handle tags, not end-

hosts.

NOTEIt is possible to have multiple tagged VLANs on the same port (GE1, GE2); however, only one untagged.

79


MulticastStatistics

The Multicast Statistics page shows multicast routing information for each VLAN; that is, which ports transmit to which groups.

Automatic Multicast SetupVLAN Name: Gives the name of the VLAN.

GE: Indicates whether a Gigabit Ethernet port is to be used (Yes or No).

IP Address: Shows the multicast IP address.

Multicast SetupVLAN Name: Gives the name of the VLAN.

GE: Indicates whether a Gigabit Ethernet port is to be used (Yes or No).

IP Address: Shows the multicast IP address.

NOTEThe automatic multicast setup is generated through the creation of a UDPOut port using a multicast address with a Gigabit Ethernet inter-face.

80


Spanning TreeStatistics

Select Spanning Tree from the Statistics > IP Routing menu.

DaemonStarted: A checkbox that shows if the protocol is turned On or Off.

VLAN ID: Shows which VLAN upon which the protocol will be run.

Bridge Priority: This is the two-byte MSB of the bridge identifier, and shows which device in the network is the root bridge. The lower the value, the higher the priority of the device.

NOTEOnly VLANs with both Gigabit Ethernet ports present will be listed because you need more than one for the protocol to be useful.

81


SCM StatisticsThe SCM menu item displays the following links: General, Software, SNMP, GE, CPU, NTP Status, License, Logging Security, and nCompass.

SCM GeneralStatistics

The SCM General Statistics page contains SCM and other control information.

SCM GeneralHost Name: Shows name of unit.

DNS Domain Name: Shows name of local domain.

Auto Negotiation: Enable or disable auto negotiation for the indicated port. The default value is Enable.

Speed and Duplex: If the Auto Negotiation parameter is disabled, this parame-ter is enabled and shows up - configured speed and duplex mode.

DNS (Domain Name System)Name resolution software that

lets users locate computers onthe Internet (TCP/IP network) bydomain name. The DNS server

maintains a database of domainnames (host names) and their

corresponding IP address.

NTP (Network Time Protocol) Aprotocol used to synchronize the

real-time clock in a computer.There are numerous primary andsecondary servers in the Internet

that are synchronized to theCoordinated Universal Time(UTC) via radio, satellite or

modem. For more information,visit http://www.ntp.org.

82

http://www.ntp.org


Ethernet Negotiation StatusLink: Management port link status: Up or Down.

Flow Control: Disabled or enabled - Yes or No.

Current Speed and Duplex: Specifies connected ethernet speed and duplex mode.

Auto Negotiation Status: Specifies auto negotiation status.

IP Address: Shows the IP address of the Management port.

Netmask: Shows the netmask address of the Management port.

Default Router: Default router; range: 1.0.0.1 - 223.255.254.254.

Virtual IP Address: Gives the IP address for the iPlex Chassis.

Backplane Subnet: Gives the IP address of the backplane subnet.

Time Zone: Gives the time zone setting of the chassis.

Redundancy IPRedundancy IP address: Shows the redundancy IP address of the redundant unit.

Redundancy netmask: Shows the redundancy netmask of the redundancy unit.

DNS ServerGives the IP address of the DNS Server.

Syslog HostGives the IP address of the Syslog host. All system messages are forwarded to the remote syslog host.

NTP ServerGives the IP address of the NTP Server that synchronizes the iPlex clock.

NOTEConfigured speed and duplex mode may not match with the actualspeed and duplex mode.

83


SoftwareStatistics

The SCM Software Statistics page contains software load information.

SCM SoftwareBoot: Shows how the software was loaded: TFTP, Flash (image embedded on the SCM), and DHCP.

Build Running: Shows the build version that is running.

TFTPTFTP Host: Gives the IP address where software comes from.

TFTP File Name: Provides the software load file name.

FlashFlash Image: Shows available images (Flash 1, or Flash 2).

DHCPDHCP: Shows that the software was booted from the DHCP server.

Software InformationSoftware Information shows image location, description and size as well as parti-tion size.

SNMP Statistics SNMP (Simple Network Management Protocol) page is as follows.

TFTP (Trivial File TransferProtocol) A version of the FTP

protocol that has no directory orpassword capability.

Flash Card A small module thatcontains flash memory such as a

PC Card, Compact Flash, orsimilar format.

DHCP (Dynamic HostConfiguration Protocol) Software

that automatically assigns IPaddresses to client stations

logging onto a TCP/IP network. Iteliminates having to manually

assign IP addresses to individualcomputers.

84


SNMP is a widely used network monitoring and control protocol. The SNMP Statistics page contains Read and Write community tags and contact information required for remote monitoring.

In addition, you can view or download the MIBs file from this page. To do that, click MIBs under the Go button.

85


SNMPSNMP Read Community: Shows the read community name.

SNMP Read Write Community: Shows the read and write community name.

SNMP Location: Shows the device location reported to SNMP managers.

SNMP Contact: Shows the contact name reported to SNMP managers.

SNMP Trap Community: Shows the name of the trap community.

Trap DestinationShows the IP address of the trap destination.

SNMP Trap SeverityShows trap ID and trap severity.

SNMP V3 UserUser Name: Shows the user name.

Password: Shows the password for this user.

Auth Protocol: Shows the authentication protocol as MD5 or SHA.

Security Level: Shows the security level as noauth, or auth.

GE Statistics The SCM Gigabit Ethernet Ports Statistics page contains receive and transmit unicast, multicast, and broadcast packet count statistics, as well as link and Sync status.

The SCM Gigabit Ethernet Ports Statistics page contains receive and transmit unicast, multicast, and broadcast packet count statistics as well as Link and Sync status for GE ports.

86


StatusLink: Shows if the port is detecting input signals.

Status: Shows whether or not the port is synchronized with the remote device.

Type: Shows the GE port type: Optical LX, Optical SX, or copper.

Connector: Shows the GE connector type: LC or SC.

Wave Length (nm): In nanometers, shows wave length for optical GE ports.

Vendor: Shows the manufacturer of the part.

Part Number: Shows the part number of the part, as assigned by the vendor.

Revision: Shows the revision number of the part, as assigned by the vendor.

StatisticsBytes Tx/Rx: Gives number of bytes being sent or received.

Bad Bytes Tx/Rx: Gives number of bytes discarded when sent or received.

Unicast Packets Tx/Rx: Gives number of unicast packets sent or received.

Multicast Packets Tx/Rx: Gives number of multicast packets sent or received.

Broadcast Packets Tx/Rx: Gives number of broadcast packets sent or received.

Collision Tx: Shows number of collisions during transmit.

SFP types:

Multi-mode fiber: type SX, uses850 nm light, used for short-haul

applications.

Single-mode fiber: type LX,uses 1310 nm light, used for long-

haul applications.

Copper: uses a standardEthernet RJ-45 connector.

87


CRC & Align Error: Shows number of frames received with invalid checksum or alignment.

GE Auto NegotiationPort: Shows port number.

Auto Negotiation: Indicates if auto negotiation takes place - Yes or No.

SFP Compatibility The Gigabit Ethernet ports in the iPlex platform use off-the-shelf Small Form-factor Pluggable (SFP) transceivers. Your iPlex unit comes with pre-installed SFPs specified by you at the time of ordering. TANDBERG Television has tested and certified a number of commercial SFPs for operation in the iPlex platform; these are:

• 850 nm LC multimode SFPs:

■ Fiberxon FTM-8012C-L■ Picolight PL-XPL-VC-S13-11

• GE Copper SFP:

■ Finisar FCMJ-8521-3■ Fiberxon FTM-C012R-LM

• 1310 nm single-mode SFP:

■ Picolight PL-XPL-LC-L13-11

Although these SFPs are fully tested in our applications, TANDBERG Television is not liable for these components or any other SFPs..

CPU Statistics The SCM CPU Statistics page contains CPU processes, utilization, and memory information.

NOTE TANDBERG Television will not support any SFPs other than the ones listed above.

88


ProcessesThe Processes section shows the total number of tasks currently running.

CPU Utilization

The CPU Utilization section has the following process functions:

• User: The amount of time spent running user jobs.

• Idle: The amount of time the CPU spends doing nothing.

System: The amount of time spent running in kernel space.

• Nice: The amount of time spent running lower priority jobs.

MemoryThe Memory section gives the total memory available in kilobytes, and provides a graphic representation of what percentage of memory is used and how much is still available.

NTP StatusStatistics

The NTP Status Statistics page contains network timing information.

remote: Shows the IP address of the remote NTP peer.

refid: Shows the reference ID, gives 0.0.0.0 if its unknown.

st: Shows the stratum of the remote peer.

t: Shows the type of the peer [local (l), unicast (u), multicast (m) or broadcast (b)] when the last packet was received.

when: Shows the time when to retransmit the peer query message: counter starts at zero and counts up to poll frequency and then retransmits peer query message.

Nice A UNIX multitaskingcommand that gives each job abasic priority number, called the“niceness.” The higher the nice

value, the lower the command’sscheduling priority. NOTE

The time spent servicing interrupts is not counted by the kernel.

NTP (Network Time Protocol) Aprotocol used to synchronize the

real time clock in a computer.There are numerous primary andsecondary servers in the Internet

that are synchronized to theCoordinated Universal Time(UTC) via radio, satellite or

modem. For more information,visit http://www.ntp.org.

NOTEAll the latest NTP clock reference information can be found online http://www.ntp.org.

89

http://www.ntp.org

http://www.ntp.org


poll: Shows the polling interval in seconds.

reach: Shows the reach ability register: 1 indicates peer is reachable, 0 indicates peer is not reachable.

delay: Shows the current estimated delay in milliseconds.

offset: Shows the current estimated offset in milliseconds.

jitter: Shows the current estimated jitter in milliseconds.

License Statistics The License Statistics page contains license key information.

.

License Key Setup License Key ID: Shows the license key identification.

License Key Description: Shows the license key description.

License Key: Shows the license key (used to enable optional features).

Licensed OptionalFeatures

License Key ID: Shows the license key identification.

Feature Name: Shows the optional feature name.

Feature Enable Status: Shows enable/disable status of the optional feature.

Feature Maximum Instances: Shows maximum instances of the optional fea-ture.

License KeyStatistics

Feature Name: Shows the name of the optional feature.

Feature Enable Status: Shows enable/disable status of the optional feature.

NOTEUse the Composite-1 Video Input Blocking license if you require Composite-2 to be your default input.

90


Feature Maximum Instances: Shows maximum instances of the optional fea-ture.

Number of used instances: Shows number of used instances for the optional feature.

LoggingStatistics

This screen shows whether the fields in the following sections are active (Yes) or inactive (No):

Enable User Logging

User Logging Interface: Enable Web, Enable CLI Enable SNMP, and enable LCD.

User Logging Operation: Enable Add, Enable Modify, Enable Remove, and Enable Info.

Syslog Control: Log Warning, Log Info, and Syslog Facility.

Notification Log There is no user interface to view current entries in the notification log MIB since the notification log is only maintained for use by the management station. The notification log MIB holds a maximum of 250 and a minimum of 10 entries. You have to control this parameter using SNMP. Refer to the Network Management & Monitoring Reference Guide for more information.

91


SecurityStatistics

This screen presents the status of the security features showing the Network and Netmask IPs as well as whether the network control interfaces and in-band GE Ports Control are enabled (Yes) or disabled (No).

Network Access List Network: The IP address of the networks that are allowed access.

Netmask: The network masks used to determine the networks that are allowed access.

Network ControlInterfaces

Enable Telnet: Telnet access is allowed if enabled.

Enable SSH: SSH access is allowed if enabled.

Enable HTTP: HTTP access is allowed if enabled.

Enable HTTPS: HTTPS access is allowed if enabled.

Enable SNMP: SNMP access is allowed if enabled.

Enable GE Ports Control: Control from the GE ports is allowed if enabled.

nCompassStatistics

In addition to the nCC command in the top-right command bar, nCompass status display (see page 148), shows if Enable Redundancy is enabled or not with Yes or No, respectively.

MCM StatisticsThe MCM menu items includes MCMs configured in the system. Each MCMx has these submenu items: Blade, Ports and Network Interfaces. Depending on the submodule(s) installed on the blade, there could be additional statistics for: ASIIn, ASIOut, Encoder, Transcoder, and Network. For ASIIn/Out, Encoder and Transcoder Port Statistics, see Chapter 4, Port Configuration and Statistics.

92


Navigating the MenuBlades will be listed as MCM1,MCM1 Backup, and so on.Click on the MCM blade of which you want to view statistics.

To navigate through the screens for the submodules for the MCM, click the item in the menu on the left side.

Submodules may include ASIOut, ASIIn, ENC, ADVEnc, AVCEnc, XcdrIn, XcdrOut, AVCXcdrIn, AVCXcdrOut, DSP 4PAC, and Network, depending on what is installed on each blade. Examples of submodule screens will be provided on the pages that follow.

MCM BladeStatistics

After you select an MCM to work with, click Blade to view the designated MCM Statistics page for the MCM in that slot (for example, MCM1 > Blade).

To view statistics for a particular port on that blade, click the link for that port (for example, ASIOut1/0). For the example cited, the ASIOut Statistics screen will display.

Module: Gives the module number for that submodule.

Type: Gives the type of submodule (for example, ASIOut, ASIIn, Encoder, Net-work).

Channels: Shows how many channels a submodule has. In the case of an ASI Input, which has two connectors for each port, only one channel (A or B) can be in operation.

Port: Gives the name of port and its location; for example, ENC 1/0 would be the encoder submodule on slot 1 at port 0 (the top port). ASIIn 1/4 is the ASIIn sub-module on blade 1 port 4.

Status: Indicates whether the port is processing data.

• 0 and 1 are for submodule 1


NOTEEach carrier card has the possibility of 16 ports. There are one or two ports per submodule (for example, ASI cards have two and encoder cards have one).

93








Thus, if you are looking directly at the rear view of an iPlex, the port assignment starting from lowest port number to highest goes as illustrated below:

While the cards locations (slots) for both rows are numbered from left to right 1, 2, 3, and 4, the port numbers in the top row run from 7 and 6 on the left down to 1 and 0 on the right. Then in the bottom row, they go from 15 and 14 on the left down to 9 and 8 on the right.

Blade PortsStatistics

Clicking Ports will give you the Summary Port List page for that blade.

.

NOTEClicking the name of the port will take you directly to the port’s sta-tistics page.

17,6

25,4

33,2

41,0

115,14

213,12

311,10

49,8

NOTE Although an encoder card in the top left of the iPlex would occupy one slot, the same as an ASIIn card, the encoder has only one port, ENC1/6. The ASIIn card would have two ports, ASIIn1/6 and ASIIn1/7.

94


Summary Ports List—Blade SlotPort Type: Gives you the name of the port type. At this level, you click the link, and it will take you directly to the specific port statistics.

The All In or All Out link displays all input or output ports on the MCM.

The All Physical link gives the submodules installed, such as encoders, ASIIn, and ASIOut.

The All Network link shows logical ports such as UDPIn/Out, RTPIn/Out, and TCPIn.

The All link shows every port on the MCM.

Number of Ports: Provides the number of ports of each type on that blade.

InterfacesStatistics

Clicking Interfaces gives you the Summary Interfaces List for that blade.

SummaryInterfaces List—

Card Slot

Interface Type: Gives the type of interface and a link to specific information. Click the link and it will take you directly to the specific interface statistics, such as IP Encapsulation, which includes SME.

Number of Interfaces: Gives the total number of a particular interface on that carrier card.

ATM Click ATM to view the ATMInterface List for that carrier card along with a link to ATM configuration screen.

SME Click SME to view the SME (Encapsulation) Interface List for that carrier card along with a link to the SME configuration screen.

SMD (TANDBERG TelevisionMPE Decapsulation) MPEGTransport Stream received

through ASIIn.

SME (TANDBERG TelevisionMPE Encapsulation) Transport

Stream sent out as IP over DVBthrough ASIOut.

95


SMD Click SMD to view the SMD (Decapsulation) Interface List for that carrier card along with a link to the SMD configuration screen.

ATM, SMD and SME Interface List—Slot FieldsName: Shows the name of the IP interface and port location.

Status: Shows if the port is up (green) or down (red).

IP Address: Shows the IP address of the port.

Netmask: Shows the subnet mask of the port.

MAC Address: Shows the MAC Address of the port.

MTU: Shows the maximum transmission unit (MTU) for this port.

Speed (Mbits/s): Shows the speed of the interface in megabits per second.

NetworkStatistics

The Network menu item displays the following links: ATM, SME, and SMD interfaces, if available.

ATM Statistics The ATMInterface List screen provides information on the active ATMInter-face.

MTU (Maximum TransmissionUnit) The largest frame size that

can be transmitted over thenetwork. Messages longer than

the MTU must be divided intosmaller frames. The layer 3

protocol (IP, IPX, etc.) extractsthe MTU from the layer 2 protocol(Ethernet, FDDI, etc.), fragments

the messages into that frame sizeand makes them available to the

lower layer for transmission.

96


Click the link for the ATMInterface that you want to work with, under the Name column. The ATM Statistics screen will open for that interface (for example, ATM 1/0 Statistics).

GeneralName: The name of the ATMInterface, indicating the blade and slot. For instance, ATM1/0.

Status: Shows if the port is up (Green) or down.

IP Address: Shows the IP address of this port.

Netmask: Shows the subnet mask of this port.

MAC Address: Shows the MAC address of this port.

MTU: Shows the largest set packet size for this port.

Speed: The speed in Mbits per second (e.g. 155 Mbits/s).

Receiving/TransmittingIn/Out Octets: Shows the number of octets received/transmitted.

In/Out Unicast Packets: Shows the number of unicast packets received.

In/Out Non Unicast Packets: Shows the number of broadcast packets received/transmitted.

In/Out Discards: Shows the number of packets discarded received/transmitted.

In/Out Errors: Shows the number of errors received/transmitted.

In Unknown Protocols: Shows the number of discarded packets received using an unknown protocol (receiving only).

SME and SMDStatistics

The SME sends out a Transport Stream that is IP over DVB through ASIOut.

SDH (Synchronous DigitalHierarchy) The European

counterpart to SONET.

SONET (Synchronous OpticalNETwork) A fiber-optic

transmission system for high-speed digital traffic. Employed by

telephone companies andcommon carriers, SONET speeds

range from 51 megabits tomultiple gigabits per second.

97


The SMD MPEG interface receives a Transport Stream through ASIIn.

To access SME stats, click the MCM, then Interfaces, then click the SME or SMD link (shown below).

The SME or SMD Statistics screen is displayed.

Click the SME or SMD interface to view the statistics screen for that interface.

The description of the information in each column of SME Statistics or SMD Statistics is the same as for ATM Statistics in the previous sections (see the sec-tions under ATM Statistics on page 96).

AF (Assured Forwarding) is aclass of service for applications

that require a better reliabilitythan Best Effort service.

BE (Best Effort) is a class ofservice with no reserved

resources.

EF (Expedited Forwarding) is aclass of service used by ToS forapplications that require a hard

guarantee on delay and jitter.

98


DSP 4PAC (Media Processor) Submodule StatisticsClick on Ports under the MCM blade on the left side Main menu to invoke the Summary Port List. Then click MediaProc to navigate down to the Port Statis-tics screen.

For the MediaProc port configuration, see Configuring a DSP 4PAC (Media Proces-sor) Submodule on page 155.

99


The Configuration MenuConfiguration allows you to configure the iPlex. By clicking Configuration, the next level of the tree control displays, which enables you to create a new logical port, create a redundant pairing, create media and network routing, and configure existing physical ports. As well, it enables you to configure Configuration Files, Data Files, IP Routing, SCM and MCM blades.

.

NOTEExcept for the SCM User Logging menu (see Configuring SCM Log-ging on page 144), the menus in this section can be accessed by users in the root and administrator groups.

NOTEBefore making any changes to your system, TANDBERG Television recommends that you save the current state of your system by copy-ing the currently running configuration file to a backup file (you choose the name of the file) in order to be able to go back to the cur-rent configuration should you ever need to do so. See Copy Running on page 123 for the procedure on how to do this.After you change your system and are confident everything is work-ing correctly, TANDBERG Television recommends that you copy the configuration file at that point to the startup fileI in order to have a known starting point should the system ever have to reboot. See Copy Startup on page 122 for the procedure on how to do this.

100


Creating a Network PortThe first item on the tree allows you to create a new logical network port. Select the Port Type from the Port Parameters drop-down list box: UDPOut, UDPIn, TCPIn, RTPIn, RTPOut, FileIn, ATMOut, ATMIn, or Backhaul.

Having selected the port type, you can configure it. The exact configuration parameters are a function of the port type and are discussed in Chapter 4, Port Configuration and Statistics starting on page 167.

To view an existing port, see Ports on page 120.

Configuring RedundancyThe Redundancy Configuration page allows you to create a redundant relation-ship with another iPlex unit. After completing the configuration, click Apply.

NOTETo program a transrater or transcoder port on the DSP 4PAC (Media Processor) submodule, see Configuring a DSP 4PAC (Media Proces-sor) Submodule on page 155.

101


Backup Redundancy IP Address: The redundancy IP address of the backup unit.

Chassis Redundancy: Select this check box to enable chassis redundancy.

Redundancy Mode: If you have an external Redundancy Switch, you can select Automatic or Manual to match your switch’s method of operation.

You can flip the redundancy between the primary and backup by clicking the Flip button (SCM). For more details see Chapter 6, Redundancy starting on page 429.

ConfiguringAlarms

From the menu, select Configure > Redundancy. In the Redundancy Configura-tion screen, click Alarms to configure the alarm triggers. Select the applicable Enable Status check boxes, then click Apply to enable those alarms.

Redundancy Alarms Configuration page allows you to enable the status of the following Configurable Alarms: Loss of ASI Input, Loss of ATM Link, Loss of Encoder Sync, GE Link Down, and All GE Links Down. Configurable SCM Alarms include the Loss of GE1 Sync, Loss of GE2 Sync, and Loss of all GE Sync. Click the box in the Enable Status column to enable or disable alarms.

If you have a redundant SCM that has GE ports 1 and 2, and you select Enable Status for the Loss of GE Sync alarms, the SCM monitors the state of each GE

102


port. If a loss of sync occurs, an SCM flip will occur. For example, if you enable the Loss of GE1 Sync alarm and then pull the cable from the GE 1 port, an SCM flip will occur. If the Loss of GE2 Sync alarm is not enabled and you pull the cable from the GE2 port, there will not be an SCM flip.

SynchronizingFiles

Selecting the Sync Files button in the Redundancy Configuration page (see above) results in the synchronization of file systems between the primary SCM and the backup SCM. Then the files contained in the flash directory, the pcmcia/data directory, and the config directory transfer from the primary SCM to the hot-standby SCM. The exception to this is the Startup Config file in the config directory. The Startup Config File transfers automatically to the backup SCM at initialization.

Configuring Media RoutingMedia routing tools enable you to designate Program Routes, Add Programs, Stream Routes, and Remove Selected items. If you are using the previous Media Routing interface, see Former Media Routing Configuration on page 459.

Basics of MediaRouting

The iPlex provides two types of media routing: program routing and stream rout-ing.

A Transport Stream, containing unique packet identifiers (PIDs), received by the iPlex, may contain a few elementary streams multiplexed together. The iPlex soft-ware analyzes the content and allows you to reorganize the stream elements into new programs, which it can then route to multiple output ports.

The Transport Stream content elements are as follows.

Transport Stream: One or more programs, each of which contains one or more elementary streams and other streams, such as data, multiplexed together. The Stream information contains all the PID information in the Transport Stream along with DVB table information.

Program: A number given to a service that is used to reference one or more ele-ments. The Program information is as follows: MPEG program number, DVB name, DVB original network ID, and DVB service type. That is, the program iden-tifier number, the name of the program, the original network number assigned to it, and the service type; for example, Digital Television Service and Data Broadcast Service.

Element: An entity, such as video or audio data, which is put together with other elements to make up a program. The Element information contains the PIDs associated with the program and element type. There is a direct correlation between the Program and Element information that comes from Program Specific Information (PSI) described in the MPEG specification.

NOTEThe Sync Files button is only available if you have redundant SCMs.

103


To have a better understanding of these definitions, see Programs, Elements and Streams List Statistics on page 406.

Program Routing vs.Stream Routing

The simpler of the two is stream routing. It is used to route individual PIDs from inputs to outputs, optionally remapping the PID value. This means that the iPlex will take all packets of PID X of the specified input and transmit them of the spec-ified output, changing the PID to Y. No changes are made to any output tables.

Program routing relies on the input PSI tables. Program routing means that the iPlex takes all the elements from Program X in the specified input and routes them to the specified output as Program Y, resolving any conflicts. In this mode, the iPlex parses the PMT for the input, identifies all of the program elements, routes these program elements, and copies any PAT, PMT, and SDT entries (including any descriptors) from the input to the output. The output tables are modified accordingly.

The iPlex will also automatically resolve any PID conflicts. For example, if the routed program has an element on PID 0x200, but PID 0x200 is already in use in the output, the iPlex will automatically remap the incoming PID 0x200 to a free PID and adjust the tables accordingly. As well, if the input program changes (for example, a new PID with an additional audio channel is added), the iPlex will auto-matically adjust by routing any new elements, resolving any PID conflicts, and adjusting the tables.

Setup MediaRouting

The Media Routing page opens with the selection from three groups shown below.

The set of selection items in each group depends on the configuration of your iPlex system. The following illustration is an example of Group 1.

104


The first step is to select 2 or 3 groups of ports to work on. For example, you can select AVCXcdr in group 1 and UDPOut in group 2 to route content between the transcoders and the UDPOutput ports. Another example can be UDPIn in group 1, AVCXcdr in group 2 and UDPOut in group 3 to route some contents between the UDPInput ports and the UDPOutput ports using the transcoders.

Next to the port type, you can specify the number of ports you want to create. For example, if UDPIn is selected in group 1, AVCXcdr in group 2, and UDPOut is selected in group 3, then x number of UDPInput ports and x number of UDPOutput ports will be created, where x is the number of AVC transcoder ports selected in group 2.

When ports are needed to be created, you can also specify basic parameters, such as port number, IP address, or VLAN ID. You can also use an offset for each of those parameters. For example, if you set IP to 224.1.1.1 and offset to 1, and 4 UDPIn ports need to be created, UDPIn1/0 will have 224.1.1.1 as an IP, UDPIn1/1 will have 224.1.1.2 and so on. See selection example in the illustration that follows.

Media RoutingPanels

When you press the NEXT button, you see the page with five panels. The upper three panels represent the port sections. The upper left-most panel shows the ele-ments for an input port; the middle panel shows the elements for a processing (or internal) port, transrating or transcoding. The upper right-most panel shows the elements of an output port. See illustration that follows.

The lower left panel displays the messages with which the system responds to your selections. The lower right has the Status button.

The color codes for the messages are as follows:

105


• blue show all

• teal information

• yellow show warning

• red show error

• black fatal error

• blue erase the log

Port Panels The following elements are displayed for each port:

• Parameters

• Programs (along with their elements)

106


• Streams

Programs, elements, streams and parameters can be expanded or collapsed by clicking on “+”.

The following illustration shows the output port panel with expanded parameters.

107


Port Context Menus Each port panel contains a port context menu which you can activate by right-clicking on a port. On the input port panel, the menu contains Edit and Update commands.

Clicking Edit opens corresponding Port Configuration page for editing.

On the processing, or internal, port panel, the menu contains the Edit In and Edit Out commands that link to the processing port (transrator or transcoder) input or output configuration page.

On the output port panel, the menu contains an Edit command that links to the output port configuration page.

108


Clicking the Update in each menu refreshes the list of programs, elements and streams.

The rest of the fields in the menus of the internal and output port panels are pro-vided for creating a program.

Editing PortConfiguration

You can edit port configuration by using the port context menu. Right-click on the port which you want to edit to call the port context menu. When the menu appears, click on Edit In, Edit Out, or Edit; see an example in the following illus-tration.

Clicking Reload collapses the elements and removes the routes from view.

Program Route The method for routing media is to start by creating a program route using pro-grams already existing in the Transport Stream, or creating new programs for routing. More than one program can share the same element. If there are PID con-flicts, you can configure the iPlex to fix them automatically.

Use program routing to have the iPlex manage output PID allocation. Steps to perform:

1 Select program on input port.

109


2 Select output port.

The input box appearing on the right of the program can be used to map the pro-gram number.

You can select multiple programs, elements or streams at the same time to be routed to a single output port.

Editing or Removinga Program

A program context menu allows you to edit or remove a program in the output port panel. To call this menu, right-click on a program you want to edit.

To edit, click Edit to open Program Configuration page. To remove a program, click Remove.

This menu also allows you to add or create an element for the program you added.

Viewing ProgramDetails

To view program statistics, use a small menu. To call this menu, right-click on a program whose details you need to view, then click Details to open Program Sta-tistics page. In the input port panel, there is only Details command. in the inter-nal and output panels, the menu also contains Remove command.

110


.

This menu also allows you to remove a program. To do this, click Remove.

Stream Route Use stream routing when you want to be in control of the output PID allocation. To set a stream route, perform these steps:

1 Select stream or program element on input port.

2 Select output port, output custom program or output custom element.

In case you select an output custom program, an element will be created automati-cally. The input box appearing on the right of the stream can be used to map the stream number.

111


To remove a stream, right-click on it. When a context menu appears, click Remove.

If you need to view information on the stream, click Details which opens the Stream Information page.

You can select multiple programs, elements or streams at the same time to be routed to a single output port. For illustration, see Media Routing Panels on page 105.

ManagingCustom Program

You can add, remove or edit custom programs for output ports by using the port context menu. To call the menu, right-click on a program in the output port panel.

Adding /RemovingCustom program

You can add a custom program by performing the following steps:

1 Right click on an output or internal port to open the port context menu.

2 Enter program information: program identifier, or number, and PMT PIDnumber.

Program Number: Enter the desired program number. Program numbers needto be unique.

PMT PID (hex): Enter the desired PMT PID in hexadecimal. Multiple programscan share the same PMT, or the selected PID must be available.

PCR PID (hex): Enter the desired PCR PID in hexadecimal (enter “1FFF” if theprogram has no PCR).

3 Enter number of programs (items).

112


4 Click Add.

You can remove the program by clicking on Remove in the context menu, see below.

You can also remove a program by using another context menu that you can call by right-clicking on the program after closing the main context menu above.

In addition, this menu contains a Details command, which opens Program Sta-tistics page for that program.

113


Editing CustomProgram

You can edit a custom program by using the context menu (right click). Clicking on Edit opens a corresponding Program Configuration page where you can edit the program; see the following illustration.

Program ConfigurationPMT PID and PCR PID are automatically included PIDs.

Enable SDT Information: Check the box to enable SDT (Service Data Table) information.

SDT Information

If the SDT Information is enabled the following fields appear for editing.

Original Network ID: Type the Original Network Identifier number.

EIT Schedule: Select the check box if you want to turn on the flag that an EIT schedule is in the Transport Stream.

NOTEiPlex does not generate the EIT. You must provide it through an input port and route it.

114


EIT Present Following: Select the check box if you want to turn on the flag that Present Following information is in the Service Description Table (see EN 300 468).

Free CA Mode: Select the check box if the program is scrambled.

Running Status: Select from the following: Undefined, Not running, Starts in a few seconds, Pausing, and Running.

Service Type: Select from the following: Reserved, Digital television service, Dig-ital radio sound television, Teletext service, NVOD reference service, NVOD time-shifted service, Mosaic service, PAL coded signal, SECAM coded signal, D/D2-MAC, FM radio, NTSC coded signal, Data broadcast service, Reserved, RCS map, RCS FLS, DVB MHP service, and User Defined.

Language Code: International character is supported. Click a radio button to select Language Code: ISO/IEC 8859-1 Latin-1 or ISO/IEC 8859-6 Arabic.

Service Provider Name: Type the name of the service provider.

Service Name: Type the service name.

Enable CA Information: Check the box to enable CA (Conditional Access) information to be configured or edited.

CA Information

If CA Information is enabled, the following fields appear:

System ID: Enter a number for the CA system ID between 0 and 65535.

System PID: Enter the system PID number (hexadecimal), to specify the EMM PID at the program level, between 0x0 - 0x1fff.

Private Data: This is user-specific access criteria in hexadecimal.

ManagingCustom Element

You can add, remove or edit a custom element with following steps:

1 Right click on custom program.2 Enter element information.3 Enter number of elements (items).4 Click Add.

NOTEWhen entering PID numbers, it is not necessary to type the prefix 0x.

115


You can edit or remove the custom element by using the context menu (right click).

When the context menu appears, click Edit to pop up the Element Configuration window. The Element Descriptor provides the following selections: Video, Audio, Data, and None.

Adding a VideoElement

Selecting Video from Element Descriptor will display the following Element Configuration window.

116


Video InformationMultiple Frame Rate: Check the box to use multiple frame rate.

Frame Rate Code: Select Frame Rate Code from the following list: Forbidden, 23.976, 24.000, 25.000, 29.970, 30.000, 50.000, 59.940, and 60.000

Constrained Parameter: Check the box for constrained parameter.

Still Picture: Check the box for still picture.

MPEG-1 Only: Selecting this check box will display the following: ■ Profile and Level: Enter a value (0-255).■ Chrominance Format: Select from the following list: 4:2:0, 4:2:2, and 4:4:4■ Frame Rate Extension: Select check box to use frame rate extension.■ Enable CA Information: Check this box to display the CA information. For

CA information, see page 115.

Adding an AudioElement

Selecting Audio from Element Descriptor will display the following Element Configuration window.

117


Audio InformationLanguage Code: Type language code (0 to 3 characters).

Audio Type: Select Audio Type from the following list: Undefined, Clean effect, Hearing impaired, and Visual impaired commentary.

Enable Audio Descriptor: Selecting check box opens the following parameters: Free Format, ID, Layer (select Reserved, Layer 1, Layer 2, Layer 3 or User Defined), and Variable Rate.

Enable CA Information: Check this box to display the CA (Conditional Access) information. For CA information, see page 115.

Adding a DataElement

Selecting Data from Element Descriptor will display the following Element Configuration window.

Data InformationBroadcast ID: Select Broadcast ID from the following list: User Defined, Data Piping, User Defined (add value), Multiprotocol Encapsulation, Data Carousel, and Object Carousel.

Language Code: Type language code (0 to 3 characters).

Optional Text: Type optional text.

MAC Address Range: Select MAC Address Range from the following list: 6.5.4.3.2.1, 6.5.4.3.2, 6.5.4.3, 6.5.4, 6.5, and 6.

118


MAC IP Mapping: Check the box to use MAC IP Mapping flag.

Alignment Indicator: Select check box for alignment indicator.

Max Section: Enter the maximum number of sections for each datagram.

Enable CA Information: Check this box to display the CA (Conditional Access) information. For CA information, see page 115.

DVB Standard PIDNumbers

The following table lists standard DVB PID numbers. In the example below, PID numbers 0x0-0x14 are reserved for specific uses based on the DVB specification. The rest are configurable and customer-specific.

.

Digital video broadcast tables:

• PAT (Program Association Table): A part of PSI, this table indicates the location of thecorresponding PMT. It also gives the location of the NIT.

• PMT (Program Map Table): A part of PSI, this table identifies and indicates the location ofpart of the stream that makes up each service, and the location of the Program ClockReference (PCR) fields for service.

• SDT (Service Description Table): A DVB SI table that contains the services in the system; forexample, names of services, the service provider, etc.

• NIT (Network Information Table): A DVB SI table that provides physical information aboutthe network.

• TDT (Time and Date Table): A DVB SI table that gives information relating to the presenttime and date. This information is given a separate table due to its frequent updating.

• EIT (Event Information Table): A DVB SI table that contains data concerning events orprograms such as event name, start time, and duration.

PID (hex) Content Description

0x0 PAT Program Association Table

0x1 CAT Conditional Access Table

0x10 NIT Network Information Table

0x11 SDT Service Description Table

0x12 EIT Event Information Table

0x14 TDT Time and Date Table

NOTEOther DVB tables do not have fixed PIDs, including the PMT (Pro-gram Map Table), the EMM (Entitlement Management Message), and the ECM (Entitlement Control Message).

119


PortsThe summary port list shows the port type and number of ports for each type. From this list, you can navigate to the port configuration and statistics screens for each existing port (see Chapter 4, Port Configuration and Statistics starting on page 167)

To create a new port, see Creating a Network Port on page 101. For lists of ports in All In, All Out, All Control, and All Network, see Port Statistics on page 72; same ports are listed for Configuration.

.

AlarmsThe Alarms Configuration screen allows you to enable the alarms per blade: SCM or MCM (both prime and backup) for the unit.

To see if an alarm is active on an enabled unit, see Active Alarms on page 166. To clear the alarm, see Clear Alarms on page 166.

NOTETo program a transrater or transcoder port on the DSP 4PAC, or Media Processor, submodule, see Configuring a DSP 4PAC (Media Processor) Submodule on page 155.

120


Configuration FileiPlex configuration files are user-readable ASCII files. The text of a configuration file is equivalent to the CLI commands that would be entered to create the config-uration. Configuration files can be edited any time using a standard text editor.

The Config File menu item displays the following links: Apply Config, Copy Star-tup, Copy Running, Remove Config, Upload Config, Download Config, Edit Con-fig, and Push Config.

Apply Config The Apply Configuration File page allows you to select a configuration file and use it for your system or some parts of it. You can also Replace the file.

The page contains the following parts:

• File Name: list of configuration files to select from

• Sections: The Sections in the configuration file can contain any combination of one, two orall four sections as follows:■ System■ Blade)■ Media Routing■ Replace

The section Blade contains the configuration for a media blade.

When you select a Configuration File from the File Name list, the control layer will parse this file and display the list of sections this file contains. The parsing allows you to verify what is inside the configuration file before you decide which sections you want to apply. Selecting the sections from the configuration file pro-vides significant flexibility for configuring your system.

After you made your selections and clicked Apply, the web interface displays Applying configuration file ... page, which represents a list of steps of the cho-sen configuration being applied to your system along with their states.

121


Example below shows a progress report.

When the operation is complete, you can click the View Report link and see the Apply Config Report page.

The Replace option is enabled by default. The following example explains its functionality: a config A file is active, and you need to apply a config B file. If Replace option is on, config A will be replaced by config B. The replac-ing and this is performed in a “smart” way: all elements common between con-fig A and config B will be left unchanged. The rest of the file will be modified. If the Replace option is off, config B will be added to config A: each element in config B not present in config A will be added and the rest will be left unchanged.

Copy Startup Copy Startup copies the running configuration file to startup configuration val-ues; a message will display saying if it was successful or not. This is generally applied when you want to make sure that this is the configuration that comes up

122


when the system reboots. The two default files are running-config and startup-config.

Copy Running Copy Running copies the running configuration data to a file in a selected desti-nation (Flash) and allows you to name the file.

You can set a full or partial configuration using the options in the Sections list (see Copy Configuration File page below), and then copy it to a file.

The Sections list provides flexibility in setting configuration as follows:

• System: SCM configuration

NOTEAfter you change your system and are confident everything is work-ing correctly, TANDBERG Television recommends that you copy the configuration file at that point to the startup file in order to have a known starting point should the system ever have to reboot.

TIP When you save theconfiguration file to the startup file

without saving the defaults, youwill boot about 25 percent faster.

If you ever need the factorydefaults again, just recopy the

running configuration file with thedefaults enabled.

NOTEBefore making any changes to your system, TANDBERG Television recommends that you save the current state of your system by copy-ing the currently running configuration file to a backup file (you choose the name of the file) in order to be able to go back to the cur-rent configuration should you ever need to do so.

TIP When you save theconfiguration file to the startup file

without saving the defaults, youwill boot about 25 percent faster.

If you ever need the factorydefaults again, just recopy the

running configuration file with thedefaults enabled.

123


• Blade(s): ports/interfaces configuration

• Media-Routes: program routes, stream routes, user-defined programs, and user-definedelements.

By default, all options are enabled.

Remove Config The check box on the name bar selects all files to be removed or you can remove individual files by selecting the applicable check box for each line.

Upload Config The Upload Configuration File page allows you to select a file to upload to a designated FTP server. You must type the destination file name, IP address of the FTP server, user name and password. Then click Apply. You will then be able to select the file using the other Configuration File commands.

Download Config The Download Configuration File page allows you to download a file from your FTP server and save it to the SCM onboard Flash. After entering your informa-tion in the text entry boxes, click Apply to download the Config File, or click Clear to enter different information.

.TIP Store all your data files onyour FTP server before

attempting to download.

124


FTP InformationDownload Destination: This is read-only information to let you know that the destination is Flash.Destination File Name: Type the name of the file.Source File Name: Type the name of the file on the FTP server you are down-loading.FTP Server IP Address: Type the IP address of your FTP server.User Name: Type your user name to access your FTP server.

Password: Type your password to access your FTP server.

Edit Config The Edit Config feature allows you to edit a file selected from the File Name drop-down list.

When you selected a file, you can click the Next button which open this page.

125


The above page allows you to Add or Delete System, Interface or Media Routing. To Delete/Add any of the above, Click on System, Interfaces (10), or Media Routing to see the list of each, as shown in the example below.

If you click the Next button in this page, the page that opens contains the Previ-ous button.

The Previous button shows the list of sections previously shown. If you click the Next button again and there are no more items to show, a message will appear:

Push Config This feature allows you to send and apply (optional) a config file to multiple iPlexes. First you select the config file, then you add the iPlexes IP addresses. You can add a range of IPs using the following format: xxx.xxx.xxx.xx-yy, for example: 10.234.4.10-20. Upon all entries are done, click the Push button.

126


Data FileData Files are arbitrary (small) binary files stored in the iPlex and available for transmission. They are typically custom tables. Data files can be transmitted by creating FileIn ports and configuring them to point at the specific file.

The Data File menu item displays the following links: Download Data File and Remove Data File.

Download DataFile

The Download Data File page allows you to download a data file from your FTP server and save it to either the SCM onboard Flash on the iPlex.

FTP InformationDownload Destination: Read-only indication that the file is downloaded to Flash.Destination File Name: Type the name of the file.

NOTEYou must download a data file before you can create its FileInlogical port (see FileIn Port Configuration and Statistics on page307).

.TIP Store all your data files onyour FTP server before

attempting to download.

127


Source File Name: Type the name of the file on the FTP server you are down-loading.FTP Server IP Address: Type the IP address of your FTP server.User Name: Type your user name to access your FTP server.Password: Type your password to access your FTP server.

Remove Data File The Remove Data File page allows you to remove one or all data files from your onboard Flash where you stored the files. Select the center check box to remove all files or select each files individually.

IP Routing ConfigurationIP Routing takes place through the Gigabit Ethernet ports; consequently, it is necessary to create a Virtual LAN (VLAN) for routing to occur. The IP Routing menu item displays the following links: Network Routing, RIP, VLAN, and Multi-cast.

Network Routing Network Routing allows you to modify parameters in various route types. For example, in MPE routes you can edit the MAC Address, PID and Discipline.

Route Type Select from three radio buttons IP, MPE or ATM. After entering values, you can use the Add button to create a new route or the Delete button to remove entries.

NOTEOnly the applicable Route Types will display. For example, if you do not have an ATM submodule, that option will not be available.

128


Manual IP Route After entering values, you can use the Add button to create a new route or use the Delete button in conjunction with the Delete check box to remove entries.

Network: Enter the base IP address for the route.

Netmask: Enter the subnet mask IP for the route.

Gateway: Enter the IP address for the next-hop gateway for this network. This IP address must be in one of the subnets local to the iPlex.

Manual MPE Route After entering values, click the Add button to create a new route, or the Delete button to remove entries.

Network: Enter the base IP address for the route.

Netmask: Enter the subnet mask for the route.


PID: Type MPEG PID (hexadecimal) to be used on this IP injection route.

TIP If you edit the PID, MACaddress, or discipline of an

existing MPE route, you mustclick Apply when you have

completed the changes.

129


IP Mapping MAC Address: Select the check box for the IP address to form the MAC address and set the first and second MAC bytes.

MAC Address: Type the MAC address of the next hop to be used in this IP injec-tion route.

Discipline: Select the MPE discipline name (see Configuring SME on page 153 in the next section for more details).

Delete: Select the check box of a particular route you want to delete and click the Delete button.

Manual ATM Route Network: Enter the base IP address for the route.

Netmask: Enter the subnet mask for the route.


VPI: Enter the Virtual Path Identifier for the PVC to be used in this route.

VCI: Enter the Virtual Circuit Identifier for the PVC to be used in this route.

Delete: Select this check box if you want to delete a particular route.

NOTEYou must configure SME for the discipline type to be available in the drop-down list.

PVC (Permanent Virtual Circuit) Apoint-to-point ATM connection

that is established manually (i.e.,not through signaling).


130


ConfiguringStatic ARP

To improve chassis reliability when transmitting high volumes of unicast traffic, you may wish to use static ARP.

When transmitting unicast traffic, the iPlex needs to know the destination MAC address of the device that should receive the traffic. This will be the MAC address of the end device if it is in the same subnet as the gigabit port, or the MAC address of the next-hop gateway. The MAC address information resides in the ARP table, which relates IP addresses with their corresponding MAC addresses. If this infor-mation is not known, the outgoing traffic may flood the SCM processor. This may be an issue in the following scenario:

By default, ARP entries age out in 300 seconds. If the destination device (or next-hop gateway) goes down, then in 300 seconds that information will be removed from the ARP table and the iPlex may stop functioning.

These issues can be corrected with Static ARP entries in the table. Static ARP entries do not age out, and are entered manually. This ensures that the iPlex has the necessary information to forward unicast traffic.

The disadvantage of using Static ARP is that if the destination device or gateway is replaced, the iPlex needs to be manually reconfigured for the appropriate MAC address.

Entering Static ARPValues

To enter static ARP values:

1 Select Configuration > IP Routing > Network Routing.

2 In the Network Routing screen, in the Static ARP section, enter the target IPaddress (end node or next hop gateway) and the corresponding MAC address.

3 Click Add, then click Apply.

4 To delete entries, select the check box for that entry and click Delete, thenclick Apply.

NOTEThe iPlex does not support entering ATM routes for adapters in bridged mode.

131


.

Inspecting StaticARP Entries

To inspect the list of static ARP entries, select the Statistics menu, then IP Rout-ing, then Network Routing. The screen that opens lists all manual and automatic IP routes, and the configured static ARP entries (at the bottom of the table).

Configuring RIP In the RIP Configuration screen, you can Enable RIP.

NOTEIIMPORTANT: If you use unicast traffic, configure the static ARP entries for your destinations before you configure the iPlex for out-put.

132


RIPEnable RIP: Select to enable RIP, for the chassis to announce the network rout-ing.

RIP Version: Select version of RIP that is compatible with you network (see refer-ence document “RFC 1058” for information on Version 1 and “RFC 1723” for information on Version 2).

RIP SetupInterface Name: Shows the interface(s) that support RIP.

Enable RIP: Select to enable RIP for a specific interface.

Passive Mode: Select if you want the interface to just listen (that is, it will only learn routes from the interface but it will not send RIP updates).

Configuring aVLAN

The VLAN Configuration page allows you to configure VLANs. After entering values, click Add to create a new VLAN or Delete check boxes and Delete button to remove entries. After completing the configuration, click Apply.

RIP (Routing InformationProtocol) A simple routing

protocol that is part of the TCP/IPprotocol suite. It determines a

route based on the smallest hopcount between source and

destination.

NOTES1. IPv6 and IPv4 do not coexist in the same VLAN, and they have tobe created in separate VLANs. See IPv6 Support on page 45.2. If you need to change the settings of a VLAN, you must delete that VLAN and create a new setup using the same VLAN ID.



moving cables in the wiringcloset. It combines user stations

and network devices into a singleunit regardless of the physical

LAN segment they are attachedto and allows traffic to flow more

efficiently within populations ofmutual interest.

VLAN Tagged Packets VLANtags used to define multiple LANsin the same physical segment. A

tagged packet has an extraheader added between the layer

2 and the layer 3 headers (thetag) that indicates to which VLANit belongs. Typically only switchesand routers handle tags, not end-

hosts.

133


VLAN SetupVLAN ID: Type the identifier number of the VLAN (Range 2-4065).

IP Address: Type the IP address (unicast class A, B, or C) of the VLAN.

Subnet Mask: Type the subnet mask of the VLAN.

GE1 and GE2: Select Tagged, Untagged or No from the drop-down box for the Gigabit Ethernet port to be used and whether the packets are tagged or untagged (default is No).

.

After selecting values, click Add.

Vlan IPv6 Setup VLAN ID: Type the identifier number of the VLAN (Range 2-4065).

IPv6 Address: IPv6 multicast address of the receiver. Format: XXXX:XXXX:...

GE1 and GE2: Select Tagged, Untagged or No from the drop-down box for the Gigabit Ethernet port to be used and whether the packets are tagged or untagged (default is No).


Media Blade VLAN SetupVLAN ID: Type the identifier number of the VLAN (Range 2-4065).

IP Address: Type the IP address (unicast class A, B, or C) of the VLAN.

Subnet Mask: Type the subnet mask of the VLAN.

GE: Select None, 1 or 2.

Type: Select No, Untagged, or Tagged.

Blade: Select None or MCM.


ConfiguringMulticast

The Multicast Configuration page allows you to select, on a per multicast address basis, which physical ports carry traffic for that group. Each multicast group is associated with one VLAN and, by default, packets for this group are sent

NOTEYou can have multiple Tagged VLANs on the same Gigabit Ethernet port but only one Untagged. Also, a VLAN created with a ‘No’ port association is an unusable VLAN.

NOTEYou can have multiple Tagged VLANs on the same Gigabit Ethernet port but only one Untagged. Also, a VLAN created with a ‘No’ port association is an unusable VLAN.

134


to all ports belonging to that VLAN. In this page, you can limit any multicast to any arbitrary subset of ports of the VLAN using the Port Name column.

ConfiguringSpanning Tree

The Spanning Tree Configuration page is shown below.

To configure the spanning tree protocol, set the following controls.

Started: A checkbox that enables you to turn the protocol on (checked) or off (unchecked).

VLAN ID: A drop-down list from which to select the VLAN upon which the protocol will run.

NOTEAutomatic multicast entries are created when UDPOut ports are cre-ated or configured with multicast addresses. You must create the appropriate VLAN(s) prior to creating or configuring the UDPOut ports.

135


• Bridge Priority: This is the two-byte MSB of the bridge identifier. It controls which device inthe network will become the root bridge. The lower the value, the higher the priority of thedevice.

Understanding theSpanning Tree

Protocol

The Spanning Tree Protocol is used by layer-2 bridges to remove loops from the network topology. This is necessary because otherwise the packets would go for-ever around the loop, causing the network to stop functioning due to excessive traffic. The protocol identifies a subset of the network topology that has the fol-lowing properties:

• It spans all nodes in the network (“spanning”).

• There is only one path between any pair of nodes in the network (that is, the topology is a“tree”).

Links that do not belong to the spanning tree are not used for communication, but are held in reserve (that is, the bridge ports are “blocking”). If one of the links in the tree is broken or lost, the Spanning Tree Protocol will automatically recover from this situation by enabling one of these links (that is, it will be placed in “for-warding” state). To build the spanning tree, one of the nodes (bridges) is elected to be the root of the tree (the “root bridge”). Each bridge in the network has an 8-byte identifier.

Priorities are inversely proportional to the numerical value of the identifier. The bridge with the lowest identifier is the root bridge. The two most significant bytes of the identifier are user-defined priority values. The remaining six bytes are the bridge's MAC address.

The iPlex implements the Spanning Tree Protocol in its two Gigabit Ethernet ports. By using this feature, you can daisy-chain a number of units and then con-nect the last unit back to the first (thus forming a ring). The protocol will ensure that one of the links in the ring is held in reserve. If any one link is lost, the ring is patched by turning on the reserve link. Other more complex applications are also possible. The iPlex Spanning Tree Protocol implementation will interoperate with any standard third-party device with similar support.

The iPlex Spanning Tree Protocol support is limited to a single VLAN, which is user-selectable. If you are planning to use this feature and you have defined multi-ple VLANs in your iPlex, please make sure that the physical topology of all the VLANs is the same (at least, as far as the iPlex is concerned). If one of the GE ports is placed in “blocking” state, it will be blocking for all defined VLANs.

NOTEOnly VLANs with both Gigabit Ethernet ports present will be listed because you need more than one for the protocol to be useful.

136


SCM ConfigurationThe SCM menu item displays the following links: General, Reboot, Software, SNMP, GE, License, Logging, Security, and nCompass.

SCM GeneralConfiguration

Click General and the SCM General Configuration page allows you to configure the SCM general parameters including IP Management, DNS and NTP Servers, and Syslog Host information. After making configuration changes, click Apply.

TIP If you have two iPlex units inredundancy mode, you can use

the Virtual IP Address to refer tothe combination as a whole. Theprimary unit will always respond

to this address.

137


SCM General Host Name: Type name of unit.

DNS Domain Name: Type name of local domain.


Speed and Duplex: If the Auto Negotiation parameter is disabled, this parame-ter is enabled and shows up. Values: 100Mbps Full Duplex, 100Mbps Half Duplex, 10Mbps Full Duplex and 10Mbps Half Duplex. The default value is 100Mbps Full Duplex.

Management IPIP Address: Type IP address of the SCM management port.

Netmask: Type the network mask of the SCM management port.

Default Router: Type the IP address of the default router for the SCM manage-ment port.

Virtual IP Address: Type IP address of redundant iPlexes, which is a common address for primary and backup units.

Backplane Subnet: Type the subnet IP address for the backplane (default 171.17.1.0).

Time Zone: Select the chassis’ time zone from the following list: Abidjan, Accra, Acre, ACT, Adak, Addis_Ababa, Adelaide, Aden, Alaska, Aleutian, Algiers, Almaty, Amman, Amsterdam, Anadyr, Anchorage, Oakland, Belfast, Belgrade, Berlin, Brisbane, Cairo, Calcutta, CET, CST6CDT, EET, EST, EST5EDT, GMT, GMT0, GMT-0, GMT+0, GMT-1, GMT+1, GMT-10, GMT+10, GMT-11, GMT+11, GMT-12, GMT+12, GMT-13, GMT+13, GMT-14, GMT+14, GMT-2, GMT+2, GMT-3, GMT+3, GMT-4, GMT+4, GMT-5, GMT+5, GMT-6, GMT+6, GMT-7, GMT+7, GMT-8, GMT+8, GMT-9, GMT+9, Greenwich, Japan, Los Angeles, Melbourne, Moscow, Mountain, MST, MST7MDT, Pacific, Pacific-New, PST8PDT, New York, Taipei, Zurich.

Redundancy IP IP Address: Redundancy IP address; range: 1.0.0.1 - 223.255.254.254.

Netmask: Redundancy netmask; no range.

NOTEThis should only be changed by advanced users if there is a conflict with the user’s internal network subnet.

138


DNS Server IP Address: Type IP address of DNS server and click Add.

Syslog Host IP Address: Type IP address of a host which the iPlex should forward log mes-sages, and click Add.

NTP Server IP Address: Type IP address of NTP server and click Add.

Reboot From the menu, click Reboot to reboot an SCM blade. A confirmation message will be displayed. Click the Reboot button to continue.

SCM SoftwareConfiguration

In the SCM Software Configuration page you can decide where the chassis boots from; that is, where the software image resides.

NOTEIf you enter an invalid DNS server IP address, the iPlex will take a long time to respond to Telnet or SSH connections as it does a reverse DNS lookup on the incoming connection. Similarly, the response will be significantly slowed if the DNS server is present but you connect from an IP address that is not registered with it. TAND-BERG Television recommends leaving this field empty unless you must have name resolution (for example, to specify Syslog, NTP, or other addresses as host names).

WARNINGDue to the limited space for logs in the iPlex, the potentially large number of messages that can be generated by this feature, and the fact that logs do not persist across reboots, TANDBERG Television strongly recommends that an external syslog server be used if log persistence is important.

139


SCM SoftwareBoot: Select the host device from the following list: TFTP, Flash, or DHCP.

TFTPTFTP Host: Type the IP address where the software comes from.

TFTP File Name: Type the software load file name.

FlashFlash Image: Select from available images (Flash 1, or Flash 2).

DHCPDHCP: Select to enable booting from a DHCP server.

Configuring SCMSNMP

The SNMP Configuration page allows you to set up SNMP for remote monitor-ing and control and view or download MIBs file.

TFTP (Trivial File TransferProtocol) A version of the FTP

protocol that has no directory orpassword capability.

Flash Card A small module thatcontains flash memory, such as a

PC Card, Compact Flash, orsimilar format.

DHCP (Dynamic HostConfiguration Protocol) Software

that automatically assigns IPaddresses to client stations

logging onto a TCP/IP network. Iteliminates having to manually

assign IP addresses to individualcomputers.

NOTE When using the TFTP or DHCP to boot from, you must provision the server with a copy of the software image. When using Flash 1, or Flash 2 to boot from, you must first upload the software image to this destination from the Maintenance—Software Upgrade page.

140


141


SNMP The following fields are various SNMP community names with the range of 0 to 254 characters.

SNMP Read Community: Type a read community name.

SNMP Read Write Community: Type a read and write community name.

SNMP Location: This field is a textual description of the system location, read-able through SNMP.

SNMP Contact: This field should be set to the name of the person responsible for this iPlex. It is readable by SNMP.

SNMP Trap Community: Type the trap community name.

Trap Destination IP Address: Type the IP address of the trap destination. Trap destinations can be added (Add button) or deleted chck box and Delete button.

SNMP Trap Severity Set the severity (Info, Minor, Major, Discard) for each trap ID.

SNMP V3 User User Name: Type the authorized user name, 0 to 15 characters. Can be added (Add button) or deleted chck box and Delete button.

Password: Type a password for this user, 8 to 15 characters.

Auth Protocol: Select the authentication protocol as MD5 or SHA.

Security Level: Select the security level as noauth, auth or authpriv.

To view or download the MIBs file, click MIBs under Go navigation button.

After configuration is complete, click Apply.

GE PortsConfiguration

The Gigabit Ethernet Ports Configuration page is shown below.

GE Auto Negotiation Port: Enter port number, 1 or 2.


142


Unicast IP Forward (Split VLAN): Enable or disable forwarding a unicast IP from one GE port to the other GE port. The default configuration is unicast for-warding enabled (box checked). Uncheking the box causes unicast traffic not to be forwarded to the other GE port. Multicast traffic is not effected in either case. See details below.

Split VLANThe Split VLAN supports multiple iPlexes and Switches. The feature resolves the following problems:

• Guards against broadcast storms.• Allows iPlexes to connect to a primary and backup switch without allowing loopback unicast

traffic.

The basic diagram

Shown below is a basic system diagram.

The basic system works as follows:

• Input A is only directed at one switch at a time.• The GE Ports on the iPlexes output the same Multicast data to different Cisco Switches.• The configuration is currently managed by nCompass.• To avoid the loopback problems, Unicast Forwarding on the GE ports of the iPlexes are

turned off. Devices on the same VLAN but connected on different GE Ports only receiveunicast traffic from a source connected on the same GE Port.

• This configuration supports redundancy (if Input A can be switched between the Primary andSecondary Cisco Switches).

143


ConfiguringLicenses

The License Configuration page allows you to set up a license key for the fea-tures that require a license.

After configuration is complete, click Apply.

License License Key ID: Type the license key identification number (1 to 20).

License Key Description: Type the license key description (0 to 31 characters).

License Key: Type the license key than enables optional features (0 to 31 charac-ters).

Click Add to enter a new key.

Configuring SCMLogging

The SCM Log Configuration page allows you to configure the user logging options.

NOTEOnly root users can enable this feature. Users in theadministrator or operator groups will not be able to see theUser Logging screens.

144


Enable User Logging: Check the box to enable the user logging system.

User LoggingInterface

Select or deselect the interfaces (SNMP, CLI, GUI, LCD, or any combination) on which to enable or disable monitoring of user logging.

Enable Web: Web interface monitored.

Enable CLI: CLI monitored.

Enable SNMP: SNMP monitored.

Enable LCD: LCD monitored.

User LoggingOperation

Type of operations monitored:

Enable Add: Add operations will be logged if enabled.

Enable Modify: Modify operations will be logged if enabled.


145


Enable Remove: Remove operations will be logged if enabled.

Enable Info: Info operations will be logged if enabled.

Syslog Control Control Syslog message forwarding:

Log Warning: Log Warning messages.

Log Info: Log Info messages.

Syslog Facility: Control facility where messages are logged. These facility choices on the pulldown menu include KERN, USER, MAIL, DAEMON, AUTH, SYS-LOG, LPR, NEWS, UUCP, CRON, AUTHPRIV, FTP, LOCAL0, LOCAL1, LOCAL2, LOCAL3, LOCAL4, LOCAL5, LOCAL6, and LOCAL7.

Notification Log There is no user interface to view current entries in the notification log MIB since the notification log is only maintained for use by the management station. The notification log MIB holds a maximum of 250 entries and a minimum of 10 entries. You have to control this parameter using SNMP. Refer to the Network Man-agement & Monitoring Reference Guide for more information.

SecurityConfiguration

The Security Configuration screen shown below allows you to add access to net-works and to enable or disable network contol interfaces.

NOTEThe ability to disable Warning and Info log messages from being sent to the external syslog servers (i.e., the local6 facility) reduces the amount of system messages when external conditions change (e.g, loss of input or table updates). This traffic-reduction feature is beneficial when an Element Management System (EMS) is being used to manage a large number of iPlex systems.

146


The security feature consists of the following capabilities:

• Network access list: You can provide a list of networks to the Mediaplex, and the controlport will only respond (via any of the network access methods) to these networks. It willcompletely ignore any packets (including ping) from any other network. By default, the list hasone entry (0.0.0.0/0), which means access is accepted from anywhere. You can enter a list ofup to 10 networks in the format base_network/mask to restrict access.

• Selective disabling of network control interfaces: You can selectively turn on or off thefollowing accesses from the list of allowed networks: Telnet, SSH, HTTP, HTTPS, SNMP, andControl.

• In-band control from GE ports: You can enable or disable the control of the iPlex from theGE ports.

.

Network Access List Network: The IP address of the network that is allowed access.

Netmask: The network mask to be used to determine the network that is allowed access.

Network ControlInterfaces

Enable Telnet: Telnet access will be allowed if enabled.

Enable SSH: SSH access will be allowed if enabled.

Enable HTTP: HTTP access will be allowed if enabled.

Enable HTTPS: HTTPS access will be allowed if enabled.

Enable SNMP: SNMP access will be allowed if enabled.

Enable GE Ports Control: Control from the GE ports will be allowed if enabled.

CASConfiguration

CAS Configuration screen follows. Currently not implemented.

NOTEEnabling In-band Control is a security risk if consumers in general have access to the GE port. The access control passwords still apply, but enabling this reduces the security of the unit. This setting is recommended only for units engaged in backhaul communication over isolated networks. It allows you to control an iPlex through its GE port(s).

147


nCompassControl andStatus GUI

Support

The nCompass Configuration screen is accessed as follows: Configuration->SCM->nCompass. The nCompass support includes the following features:

• A status display, nCC, in the GUI top bar.

• A configuration screen for the nCompass interface.

The screenshot that follows shows both features.

The status display is a virtual LED, which indicates in color the following states of nCompass control:

• Grey: this iPlex is not under nCompass control.

• Red: this iPlex is under nCompass control but it currently is unable to communicate with thenCompass server.

• Green: this iPlex is under nCompass control and is active.

• Blue: this iPlex is under nCompass control and is inactive.

Enable Redundancy: Select or deselect the check box and click the Apply but-ton.

This screen has two functions. Use the check box and the Activate/Deactivate button according to the following:

• If an iPlex has been under nCompass control in the past, it will “remember” that fact and willdisable some functions that can interfere with nCompass operation (such as saving theconfiguration file to startup). If the iPlex is no longer managed by the nCompass server, youneed to access this screen and click on the “Deactivate” button.

• If an iPlex is under nCompass device control but is not part of an N:1 redundancy group,uncheck the Enable Redundancy box. This will speed up the operation.

148


Configuring an MCMThe MCM menu item displays the following links: Blade, Reboot, Reconnect, Ports, ASIIn, ASIOut, Encoder, Transcoder, and Network. The configuration information for the ASIIn, ASIOut, Encoder, and Transcoder is available in Chap-ter 4, Port Configuration and Statistics.

Configuring anMCM Blade

Click Blade and then click the port you want to configure.

Module List Module: Type the number assigned to the submodule (1-8).

Type: Type the type of submodule; for example, ENC is an encoder.

Channels: Type the number of channels in a submodule. In the case of an ASI, which has two physical inputs/outputs per channel (A and B), only one physical input per channel can be active at any given time. Port: Type the name of port and its location; for example, ASIin1/6 is the ASI Input port on position 1 at port 6.Status: Indicates in color code the port status as follows: Green indicates that the interface is PROCESSING; White indicates the interface is DOWN; Blue indicates NO SYNC. These colors are similar to blade activities.

Routing TableEnter Destination, Netmask, and Gateway values and click ADD if you need to add a Routing Table.

149


Reboot You can reboot an MCM blade by clicking Reboot, which displays a confirmation message. Click the Reboot button to continue.

Reconnect To reconnect to an MCM blade that is unreachable, click Reconnect. A confirma-tion message displays. Click the Reconnect button under the message to continue.

Ports The MCM Ports page gives a Summary Port List of available ports for specific subcomponents.

Summary Port ListPort Type: Gives the name of the port type. The All In/All Out link displays all input/output ports on the MCM. The All Physical link gives the submodules installed, such as encoders, ASIIn, and ASIOut. The All Network link shows logi-cal ports such as UDPIn/Out, RTPIn/Out, and TCPIn. The All link shows every port on the MCM.

Number of Ports: Provides the number of ports for each type.

WARNING!If you do not want to proceed, click Back on your browser.

150


Network The Network menu item displays the following links: ATM, SMD, and SME inter-faces.

Configuring ATM The ATM Configuration page allows you to configure ATMInterfaces. After you have finished the configuration, click Apply.

Interface ATM

IP Address: Type IP address of ATMInterface.

Subnet Mask: Type subnet mask of ATMInterface.

Forward Received Multicasts: Deselect to disable forwarding. By default, this is selected and forwarding is enabled.

Framing Mode: Select from SONET or SDH frame mode.

ATM Adapter ModeMode Flag: Select from Bridge mode or Router mode.

Default VPI: VPI value for the PVC to be used by default for unicast traffic if no other routes are present.

SDH (Synchronous DigitalHierarchy) The European

counterpart to SONET.

SONET (Synchronous OpticalNETwork) A fiber-optic

transmission system for high-speed digital traffic. Employed by

telephone companies andcommon carriers, SONET speeds

range from 51 megabits tomultiple gigabits per second.

NOTEIf you receive a multicast over ATM, by default the multicast packetsare forwarded to the backplane, in addition to being delivered to theUDPIn port you create. If you have many UDPIn over ATM ports, theprocess of receiving, processing the transport stream, sending itout, and sending another copy of the original packets may overloadthe MCM. However, you can turn off the forwarding of receivedmulticasts into the backplane. This needs to be done globally for theinterface (that is, the entire ATMInterface).If you turn this off, the MCM will be able to sustain the traffic for lotsof UDPIn ports and you can readdress them at will. It defaults toenabled because this was the default behavior prior to this feature.This control is the Forward Received Multicasts checkbox, found in the interface configuration screen.

151


Default VCI: VCI value for the PVC to be used by default for unicast traffic if no other routes are present.

Configuring SMD The SMD Configuration page allows you to configure SMD interfaces. After completing the configuration, click Apply.

Interface SMDIP Address: Type the IP address of the ASI interface used for SMD.

Subnet Mask: Type the subnet mask of the ASI interface used for SMD.

Forward Received Multicasts: Deselect to disable forwarding. By default, this is selected and forwarding is enabled.

Enable IP Sniffing: When enabled a list of incoming IP traffic is available on the statistics page for this interface.

Enable MAC Filtering: When you enable MAC Filtering, you can specify the MAC addresses from which to decapsulate data.

NOTE When using ATM DS3 or ATM E3 Network Interface cards, you should note the VPI/VCI ranges are limited to 0-7/0-511.


through ASIIn.

NOTEIf you receive a multicast over ATM, by default the multicast packets are forwarded to the backplane, in addition to being delivered to the UDPIn port you create. If you have many UDPIn over ATM ports, the process of receiving, processing the transport stream, sending it out, and sending another copy of the original packets may overload the MCM. However, you can turn off the forwarding of received mul-ticasts into the backplane. This needs to be done globally for the interface (that is, the entire ATMInterface).

152


PID ListType PID number and click Add. The iPlex uses PIDs to identify the different broadcast data or programs in the broadcast streams. In order to receive specific data, enter the correct PID.

List of MAC AddressType MAC Address and click Add. Each input device has a unique MAC Address. In normal operation, the input will only accept unicast packets where the destina-tion MAC addresses matches that of the receiver.

Configuring SME The SME Configuration page allows you to configure SME interfaces. After completing the configuration, click Apply.

Interface SMEIP Address: Type the IP address of the ASI interface used for SME.

Subnet Mask: Type the subnet mask of the ASI interface used for SME.

MPE Section Packing: Select the MPE Section Packing check box to enable sec-tion packing in the SME network port.



153


DisciplinesThe iPlex is capable of offering different QoS (Quality of Service) levels to SME-injected traffic. The different QoS levels are “disciplines” applied on a route-by-route basis. iPlex offers the following QoS disciplines.

■ Expedited Forwarding (EF): This discipline is designed for traffic thatrequires guaranteed bandwidth and low-latency. Packets in this traffic class areinjected as soon as possible with a minimum delay. The discipline has oneparameter, a guaranteed bandwidth level. If the volume of traffic exceeds theconfigured bandwidth, the excess traffic is immediately discarded. Because ofthe low-latency requirement for this discipline, section packing is not used. Itis recommended that no more than 10% of a link’s bandwidth be committed toEF disciplines.

■ Assured Forwarding (AF): This discipline is designed for traffic that requiresguaranteed bandwidth, can have occasional bursts, and can tolerate somelatency. The AF discipline has two parameters, a minimum (guaranteed)bandwidth, and a maximum bandwidth. Traffic under the minimum bandwidthis always carried; traffic in between minimum and maximum is carried if thereis available capacity, and traffic over the maximum is immediately discarded.AF traffic may be section-packed depending on the state of the queues.

■ Best Effort (BE): Best-Effort traffic has no guarantees and is carried in abandwidth available basis, after all the compliant AF and EF traffic is injected.BE traffic may starve for bandwidth and suffer arbitrarily large delays. BEtraffic is section-packed as needed.

The SME port allows you to apply specific disciplines to the route. This applies rules to the delivery method of IP traffic. Once you configure SME, the MPE route will display a drop-down menu listing your available options.

NOTEThe user can have up to 64 disciplines per discipline class. When multiple routes are added to the same discipline they share the bandwidth. For example, create an EF class discipline set at 2 Mb/s, and add three routes pointing to this discipline, then the 2 Mb/s limit applies to the aggregate of these three routes. If each route requires 2 Mb/s then you need to create three disciplines set at 2 Mb/s and point each individual route to each discipline.

154


EF DisciplineDiscipline Name: Type the discipline name (up to seven characters).

Maximum Bit Rate (bps): Type maximum bit rate (range is 4096 to 160,000,000 bps).

AF DisciplineDiscipline Name: Type the discipline name (up to seven characters).

Minimum Bit Rate (bps): Type minimum bit rate (range is 4096 to 160,000,000 bps).

Maximum Bit Rate (bps): Type maximum bit rate (range is 4096 to 160,000,000 bps).

BE DisciplineDiscipline Name: Type the discipline name (up to seven characters).

Queue Size: Type the number of buffers for the queue (range is 1 to 100).

Configuring a DSP 4PAC (Media Proces-sor) SubmoduleYou must specify the processing function of the DSP 4PAC (Media Processor) submodule before you can configure the transcoder ports.

AF (Assured Forwarding) is aclass of service for applications

that require a better reliabilitythan Best Effort service.

BE (Best Effort) is a class ofservice with no reserved

resources.

EF (Expedited Forwarding) is aclass of service used by Type of

Service (ToS) for applications thatrequire a hard guarantee on

delay and jitter.

155


Specifying theProcessing

Function

Click on Ports under the MCM blade on the left side Main menu to invoke the Summary Port List. Then click MediaProc to navigate down to the Port Con-figuration screen.

Description: Extended description of the object (0 char(s) - 79 char(s))

Processing Function: Specify the media processing function as follows.

• None: This is the default. The Media Processor submodule performs no processing when thisitem is selected.

• Low, Medium, or High Bit Rate MPEG-2 Transrator: Select one of the bit rates forMPEG-2 Transrator. ■ The High Bit Rate selection provides one service per DSP, and a 4PAC will

provide 4 transrator input / output ports.

156


■ The Medium Bit Rate selection provides two services per DSP, and a 4PACwill provide 8 transrator input / output ports.

■ The Low Bit Rate selection provides three services per DSP, and a 4PAC willprovide 12 transrator input / output ports.

• MPEG-2 to H.264 Transcoder: Select this item if you want the Media Processor submoduleto do MPEG-2 to MPEG-4 AVC transcoding.

• MPEG-2 to H.264 Transcoder PIP: Select this item if you want the Media Processorsubmodule to do MPEG-2 to MPEG-4 AVC transcoding implementing Picture in Picture(PIP) resolution.

.

To program the transcoding input and output ports, see Transcoder Ports on page 354.

When finished configuring, click Apply.

NOTEWhen this processing function is selected, the transcoder does not support VBI (see page 522) / teletext.

157


The Maintenance MenuFrom Maintenance you can download a software upgrade, change web interface preferences, and administer iPlex user security permissions and set time.

Software The Software Management page allows you to copy software images to/from the unit, and between storage locations in the unit itself. The possible sources and destinations are:

• Internal Flash memory partitions.

• An external FTP server.

All combinations of the above locations as source and destination are supported. For example, it is possible to copy a software image from one partition to another, from an FTP server to a flash partition, and/or from a flash partition to an FTP server.

After entering the information into the form, click Apply.

.

FTP InformationSource: Select the source where the file is coming from: FTP, Flash 1, Flash 2, or Flash 1+2.

File Name: Type the name of the file containing the image.

FTP Server IP Address: Type the IP address for the FTP server.

NOTEThe form will change dynamically depending on your selections forsource and destination.

NOTEThis menu can be accessed by users in the root and adminis-trator groups.

158


User Name: Enter the user name to access the FTP server.

Password: Enter the password to access the FTP server.

Destination: Select the destination where the file is going: FTP, Flash 1, Flash 2, or Flash 1+2...

User InterfaceClick User Interface and the User Interface Configuration page will display. After you enter your preferences into the form, click Apply.

.

PreferencesSession Timeout (Minutes): Set session time in minutes.

AdministrationUnder Maintenance, Administration is the next level on the menu tree and con-tains the following submenus: User List, Add User and Set Time.

NOTEThis page provides a method for copying the software upgrade image from a number of possible locations and saving this image to one of the destinations available. To run this software upgrade, you must go to the SCM Software—Configuration page and select the destination of the image for the SCM to boot from.


NOTEOnly root users can exercise this feature. Users in the adminis-trator or operator groups will not be able to see the Administra-tion screens.

159


User List The User List page displays the following levels of user permissions: root, admin-istrator, and operator. However, you can Edit or Delete this list by clicking the Edit link and adding individual names or categories.

Edit UserThe Edit option allows you to edit the user group and password for a specific user.

Add User Use Add User to add and change passwords for users. Standard procedure is used for adding and confirming passwords. When finished, click Add User.

Set Time Set Time allows you to set the system time using the following format: Month Day hour minute Century Year (MMDDhhmmCCYY). For example, March 25, 2003 at 2:00:59 P.M should say (032514002003). After you have finished the con-figuration, click Set Time.

160


The Diagnostics MenuFrom Diagnostics you can view, upload, or clear iPlex log files. In addition, it pro-vides utilities for pinging IP addresses, and generating a report for Technical Sup-port.

Log

Log File The Log File option enables you to view the log files, upload the log files, or clear log files.

Clear Log You can clear all the log files by clicking Yes.

Upload Log The Upload Log page lets you select specific messages to upload. You can select the control layer for the SCM and MCM blades—Errors, Critical, Warning, Infor-mational, and Notice options are available.


NOTEThis menu can be accessed by users in the root, administrator, and operator groups.

NOTEIf you do not want to proceed, click Back on your browser.

161


Select the log files, and the destination to upload the files to using the radio button FTP Server. For the FTP Server type the IP Address, User Name and Password. Click Apply.

Log sample firstpage

Mar 4 14:06:37 iPlex ctrlLayer[746]: USER-LOG: 192.168.25.111 : root : WEB : INFO : SCM : Page Visited : Page: Home

Mar 4 14:07:27 iPlex ctrlLayer[746]: USER-LOG : 192.168.25.111 : root : WEB : INFO : SCM : Page Visited : Page: Log files, User log

Mar 4 14:07:46 iPlex ctrlLayer[746]: USER-LOG : 192.168.25.111 : root : WEB : INFO : SCM : Page Visited : Page: Users list


Mar 4 14:08:13 iPlex ctrlLayer[746]: USER-LOG : 192.168.25.111 : root : WEB : INFO : SCM : Page Visited : Page: Log files, Blade: All

Mar 4 14:08:38 iPlex ctrlLayer[746]: USER-LOG : 192.168.25.111 : root : WEB : INFO : SCM : Page Visited : Page: Log files, Blade: 10

Mar 4 14:09:10 iPlex ctrlLayer[746]: USER-LOG : 192.168.25.111 : root : WEB : INFO : SCM : Page Visited : Page: User interface


Mar 4 14:10:22 iPlex ctrlLayer[746]: USER-LOG : 192.168.25.111 : root : WEB : INFO : SCM : Page Visited : Page: Log files, Blade: 1

Mar 4 14:11:04 iPlex ctrlLayer[746]: USER-LOG : 192.168.25.111 : root : WEB : INFO : SCM : Page Visited : Page: Upload log files

NOTELines in the log also have links that give further information. Clicking an error type on a log message will activate a popup with an expla-nation of the message and recommended action.

162


Mar 4 14:40:00 iPlex ctrlLayer[746]: USER-LOG : 192.168.2.11 : root : WEB : INFO : SCM : Page Visited : Page: Sensors

Mar 4 14:40:01 iPlex ctrlLayer[746]: USER-LOG : 192.168.2.11 : root : WEB : INFO : SCM : Page Visited : Page: Sensors

Mar 6 19:04:05 iPlex ctrlLayer[746]: USER-LOG : 192.168.25.111 : root : WEB : INFO : SCM : Page Visited : Page: Home

Mar 6 19:04:16 iPlex ctrlLayer[746]: USER-LOG : 192.168.25.111 : root : WEB : INFO : SCM : Page Visited : Page: Port summary list, Blade: All, Mode: Configura-tion

Mar 6 19:05:25 iPlex ctrlLayer[746]: USER-LOG : 192.168.25.111 : root : WEB : INFO : SCM : Page Visited : Page: Reconnect blade, Blade: 1

Mar 6 19:08:50 iPlex ctrlLayer[746]: USER-LOG : 192.168.25.111 : root : WEB : INFO : SCM : Page Visited : Page: Media routing

Mar 6 19:34:02 iPlex ctrlLayer[746]: USER-LOG : 192.168.25.111 : root : WEB : INFO : SCM : Page Visited : Page: N/A, Mode: Configuration

Mar 6 19:34:27 iPlex ctrlLayer[746]: USER-LOG : 192.168.25.111 : root : WEB : INFO : SCM : Page Visited : Page: N/A, Mode: Statistics

Mar 6 19:38:02 iPlex ctrlLayer[746]: USER-LOG : 192.168.25.111 : root : WEB : INFO : SCM : Page Visited : Page: N/A, Mode: Configuration

UtilitiesThe Utilities Diagnostic page allows you to ping a designated IP address, gener-ate and send a running configuration report to TANDBERG Television Technical Support.

Ping Utility You can use the ping utility to check network nodes using standard ping parame-ters.

NOTEThis menu can be accessed by users in the root, administrator, and operator groups.

163


Technical Support You can generate a current running configuration report to send to TANDBERG Television Technical Support. Click OK.

Show You may have to wait a few minutes for the information to appear. E-mail the Technical Support Information report from the Send page.

iPlex Technical SupportInformation

A shortened sampleCurrent time Mon Mar 7 14:33:10 2005 show running-configsystem { hostName “iPlex” dnsDomainName “Tandbergtv.COM” chassisIpAddress 192.168.19.134 vlanSetup { vlanId 2 ipAddress 10.10.10.2 subnetMask 255.255.255.0 ge1 'Untagged' ge2 'Tagged' } vlanSetup { vlanId 3 ipAddress 11.11.11.1 subnetMask 255.255.255.0 ge1 'No' ge2 'Untagged' } automaticMulticastSetup { vlanName 'vlan_2' ge1 true ge2 true ipAddress 225.1.1.1 } automaticMulticastSetup { vlanName 'vlan_2' ge1 true ge2 true ipAddress 225.1.1.4 } automaticMulticastSetup { vlanName 'vlan_2' ge1 true ge2 true ipAddress 225.1.1.5 } automaticMulticastSetup { vlanName 'vlan_2' ge1 true ge2 true


164


ipAddress 225.1.1.6 } automaticMulticastSetup { vlanName 'vlan_2' ge1 true ge2 true ipAddress 225.1.1.7 } automaticMulticastSetup { vlanName 'vlan_2' ge1 true ge2 true ipAddress 225.1.1.8 } enableRip false dnsServer { ipAddress 192.168.1.120 } syslogHost { ipAddress 192.168.3.10 } syslogHost { ipAddress 192.168.19.20 } sessionTimeout 30000 timeZone 'GMT-8' ntpServers { ipAddress 192.6.1.221 } daemon {

Send Enter the E-Mail Information and then click the Send button.

165


Sender Name: Type your name here.

Sender E-Mail Address: Type your e-mail address here.

SMTP Server: Type the IP address of the SMTP server.

Recipient Address: Type the e-mail address to send the information.

Recipient CC Address: Type one additional address to send the information (optional).

Subject Line: Type an additional description, if required.

AlarmsTo enable the alarms for the unit, see Alarms on page 120.

Active Alarms The Active Alarms screen shows you whether alarms (both major and minor) have occurred for the unit. If no alarms are active, the screen shows empty.

Clear Alarms The Clear Alarms screen allows you to clear the alarms (both major and minor) for the unit.

166

Port Configuration andStatistics

Chapter 4

167


Overview of Connecting Inputs to OutputsThe iPlex can receive an MPEG/DVB Transport Stream from an input and has various choices for routing the Transport Stream to an output:

• As a program stream containing all table information needed by the program.

• As an element stream containing the table information needed by the element stream.

• As a PID

Stream TypesThe table below shows the type of stream that the iPlex can route via input and output ports. [L] indicates a logical port and [P] a physical port. The SMD logical port is dependent on the physical ASIIn port; likewise, the SME logical port is dependent on the physical ASIOut. A Transport Stream (TS) via TCPIn, UDPIn, and FileIn can receive Data and Section packetization.

The user can send any Transport Stream input via any Transport Stream output. The shaded cells in the table show that ASIIn can decapsulate IP Traffic via SMD; and ASIOut can encapsulate IP traffic via SME. In addition, the shaded cells for native ATMIn and ATMOut logical ports have an association with the physical ATM submodule.

Streams Types Via Input Ports

Stream Types Via Output Ports

IP Traffic The traffic that the iPlexcan encapsulate as MPE

packets. The iPlex can receive IPdata either from a Gigabit

Ethernet interface or from anATMInterface.


through ASIIn.





moving cables in the wiringcloset.

NOTEThe menus in this chapter can be accessed by users in the root and administrator groups.

ASI [P] ATM [P] ATM [L] RTP[L] VLAN [L] SMD [L] UDP [L] File [L] TCP [L]

Data X X X

Section X X X

TS X X X X X X

IP Traffic X X X

ASI [P] ATM [P] ATM [L] RTP [L] UDP [L] VLAN [L] SME [L]

TS X X X X

IP Traffic X X X

168


Overview of Logical Ports StructureYou can create or delete logical ports. To create a logical port click Configuration > New Port. The details of the port creation vary dynamically according to the port type. The general steps in creating a port are as follows:

1 First, select the Port Type:■ UDPIn/Out ports receive/send data as the payload of UDP packets. You can

receive or send these packets over the Gigabit Ethernet ports over the ASIIn/Out (SMD/SME network interfaces) ports using IP over MPEG Transportpackets (employing Multi-Protocol Encapsulation) or over ATM, using one ofthe IP over ATM encapsulations.

■ Backhaul ports are UDPOut ports that have no association to a specific input,and can receive content from any input in the system.

■ RTPIn/Out ports are similar to their UDP counterparts, but they employ theRTP protocol over UDP; the RTP payload receives/sends the data. RTP issupported over Gigabit Ethernet and over ATM, using one of the IP overATM encapsulations.

■ ATMIn/Out ports receive/send data as AAL-5 PDUs. These are available onlyon ATMInterfaces.

■ FileIn ports spool the contents of a typically small file residing on the iPlex’sinternal Flash through a previous data file download.

■ TCPIn ports receive the data over a TCP connection, coming either from theGigabit Ethernet port or from TCP/IP over ATM.

2 You must configure additional parameters depending on the type of port.However, one parameter is always present; that is, the port location (shown inthe user interface as Input Blade or Output Blade). Ports always have anassociation with an MCM.

PacketizersPacketizers convert the data received from an input port to a flow of transport packets suitable for further processing by the iPlex. There are three types of pack-etizers:

• Data Pipe: This packetizer complies with ETSI EN 301 192 section 4. Essentially, thereceived data becomes the payload of the transport packets. You can optionally configure thispacketizer with a timeout; after the timeout, a partially-filled transport packet will contain anadaptation field to complete the payload.

• Section: This packetizer expects private section as defined by ISO/IEC 13818-1. It performssome section syntax checking.

• M2T: This packetizer is a “pass-through” for data that is already in MPEG-2 Transport packetformat. Additionally, it checks sync bytes for correctness.

169


Output Stream ConfigurationAll output ports provide the same configuration options in regards to the stream type. The two output types are MPEG and DVB. MPEG streams only have PAT and PMT; for DVB streams, you can add NIT, SDT and TDT. You can also enable or disable the CAT.

iPlex InterfaceNaming

Convention

There are two port types in iPlex: physical and logical. The discovery of physical ports occurs as part of initial submodule discovery. Logical ports are created by user.

The naming convention for physical ports (submodules) is as follows: Port-TypeSlotNumber/UnitNumber.

The naming convention for logical ports is: PortTypeSlotNumber/Num-berUsed.

UnitNumber andNumberUsed

In physical ports, the unit number starts with 0. Each submodule slot on an MCM contains two unit numbers with a range from 0 to 15. In logical ports, the user assigns the number and has no range.

MCM Example You may, for instance, have one ASI input, an Encoder, an ATM, and ASI output. Since each ASI submodule has two ports, you have two available inter-faces; however, encoders and ATM submodules have only one interface per submodule. The names for this blade would be as follows: ASIIn1/0 and ASIIn1/1, ENC1/2, ATM1/4, ASIOut1/6 and ASIOut1/7.

The ASI input port creates a SMD (TANDBERG Television MPE Decapsula-tion) interface. The SMD interface associated with ASIIn1/0 will be smd1/0 and the ASIIn1/1 will be smd1/1. The ASI output creates a SME (TAND-BERG Television MPE Encapsulation) interface. The SME interface attached to ASIOut1/6 will be sme1/6 and the ASIOut1/7 will be sme1/7.

Additionally, the user can create UDP logical output port with unit number 0, and receive the name UDPOut1/0. Logical ports include: UDPIn/Out, RTPIn/Out, FileIn, and TCPIn.

SCM Example Each SCM blade has two Gigabit Ethernet interfaces: GE1 and GE2.

Configuration and StatisticsThis section lists the configuration and statistics for each of the available ports and is organized in the following way:

• Physical Input Ports: ASIIn■ ASIIn■ Creating Logical Ports

• Physical Output Ports■ ASIOut

170


• Descriptors

• Creating Logical Ports

• Logical Input Ports■ TCPIn■ UDPIn ■ RTPIn■ ATMIn■ FileIn

• Logical Output Ports■ UDPOut ■ Backhaul■ RTPOut■ ATMOut

• Control Ports

■ MediaProc

• GE Ports

■ Ports 1 and 2

• Transrater Ports: XrtrIn and XrtrOut■ XrtrIn■ XrtrOut

• Real-Time Monitoring■ Installation of Java Plug-in■ View Chart Button■ Controls

• Data Type Packetizers■ M2T Packetizer■ Section Packetizer■ Data Pipe Packetizer

• Programs, Elements and Streams List Statistics■ Programs List■ Elements List■ Streams List

Screen Navigation ButtonsAt the top of many of the Configuration and Statistics screens there are buttons (links) like the ones displayed below.

Active (in effect) buttons are blue and inactive buttons are grey. The buttons are:

171


Mode: Placing the cursor on this button takes you to the Statistics page of this port if you are viewing the Configuration of it and vice versa.

Redundancy: Placing the cursor on this button takes you to the Redundancy chassis screen if redundancy is enabled or takes you to the Primary chassis if you are viewing the Redundancy page.

Navigation: Provides navigation (Next and Previous) through the list of ports or interfaces. See more details in the “Navigating through Ports/Interfaces” below.

Go: Placing the cursor on this button takes you to the:

• Advanced version of the current screen• Media Routes screen.• Media Routing screen.

For the Encoders, the Go button navigates to the Advanced and Media Routes screens and to the Audio screen with further navigation to Channel 1 through Channel 6 or 8 (for single-slot encoders). For AVC Encoders the button also nav-igates to the PIP page.

Navigatingthrough Ports/

Interfaces

You can easily circulate through ports or interfaces. The navigation through ports/interfaces varies depending on an entry point: the navigation follows the port/interface type from where the user arrives to the port/interface page.

For example, the following ports are in service:

• ASIIn1/0

• ASIIn1/1

• ASIIn1/2

• ASIIn1/3

NOTEThe buttons will be displayed on the screens that use navigation. The buttons may differ depending on the screen navigation needs as shown in the example above.

172


• ASIOut3/1

• ASIOut3/2

If you select Ports ->ASIIn ports ->ASIIn1/0, the Previous (<--) button points to ASIIn1/3, and the Next (-->) button points to ASIIn1/1.

If you select Ports ->Physical ports ->ASIIn1/0, the Previous button points to ASIOut3/2, and the Next button points to ASIIn1/1.

Backing Up the Configuration File

NOTEBefore making any changes to your system, TANDBERG Televisionrecommends that you save the current state of your system bycopying the currently running configuration file to a backup file (youchoose the name of the file) in order to be able to go back to thecurrent configuration should you ever need to do so. See CopyRunning on page 123 for the procedure on how to do this.After you change your system and are confident everything isworking correctly, TANDBERG Television recommends that youcopy the configuration file at that point to the startup file in order tohave a known starting point should the system ever have to reboot.See Copy Startup on page 122 for the procedure on how to do this.

173


Physical Input Ports: ASIInThe physical input ports are submodules installed on the iPlex. iPlex has two: the ASIIn and the Encoders. These ports are automatically created when the submodules are installed on the iPlex.

ASIIn configuration is explained in the following section. Encoder configuration is explained in the Encoder sections, Physical Input Ports: Encoders.

Configuring ASIInThe ASIIn Configuration page enables you to configure ASI input interfaces. Since this is a physical device, it is automatically created by the system for the ASI input submodules present in your chassis. To set it up, select Configuration from the menu. In the menu, you can find the ASIIn configuration page under either Ports or the MCM.

After completing the configuration, click Apply.

For information on using the buttons at the top of the screen, see Screen Naviga-tion Buttons on page 171.

Interface ASIIn I/O Description: Enter an arbitrary description string (a label) for this port. This has no influence on iPlex operation.

Channel Active: ASI input ports have two physical inputs, Input A and Input B. Use this control to select which one is active.

Enable Traffic Shaping: Check the box to enable or disable traffic shaping.

NOTEThe physical Network ATM port configuration and statistics can be found in Chapter 3, Using the Web Interface.

GI (General Instruments) refers toDigiCipher II (DCII): a proprietary

MPEG-2 based distributionsystem developed originally by

General Instruments prior to thecompletion of the DVB standard.Used by most cable channels in

North America, it has a majorpresence in cable head-ends and

is widely used in satellite turn-around applications via “Head-

end In The Sky” (HITS) systems.

174


.

Traffic ShapingBy default, the iPlex processes the transport packets from ASI inputs in batches. In some situations, this can cause excessive burstiness if the content from this ASI port is routed to a network output. This problem can be solved by enabling traffic shaping for the ASI input. The screenshot that follows shows the location of this control. This feature is recommended for the following situations:

• A low bit rate ASI Input (typically with a single program in it) routed to a network output port.

• An ASI Input that is fully routed (all programs) to a network output port.

This feature is not necessary in the following situations:

• When content from the ASI Input is routed to an ASI Output.

• When content from the ASI Input is routed to an ATMOutput (either ATMOut or UDPOutover ATM) and ATM traffic shaping is enabled.

• When there are multiple programs in the ASI Input, and each program is routed to anindividual network output port.

Transport Stream Enable Table Forwarding: Select the check box to enable table forwarding. By default, the iPlex detects, processes and forwards to the output any (P)SI table changes coming from the input. If this behavior is not desirable, clear the check box to disable it.

Input Stream Type: Select from the following: MPEG, DVB, ATSC, or GI. Your selection must match the actual incoming stream. This control selects the type of parsing that is performed on the input stream. The retrieved information is found in the Statistics screen for the port.

Enable SDT Parsing: Select for SDT parsing. This will give you channel names if the SDT is present.

Enable NIT Parsing: Select for NIT parsing. This will give you tuning informa-tion for the network if the NIT is present.

Enable CAT Parsing: Select for CAT parsing. This will give you the EMM PID and CA System ID if the CAT is present.

NOTEEnabling this feature will cause increased CPU utilization in the MCM and may result in an overall reduction of system capacity.

NOTESelecting DVB for Input Stream Type gives you two additional check boxes to enable SDT and NIT parsing.

175


ASIIn StatisticsTo view the statistics for the ASIIn select Statistics from the menu and then select Ports. This will display the Summary Port List. Click the ASIIn link to display a list of all ASIIn ports, then select a specific port.

Click the Reset Service button to refresh the page. For information on using the buttons at the top of the screen, see Screen Navigation Buttons on page 171.

Interface ASIIn Description: Shows the description that was entered (optional) upon port config-uration.

Channel Active: Shows the channel that is active, either Input A or Input B.

Packet Size: Shows the detected packet size, either 188 or 204-byte packets.

Enable Traffic Shaping: Indicates if Traffic Shaping is enabled or not.

Sync: Shows an active submodule (In Sync): “No Signal” means there may be a disconnection.

Firmware Version: Shows firmware version for the main processor.

Revision ID: Shows the revision ID for this board, range 0-255.

Device Errors Shows the number of errors as follows:

• Packet Length Errors

• Jitter Errors

• Loss of Sync Events

• Regain Sync Events

176


Transport Stream The Transport Stream section is always present for ASIIn port.

Transport Stream ID: Gives the MPEG Transport Stream Identifier number.

Enable Table Forwarding: Indicates if Table Forwarding is enabled or disabled

Input Stream Type: Gives the type of input Transport Stream (MPEG, DVB, ATSC, or GI).

Enable SDT Parsing: Shows SDT Parsing enabled, Yes or No (DVB only).

Enable NIT Parsing: Shows NIT Parsing enabled, Yes or No (DVB only).

If you enable NIT parsing, the following parameters display:

Network ID: Shows the Network ID.

Network Name: Shows the name of the Network.

Network Delivery Type: Shows the type of delivery: Cable, Satellite, and Terres-trial.

Satellite Delivery

If the delivery is by satellite, the following information will appear:

Frequency (GHz): Gives the RF feed frequency.

Orbital Position (Degrees): Gives the satellite orbital position in degrees.

West or East: Gives the satellite direction.

Polarization: Gives the signal polarization: Linear-Horizontal, Linear-Vertical, Circular-Left or Circular-Right.

Modulation: Gives the type of modulation: QPSK.

Symbol Rate (Msymbols/s): Gives the symbol rate in megasymbols per second.

FEC Inner: Gives the Inner Forward Error Correction rate: 1/2, 2/3, 3/4, 5/6, or 7/8.

Enable CAT Parsing: Shows CAT parsing enabled, Yes or No.

Cable Delivery If the delivery is by cable, the following information will appear:Frequency (MHz): Enter the RF feed frequency in megahertz.FEC Outer: Select the desired Outer Forward Error Correction rate: No outer FEC coding or RS (204/188).Modulation: Gives the type of modulation: 16, 32, 64, 128 or 256 QAM.

177


Symbol Rate (Msymbols/s): Enter the symbol rate in megasymbols per sec-ond.FEC Inner: Select the Inner Forward Error Correction rate: 1/2, 2/3, 3/4, 5/6, or 7/8.See DVB specification EN 300 468.

Selecting Terrestrial as the network delivery type displays the following parame-ters:

Terrestrial Delivery If the delivery is terrestrial, the following information will appear:

Center Frequency: Type center frequency: range is 10 to 42949672950.

Bandwidth (MHz): Select bandwidth in megahertz: 7 or 8.

Constellation: Shows selected constellation: Gigabit, 16-QAM, or 64-QAM.

Hierarchy: Shows selected hierarchy: Non-hierarchical, alpha = 1, alpha = 2, or alpha = 4.

HP Code Rate: Shows selected HP code rate: 1/2, 2/3, 3/4, 5/6, or 7/8.

LP Code Rate: Shows selected LP code rate: 1/2, 2/3, 3/4, 5/6, or 7/8.

Guard Interval: Shows selected guard interval: 1/32, 1/16, 1/8, or 1/4.

Transmission Mode: Shows transmission mode: 2k Mode, or 8k Mode.

Other Frequency Flag: Options are: No other frequency in use or One or more other frequency in use.

See DVB specification EN 300 468.

CAT Parameters If you enable CAT the additional fields display: CA System ID, EMM PID, and Private Data (if any indicated).

178


Physical Input Ports: EncodersThe iPlex has four encoder models available, and the screens that will display depend on which encoder is on the MCM:

• MPEG-2 Encoder Plus,

• MPEG-4 AVC Encoder

• MPEG-4 AVC Ultracompression HD Encoder

• MPEG-4 AVC Ultracompression SD Encoder

• MPEG-4 AVC Ultracompression Single-slot HD Encoder

• MPEG-4 AVC Ultracompression Single-slot SD EncoderA button labeled Audio under the Go button provides the audio configuration parameters.For a more detailed explanation of the difference in features and capabilities of the encoder cards, see the Hardware Specifications and Installation Guide.

Encoder Plus General Configuration and Statistics

Encoder PlusGeneral

Configuration

The Encoder Plus General Configuration page allows you to configure Encoder interfaces. Select Configuration from the menu. You can find the ENC configuration page under either Ports or the appropriate MCM blade.

PAL (Phase Alternating Line) Apopular European and Asian

color TV standard that wasdeveloped in Germany.

NTSC (National TV StandardsCommittee) A color TV standard

that was developed in the U.S.Administered by the FCC.

CBR (Constant Bit Rate) Astream with constant long term bit

rate. These streams may onlyvary within a very narrow range.

VBR (Variable Bit Rate) A streamwith varying short-term and longterm bit rate. The bit rate of the

stream can vary randomly withina well-defined range.

179


To configure either MPEG-1 Layer II or Dolby Digital (AC-3) audio parameters click the Go > Audio button. See the next section for details. After completing the configuration, click Apply. For information on using the buttons at the top of the screen, see Screen Navigation Buttons on page 171.

Interface ENC Description: Enter an arbitrary description string (a label). This has no influence on iPlex operation.

Encoder Started: Select check box to enable encoder operation.

Video Format: Select type of video format: PAL, NTSC, or NTSC without pedes-tal.

. Video Resolution: Select video resolution in NTSC and PAL from the following: 720x480(NTSC):576(PAL), 704x480(NTSC):576(PAL), 640x480(NTSC):576(PAL), 544x480(NTSC):576(PAL), 480x480(NTSC):576(PAL), 352x480(NTSC):576(PAL), 528x480(NTSC):576(PAL).

Encoding Method: Select encoding method as VBR, CBR (ES), or CBR (TS).

Variable Bit Rate (VBR): The Transport Stream (TS) will have a Variable Bit Rate (VBR). The bit rate of the TS will never exceed the maximum bit rate selected and it will fall to lower rates whenever possible, consistent with the selected video and audio quality settings and the complexity of the audio and video streams being encoded.Recommendation: This setting is recommended for higher bandwidth access networks (for example, FTTH) where busting to high rates is tolerable and desir-able for maximum video and audio quality but constant padding to the maximum rate would be unacceptably wasteful..

Constant Bit Rate:

• Constant Bit Rate – Elementary Streams (CBR-ES): The video Elementary Stream (ES)will have a Constant Bit Rate (CBR). The Transport Stream, of which the video ES is onecomponent, will be somewhat VBR when audio and other overhead is added.Recommendation: This setting is recommended for lower bandwidth access networks (forexample,. DSL). This setting seeks to constrain the Transport Stream bit rate to a tight range,while simultaneously minimizing network overhead.

• Constant Bit Rate – Transport Stream (CBR-TS): The Transport Stream (TS) will have aConstant Bit Rate (CBR).Recommendation: This setting is recommended for network operators who want tosimultaneously transmit the live stream and record it for later playback on a video server (asmost video servers require CBR Transport streams). The rate control is designed to maintain aconstant Transport Stream bit rate across the network including servers. CBR-TS does not useNull-packet padding to achieve the bit rate, because most video servers will discard the Null-packets.

TIP NTSC without pedestal is avariant of NTSC used primarily in

Japan. For U.S. sources, selectNSTC.

NOTEIf VBR is selected, a VBR Bit Rate section appears with the average bit rate and a peak bit rate parameters. If CBR is selected, it is only necessary to specify a bit rate.

180


Video Bit Rate (bps): Enter the bit rate in bits per second.

VBR Peak Bit Rate (bps): Shows up if Encoding Method is VBR. Enter the VBR Peak bit rate in bits per second.

Encoder Input Select: Select the encoder input as S-Video, composite channel-1, composite channel-2, or SDI (Digital Video). An additional option (Internal Test Pattern), is only supported on the Real-Time MPEG Encoder Plus module. If you select this on the RTME, you will receive an error.

If you select Internal Test Pattern, the encoder will produce just color bars regardless of whether or not the input is connected. This enables you to run the encoder without a video input and is useful for testing.

Service Information Enable Service Information: If you enable Service Information, you must con-figure the following boxes:

Service Name: Enter service name.

Service Provider Name: Enter service provider name.


Original Network ID: Enter original network identifier.

Teletext Support Teletext is available only in PAL Video Format. Select PAL then click Apply.

The iPlex will extract Teletext information from the incoming video signal (System B teletext, EBU, and Inverted Teletext are supported) and inject it in the bitstream as specified in ETSI EN 300 472.

To view VBI (Vertical Blanking Interval) support, click Go > VBI, see the illustra-tion that follows.

NOTEThe Sync LED will not flash, the image will appear distorted for anyresolution other than 720x480 or 720x576.

181


.

The Encoder Plus VBI Configuration window is displayed. Click the Add but-ton to enable processing for the selected line(s).

Teletext may be present in lines 7 to 22 and lines 320 to 335. The VBI Configura-tion window enables the selection of lines to be processed when extracting the teletext information. An “All Lines” selection is available. For each line, the system can be configured for the following processing alternatives:

• EBU (European Broadcasting Union) Teletext

• Inverted Teletext

• VPS (Video Programme System)

182


• WSS (Wide Screen Signalling)

Teletext extraction can be disabled for a specific line by selecting the correspond-ing checkbox for that line in the Delete column and then clicking the Delete but-ton.

Unlike US Closed-Captioning, which is injected in the video elementary stream, teletext is transmitted on its own PID, which is part of the program and is refer-enced in the PMT. The teletext PID defaults to 0x190, and can be configured in the Encoder Plus Advanced Configuration screen.

Encoder PlusGeneral Statistics

The Encoder General Statistics page provides encoder information to view the statistics for the Encoder. Select Statistics from the menu and select Ports. This will display the Summary Port List. Click the ENC link to display a list of all ENC ports, then select a specific port.

The general encoder parameters for statistics are identical to those of the configu-ration, except for the following parameters:

Encoder Firmware Version: Shows the firmware version number.

Encoder FPGA Version: Shows the FPGA version number (range: 0 - 255)

Video Input Connected: Shows if there is a video signal detected on the selected port, Yes or No.

183


Click the Reset Service button to refresh the information. Click the Audio but-ton to display the Encoder Plus Audio screen. Select the audio encoding method, either MPEG-1 Layer II or Dolby Digital (AC-3). Refresh refreshes the Program (or Stream) List. The Program (or Stream) Chart button generates a chart of the existing programs and streams on the Encoder. For information on using the but-tons at the top of the screen, see Screen Navigation Buttons on page 171.

184


ConfiguringEncoder Plus

MPEG-1 Layer IIAudio

The settings for configuration are listed and explained below. After completing the configuration settings, click Apply. Then click Mode > General to return to the Encoder Plus General Configuration screen.


Channel 1 or 2 active: Select the check box to activate channel 1 or 2.

Audio Input: Select the radio button to indicate the input: Input Cable, SDI, or Internal Test tone.

Audio Encoding Method: Select the radio button to indicate the encoding method: MPEG-1 Layer II or Dolby Digital (AC-3).

MPEG-1 Layer II Ch 1 Sample Rate (kHz): Select the current audio sampling rate as 44.1, 48, or 32 kilo hertz.

NOTEWhen both audio Channels are activated and the Input Cable is unbalanced or balanced, the audio Sample Rate for both channels must be set to the same value (44.1, 48, or 32 kHz).

Internal test tone is an internallygenerated test tone (1 kHz sine

wave for left channel 1 and 2 kHzsine wave for the right channel).

NOTEWhen selecting SDI, or if your Input Cable is AES, the audio encoder sample rate must match the incoming embedded audio sample rate. In most cases the SDI sample rate is 48 kHz.

185


Data Rate (kbps): Select the current audio data rate 32, 48, 56, 64, 80, 96, 112, 128, 160, 192, 224, 256, 320, or 384.

Audio Mode: Select the audio mode as: Stereo, Joint, Dual, or Mono.

Analog Audio Gain Enable Audio Booster: Select check box to enable audio booster. It provides +20 dB gain on left/right channels.

Left Channel Gain: Type a value for left channel gain.

Right Channel Gain: Type a value for right channel gain.

Embedded Audio Group: Select from the following audio groups: Group-1, Group-2, Group-3, or Group-4.

Embedded Audio Channel: Select either Stereo Pair 1 or Stereo Pair 2.

Encoder PlusMPEG-1 Layer IIAudio Statistics

The Encoder Audio Statistics page provides MPEG-1 Layer II audio encoder information. Select Statistics from the menu and select Ports. This will display the Summary Port List.

Click the ENC link to display a list of all ENC ports, then select a specific port to view.

NOTEThe Data Rate must be a valid setting for the Audio Mode selection. For example, the data rate of 32, 48, 56, and 80 are for Mono mode only.

NOTEBy default the Left and Right Channel Gain is set to 0dB forunbalanced inputs and 4 dB for balanced inputs. If you selectEnable Audio Booster, the level will jump to +20dB. When usingunbalanced inputs, the gain range is reduced to -96dB to 0.

CAUTIONAudio booster and gain control settings are very sensitive. If entered incorrectly, it may cause audio clipping as well as quality deteriora-tion.

186


The audio encoder parameters for statistics are identical to the configuration.

Click the Channel 2 button to switch to information for that channel (if not active, it will tell you so). VBI toggles to Encoder Plus VBI Statistics. For infor-mation on using the buttons at the top of the screen, see Screen Navigation Buttons on page 171.

187


ConfiguringEncoder PlusDolby DigitalAudio (AC-3)

The encoder plus can have two audio channels configured separately. Select the Channel 1 or Channel 2 tab. After completing the configuration, click Apply, and then click General to return to the Encoder Plus General Configuration page. See the License and Warranty section in the front of this user guide for Dolby Digital trademark licensing information.


NOTE A license key is required to enable Dolby Digital (AC-3) audio encoding. This key must be purchased from TANDBERG Television and is unique to each chassis. See Configuring Licenses on page 144.

188


Encoder PlusDolby Digital

Audio AC-3Configuration

Channel 1 or 2 active: Select the check box to activate channel 1 or 2

Audio Input: Select the radio button to indicate the input: Input Cable, SDI, or Internal Test Tone.

Audio Encoding Method: Select the radio button to indicate the encoding method: MPEG-1 Layer II or Dolby Digital AC-3.

Dolby Digital AudioService Config Ch 1

Sample Rate (kHz): Select the current audio sampling rate as 44.1, 48, or 32.Audio Coding Mode: Select the radio button to indicate coding as: 1/0: C or 2/0: L, R (2/0:L,R selection enables Dolby Surround Mode parameters)Data Rate 2_0 (kbps): Select the current audio data rate 96, 112, 128, 160, 192, 224, 256, 320, 384, 448, 512, 576, or 640. If you selected 1/0:C as the Audio Cod-ing Mode, you will have the additional data rates of 56, 64, and 80.Bitstream Mode: Select mode as: Complete Main, Music and Effects, Visually Impaired, Hearing Impaired, Dialogue, Commentary, Emergency, or Voice-over/Karaoke.Dialog Normalization (dB): Type a decibel value—Range -31dB to -1 dB

Dolby DigitalBitstream Info Ch 1

Dolby Surround Mode: Select Not Indicated, Not Surround Encoded, or Surround Encoded.Audio Production Info Exists: Select radio button to enable or disable (Off or On). (Selecting On enables Mix Level and Room Type parameters) Mix Level (dB): Enter the mix level value in decibel—Range 80 dB to 111dBRoom Type: Select Not Indicated, Small Room, or Large RoomCopyright: Select radio button to enable or disable (Off or On).Original Bitstream: Select radio button to enable or disable (Off or On).

Dolby Digital PCMPreprocessing Ch 1

Digital De-emphasis: Select Auto, On, or OffDC High-Pass Filter: Select radio button to enable or disable (Off or On).Bandwidth Low-Pass Filter: Select radio button to enable or disable (Off or On).RF Overmodulation Protection: Select radio button to enable or disable (Off or On).Dynamic Range Profile: Select None, Film Standard, Film Light, Music Stan-dard, Music Light, or Speech.Compression Profile: Select None, Film Standard, Film Light, Music Standard, Music Light, or Speech.

NOTEBoth audio channels will automatically have the same sample rate. Changing the sample rate for one audio channel will result in the same sample rate being applied to the other audio channel.




189


Analog Audio Gain Enable Audio Booster: Select check box to enable audio booster. It provides +20 dB gain on left/right channels.

Left Channel Gain: Type a value for left channel gain.

Right Channel Gain: Type a value for right channel gain.

Embedded Audio Group: Select from the following audio groups: Group-1, Group-2, Group-3, or Group-4.Embedded Audio Channel: Select either Stereo Pair 1 or Stereo Pair 2.

Encoder PlusDolby Digital (AC-

3) AudioStatistics

The Encoder Audio Statistics page provides dolby audio encoder information to view the statistics for the Encoder. Select Statistics from the menu, then select Ports. This will display the Summary Port List. Click the ENC link to display a list of all ENC ports, then select a specific port to view. The audio encoder param-eters for statistics are identical to the configuration, except that the boot loader and audio encoder firmware versions are also displayed.

NOTEBy default the Left and Right Channel Gain is set to 0dB forunbalanced inputs and 4 dB for balanced inputs. If you selectEnable Audio Booster, the level will jump to +20dB. When usingunbalanced inputs the gain range is reduced to -96dB to 0.

CAUTIONAudio booster and gain control settings are very sensitive. If entered incorrectly, it may cause audio clipping as well as quality deteriora-tion.

190


The VBI button displays VBI data. Channel 2 switches you to data for that chan-nel. For more information on using the buttons at the top of the screen, see Screen Navigation Buttons on page 171.

Encoder Plus Advanced Configuration and Statistics

EncoderAdvanced

Configuration

The Advanced parameters for the Encoder Plus are explained here. After complet-ing the configuration, click Apply. Then click Go > General to return to the Gen-eral Configuration page. Click Set Default to return to default settings.

For information on using the buttons at the top of the screen, see Screen Naviga-tion Buttons on page 171.The parameters are as follows.GOP Size: Type value for Group of Pictures (range is 6 to 30).

Enable Video AGC: Select check box

Analog Video PreProcessing

Luminance Filter Control: Select from the following: Resolution Enhancement Filter 1.6, 2.3, 3.0, 4.1, 5.1, 6.8, or 8.0 dB; Plain Response; or Low Pass Filter 2, 3, 4, 8, 14 dB.Chrominance Gain Control: Type a value (0-127) where ‘0’ is auto modeBrightness Control: Type a value (0-255).Contrast Control: Type a value (0-127).Chrominance Saturation: Type a value (0-127).Chrominance Hue: Type a value (0-360).

NOTE Normally, you should leave Video AGC enable. However, if the input signal is noisy, the luminance may fluctuate. In this case, dis-able Video AGC and set the gain manually. Normally, you should leave Video AGC enable. However, if the input signal is noisy, the luminance may fluctuate. In this case, disable Video AGC and set the gain manually.

191


Scaler PrefilterSettings

Prefilter Luminance Control: Select from the following values: Luminance FIR Bypassed, FIR Filter Low, FIR Filter Medium, or FIR Filter High.Prefilter Chrominance Control: Select from the following values: Luminance FIR Bypassed, FIR Filter Low, FIR Filter Medium, or FIR Filter High.

192


Prescaler Brightness Gain: Type a value (0-255).Prescaler Contrast Gain: Type a value (0-255).Prescaler Saturation Gain: Type a value (0-255).Spatial Filter Luminance Type: Select from the following values: Disabled, 1-D Horizontal Only, 1-D Vertical Only, 2-D Horizontal/Vertical Separable, or 2-D Symmetric No Separation.Spatial Filter Chrominance Type: Select from the following values: Disable or 1-D Horizontal.Spatial Filter Auto Mode: Select to enable.Temporal Filter Auto Mode: Select to enable.Median Filter Type: Select from the following values: Disabled, Horizontal, Ver-tical, Horizontal/Vertical, or Diagonal.Luminance High Threshold: Type a value between 0 and 255 for maximum luminosity (brightness).Luminance Low Threshold: Type a value between 0 and 255 for minimum lumi-nosity.Chrominance High Threshold: Type a value between 0 and 255 for maximum chromaticity (color).Chrominance Low Threshold: Enter a value between 0 and 255 for minimum chromaticity.

Encoder Audio PID: Enter the audio PID number as a hexadecimal.Encoder Video PID: Enter the video PID number as a hexadecimal.

Encoder PCR PID: Enter the PCR PID in hexadecimal (enter “1FFF” if the pro-gram has no PCR).

Encoder PMT PID: Enter the desired PMT PID in hexadecimal. Multiple pro-grams can share the same PMT, or the selected PID must be available.Encoder Program Number: Enter the program number.

FIR (Finite Impulse Response) Adigital filter technique applied to

process video images.

NOTEThese options control the encoder pre-processing filters. Their default values are the best selection for most content. Please con-tact TANDBERG Television Customer Support if you need help in fine-tuning the encoder pre-processing for specific content.

NOTEIf you create a program on an ASI Output and specify a PID here that does not contain a valid PCR, none of the elements of this pro-gram will be transmitted. The iPlex must see the PCRs to properly schedule the PIDs.

193


Enable Additional PCR: Select this checkbox to enable an additional PCR. The screen will refresh with an additional line for Additional PCR PID. The refreshed screen will have the two lines added, as in the diagram below.

Additional PCR PID: Enter the PID for the additional PCR. This line will only be displayed if Enable Additional PCR checkbox is selected.

Encoder Audio Type: Select the MPEG1 Audio or MPEG2 Audio radio but-ton.

Audio Language Code: Audio ISO 639-2 language code (Ch. 1); 0 to 3 charac-ters.Closed Captioning: Select from the following values: None, ATSC Format, Custom Format (DiviCom), SCTE 20 Format, SCTE 20 Gl Format, SCTE 21 Format, SCTE 20 and 21 Format, SCTE 20 Gl and 21 Format.If you turn Closed Captioning on, the encoder will extract closed-captioning from the incoming video signal, if present, and insert it into the user-data field of the video bitstream at the frame level.The two available formats are:

• ATSC Format: This follows the ATSC A/53B and EIA-708 standards for closed-captions.

• Custom Format: This is a non-standard format used in DiviCom encoders, which is widelysupported in industry.

Aspect Ratio: Click a radio button to select 4:3 or 16:9 Aspect Ratio. The aspect ratio of an image is its width divided by its height. Two common videographic aspect ratios are 4:3, universal for standard-definition video formats, and 16:9, uni-versal to high-definition television and European digital television.

Encoder AdvancedSettings

This section provides more detailed explanation of the Encoder Advanced param-eters.

GOP SizeThis parameter specifies the number of frames (pictures) in a GOP (Group of Pic-tures). A typical GOP structure starts with an I-frame and ends with a B-frame with a frame sequence like IBBPBBPBBPBBPBB. A bigger GOP size in slow

NOTEPrograms only have one PCR. Thus, an additional PCR will not be referenced in the PMT.

NOTEOnly US Closed-Captioning (EIA-608) is supported on the encoder input.

194


motion pictures may give better quality at lower bit rates. This value increments by three with a range of 6 to 30 frames; the default is 15.

Analog Decoder Preprocessing ControlThese parameters provide complete control over video processing for input analog video using composite and Y/C input channels.

Luminance Filter Control

This is the sharpness control and allows you to select the correct luminance filter characteristics. The encoder supports a variety of filters to provide the most flexi-bility to get the best image sharpness at different frequency ranges. There are three basic types of filters:

• Luminance Peaking Filter: These filters allow the resolution enhancements peaking at 4.1MHz. You can choose from the following gain levels: 8.0/6.8/5.1/4.1/3.0/2.3/1.6 dB.

• Plain Response: Select this option disable any luminance gain/reduction.

• Low Pass Filter: The low pass filters can reduce the luminance for the range of frequencies.Five filters reduce luminance with maximum reduction at 4.1 MHz. The supported reductionlevels are 2.0/3.0/4.0/8.0/14.0 dB.

Chrominance Gain ControlYou can control the gain on the color component of analog CVBS or Y/C video. The range is 0-63 (0.5 dB to 7.5 dB) on logarithmic scale where 36 represents the gain of 1.125 dB and 63 represents 7.5 dB gain. Zero (0) is the default and sets the analog decoder chip to automatically control the gain.

Brightness ControlThe range of 0-255 represents dark to complete brightness. The resolution of brightness changes with respect to the full luminance range. The default is ITU-601/656 recommended value of 128.

Contrast ControlThis parameter controls the luminance contrast gain for input analog video. The value multiplied by the luminance value provides contrast adjustment. Contrast is the luminance gain. The provided range is 0-127 where:

• 0 represents no-luminance gain.

• 63 represents gain of 1.0 dB.

• 67 default- ITU-601/656 recommended value of 1.063 dB.

• 127 represents maximum gain of 1.984 dB.

Y/C: A shorthand term used forluminance (Y) and chrominance

(C). Also used to describe S-Video, which implies the

separation of the luminance andchrominance parts of a video.

CVBS (Composite VideoBlanking Sync): This video signal

has the color, luminance andsynchronization information all

combined into one.

dB: Decibel, a logarithmic unitused to describe a ratio.

195


Chrominance Saturation

Chrominance saturation ranges from 0 to 1.984 dB with default at 1 (ITU-601/656). The saturation is the Chrominance (U) and Chrominance (V) gain. You can use this value to add a gain adjustment to the U and V components of the input video signal. Both U and V components adjust by the same amounts.

Chrominance HueChrominance Hue ranges from 0-360 and internally maps to -180 to +178.6 with the default set to 0. The hue adjustment involves the addition of a number, in two’s complement format, to the demodulating sub-carrier phase.

Scaler Prefilter Controls

These parameters provide complete control over the processing required for downscale of video input. You can adjust the settings for both analog video input and digital video input (SDI).

The prescaling function inside the encoder consists of an FIR (Finite Impulse Response) anti-alias filter stage and an integer prescaler, which creates an adaptive prescale dependent low-pass filter to balance sharpness and aliasing effects. The FIR prefilter stage implements different low-pass characteristics to reduce alias for downscale in the range of 1 to 1 ½.

Prefilter Luminance ControlThis parameter controls the low-pass FIR filter characteristics for luminance com-ponent for anti-aliasing purposes. There are four different characteristics to choose from:

• Bypass: To completely bypass the FIR filter.

• Low: For a smooth response over the spectrum. This filter provides 12 dB reduction at 4.75MHz.

• Medium: This filter provides 12 dB reduction at 3.5 MHz.

• High: This filter provides 12 dB reduction at 2.75 MHz.

Prefilter Chrominance ControlThis parameter controls the low-pass FIR filter characteristics for the chrominance component for anti-aliasing purposes. There are four different characteristics to choose from:

• Bypass: To completely bypass the FIR filter.

• Low: For a smooth response over the spectrum. This filter provides 12 dB reduction at 2.25MHz.

• Medium: This filter provides 12 dB reduction at 1.5 MHz.

• High: This filter provides 12 dB reduction at 1.25 MHz.

Chrominance (U): A colordifference signal constructed bysubtracting the blue from the Y

(luminance).

Chrominance (V): A colordifference signal constructed by

subtracting the red from the Y(luminance).

SDI (Serial Digital Interface):Used to transport digital

component video.

196


Prescaler Brightness GainThis parameter controls luminance brightness of input digital video or analog video before scaling. The range of 0-255 represents dark to complete brightness. The resolution of brightness changes with respect to the full luminance range. The default is the ITU-601/656 recommended value of 128.

Prescaler Contrast GainThis parameter controls the luminance contrast gain factor for input digital video or analog video before scaling. The value you specify here, divided by 64 gives the multiplier gain factor for the output contrast. The provided range is 0-127.

Prescaler Saturation GainThis parameter controls the chrominance saturation gain factor for input of digital video or analog video before scaling. The value you specify here, divided by 64 gives the multiplier gain factor for the output saturation value. The provided range is 0-127.

Noise ReductionFilters

There is a built-in noise reduction engine, just before the compression step, used for analog as well as digital video inputs. These noise reduction filters can greatly improve the efficiency of compression as they can utilize the bandwidth for higher quality rather than encoding undesired noise.

Spatial Linear FilterThis filter can be either in static or dynamic mode. You can set the filter into static mode to directly control the filter level. As well, you can set the filter to one dimensional or bi-directional for both the luma and chroma components sepa-rately.

Spatial filter analyzes the surrounding picture content and can remove impulse (or speckle noise) within content.

Spatial Median FilterThis filter selects a median value of the luma and chroma separately to replace the original value. The search window can be horizontal, vertical, both horizontal and vertical, or diagonal. You can set values to both luma and chroma separately.

FilterThis filter can also be static or dynamic. You can set this to static mode to control the filter level directly. The temporal noise filters exploit the temporal redundancy of progressive video frames and the image is effectively averaged across multiple frames such that the noise is averaged out. Temporal filtering can be especially effective for pictures, which have little motion.

197


Spatial Filter Auto ModeThe default setting for spatial linear filter is dynamic (automatic). To control the filter level statically, you should deselect this box.

Spatial Filter LevelOnce you change the spatial filter mode to static (non-automatic) this field will H.264appear, and you should set the filter level between 0-15.

Temporal Filter Auto ModeThe default setting for temporal filter is dynamic (automatic). To control the filter level statically, you should deselect this box.

Temporal Filter LevelOnce, you change the temporal filter mode to static (non-automatic), this field will appear, and you should set the filter level between 0-31.

Median Filter TypeThis parameter controls the spatial median filter settings. You can select one of the following options:

• Disabled: Spatial median filter disabled.

• Horizontal: Search window is horizontal.

• Vertical: Search window is vertical.

• Horizontal and Vertical: Search window is both horizontal and vertical.

• Diagonal: Search window is diagonal.

High and LowThreshold Settings

The values set for the high and low fields listed below work in conjunction with each other. For example, a high setting of 150 enables 150-255 and a low setting of 100 enables 0-100 therefore the values 100-150 are filtered out.

Luminance High ThresholdThis controls the threshold above which median filter enables luminance. This will range between 0-255 with default to 0.

Luminance Low ThresholdThis controls the threshold below which median filter enables luminance. This will range between 0-255 with default to 255.

Chrominance High ThresholdThis controls the threshold above which median filter enables chrominance. This will range between 0-255 with default to 0.

198


Chrominance Low ThresholdThis controls the threshold below which median filter enables chrominance. This will range between 0-255 with default to 255.

Encoder Audio PIDThis is the PID used to carry the audio stream for the encoded program.

Encoder Video PIDThis is the PID used to carry the video stream for the encoded program.

Encoder PCR PIDThis is the PID used to carry PCR information for the encoded program.

Encoder PMT PIDThis is the PID used to carry the PMT for the encoded program.

Encoder Program NumberThis is the program number that identifies the encoded program.

Encoder Audio TypeThis is the MPEG audio stream type (either MPEG-1 or MPEG-2) indicated in the PMT for the audio stream.

NOTEThe real-time MPEG encoder Plus supports 2 audio channels. There will be up to 2 sets of Audio PIDs and Audio Type parameters that appear. However, the Audio Type parameters will not appear if Dolby Digital (AC-3) is selected; this parameter only applies to MPEG-1 Layer II audio.

199


EncoderAdvancedStatistics

The encoder advanced statistical parameters are identical to the configuration parameters for the Encoder Plus.


MPEG-4 AVC Encoder General Configura-tion and Statistics

MPEG-4 AVCEncoder General

Configuration

The MPEG-4 AVC Encoder General Configuration page enables you to con-figure this encoder interfaces. (AVC is Advanced Video Coding) This port is a

200


physical device. Select Configuration from the menu. You can find the ADVEnc item under either Ports or the MCM blade.

When you open the MPEG-4 AVC Encoder port for the first time, you will see a default screen (below). To view the parameters, for licensing purposes, you must select a Video Codec Type and click Apply.

NOTEYou can check whether you have the correct video codec license inStatistics > SCM > License. Confirm that you have the H.264License Key.IMPORTANT To make all viewable parameters available, select the Video Codec Type H.264.

201


To configure audio parameters, click the Go > Audio button at the top of the screen. See the following sections for details. After completing the configuration, click Apply. For more information on using the buttons at the top of the screen, see Screen Navigation Buttons on page 171.

Description: Enter an arbitrary description string. Optional field, has no influence on iPlex operation.

Video Codec Type: The listed codec type (None, H.264, H.264 PIP, or H.264 MOBILE) must be selected and enabled (see next parameter), at which point a codec license is activated and the parameters are viewable.

Advanced Encoder Started: Select check box to enable MPEG-4 AVC Encoder operation.

Video Format: Select type of video format: NTSC, PAL, or NTSC Without Ped-estal.

Video Resolution: Select video resolution in NTSC and PAL from the following: 720x480(NTSC):576(PAL), 704x480(NTSC):576(PAL), 544x480(NTSC):576(PAL), 480x480(NTSC):576(PAL), 352x480(NTSC):576(PAL).

Video Bit Rate (bps): Enter the bit rate in bits per second for the encoded stream (range 30,000 to 4,000,000 bps).

Video Input: Select the input as S-Video, Composite Channel-1, Composite Channel-2, SDI (Digital Video) or Internal Test Pattern.

Enable Service Information: If you select to Enable Service, you must config-ure the following parameters:

Service Name: Enter service name.

Service Provider Name: Enter service provider name.


Original Network ID: Enter original network identifier.

Transport Stream ID: Transport stream ID is a unique identifier of a TS within an original network. (Range 1 - 65535).

NOTEMPEG-4 AVC Encoder (aka Advanced Encoder) Started has to beselected and the configuration saved by clicking Apply for theFirmware Version to display in the Statistics screen.

NOTEFor the PAL video format with video codec types H.264 or H.264PIP, the VBI support is available.

202


VBI Support VBI is supported if Video Format field is set to PAL.

.

VBI Configuration To set VBI support, click the VBI navigation button, and an MPEG-4 AVC Encoder VBI Configuration window opens.

In the VBI configuration window you can set the following VBI interface for MPEG-4 AVC encoder:

Lines: You can select lines 7 to 23 and 320 to 336 to be processed when extracting the teletext information. An All Lines selection is also available.

VBI (Vertical BlankingInterval) is the part of atelevision transmission

signal that is blanked or leftclear of viewable content to

allow time for the TV’selectron gun to move from

the bottom to the top ofthe screen as it scans

images. The blank area isnow being used to

broadcast closed captionand HTML-formatted

information.

203


Standard: The iPlex will extract Teletext information from the incoming video signal. For each line, the system can be configured for the following processing alternatives:

• None

• EBU Teletext

• EBU Teletext Subtitle

ADD: click the Add button to enable processing for the selected line(s). For exam-ple, you added EBU Teletext to Line 8. When you click Apply, MPEG-4 AVC Encoder VBI Configuration page re-opens listing all lines where the selected stan-dard Teletext has been added.

Teletext extraction can be disabled for a specific line by selecting the correspond-ing checkbox for that line in the Delete column and then clicking the Delete but-ton. You can delete Line 8 entry by checking the box and clicking Delete under the box.

Unlike US Closed-Captioning, which is injected in the video elementary stream, teletext is transmitted on its own PID, which is part of the program and is refer-enced in the PMT. The teletext PID defaults to 0x190, and can be configured in the Encoder Plus Advanced Configuration screen.

VBI Statistics The statistics window corresponding to the example above is:

MPEG-4 AVCEncoder General

Statistics

The MPEG-4 AVC Encoder General Statistics page provides encoder informa-tion to view the statistics for the MPEG-4 AVC Encoder. Select Statistics from the menu and select Ports. This will display the Summary Port List. Click the ADVEnc link to display a list of all ADVEnc ports, then select a specific port.

The general MPEG-4 AVC Encoder parameters for statistics are identical to the configuration, except for the following two parameters:

Adv Encoder Firmware Version: Shows the firmware version.

NOTEThe Adv Encoder Firmware Version only displays if the checkbox for Advanced Encoder Started has been selected and the configu-ration applied.

204


Video Input Connected: Shows if there is a video signal detected on the selected port, Yes or No.

Click the Reset Service button to refresh the information. Click GO > Audio to display the MPEG-4 AVC Encoder Audio Channel 1 screen. Refresh refreshes the Program (or Stream) List. For information on using the buttons at the top of the screen, see Screen Navigation Buttons on page 171.

If Video Format is set to PAL, the MPEG-4 AVC Encoder General Statistics page includes a Go > VBI navigation button.

205


Audio Channel 1Configuration

The settings for configuration are listed and explained below. After completing the configuration settings, click Apply. Click Go > General to return to the MPEG-4 AVC Encoder General Configuration screen.


Enable Audio Channel 1: Check the box to enable or disable.

TIP When Input Cable is selected,the Audio Analog Gain parameter is

active. When SDI is selected, theparameter Embedded Audio

Channel is active.

Audio Source: Select the radio button to indicate the input: Input Cable (default), or SDI. Input Cable supports Balanced, Unbalanced, and AES/EBU. SDI is for embedded audio on SDI.

Audio Codec Type: Select from the drop-down list: AAC, MPEG-1, HE-AAC, HE-AAC-V2, or AAC-LATM.

Audio Sample Rate (kHz): Select the current audio sampling rate as 44.1, 48, or 32 kilo hertz.



NOTEBoth audio channels will automatically have the same sample rate. Changing the sample rate for one audio channel will result in the same sample rate being applied to the other audio channel.

SDI (Serial Digital Interface):Used to transport digital

component video.


206


Audio Output Sample Rate (kHz): Select the current audio output sample rate 24, 32, or 48.

Audio Output Mode: Select the audio mode as: Stereo, Joint Stereo, or Mono.

AAC (or MPEG) Audio Bit Rate (kbps): Select the value from the drop-down list.

Analog Audio Gain Enable Audio Booster: Select to enable or unselect to disable. This function is only valid if the audio cable is the balanced or unbalanced type. If the cable is AES, this function is not available.

Left Channel Gain: Enter a gain level in dB; the range is (-96) to 0 dB for unbal-anced audio, and (-96) to 12 dB for balanced audio. This function is only valid if the audio cable is balanced or unbalanced type. If the cable is AES, this function is not available.

Right Channel Gain: Enter a gain level in dB; the range is (-96) to 0 dB for unbalanced audio, and (-96) to 12 dB for balanced audio. This function is only valid if the audio cable is balanced or unbalanced type.

Channel 2Configuration

Click the button for Channel 2. When the screen opens, select the Enable Audio Channel 2 checkbox. The MPEG-4 AVC Encoder Audio Channel 2 Configu-ration screen opens with all available parameters.

Channel 1Statistics

The MPEG-4 AVC Encoder Audio Statistics page provides audio encoder information. Select Statistics from the menu and select Ports. This will display the Summary Port List. Click the ADVEnc link to display a list of all ADVEnc ports, then select a specific port to view.

NOTEThis bit rate must be a valid setting for the MPEG or AAC Codec Type and Audio Mode selection. For example, for MPEG, the valid audio rates are 64 and 96-384 for Stereo, Joint, and dual modes.

NOTEIf the cable is AES, this function is not available.

NOTEChannel 2 has the same parameters as Channel 1.

207


The MPEG-4 AVC Encoder audio statistics parameters are identical to the config-uration parameters, including audio codec type (AAC).

Channel 2Statistics

To view MPEG-4 AVC Encoder Audio Channel 2 Statistics, you have to already have enabled Channel 2 during configuration. The parameters for Channel 2 are the same as for Channel 1.

MPEG-4 AVC Encoder Advanced Configu-ration and Statistics

MPEG-4 AVCEncoder

AdvancedConfiguration

These advanced parameters are specific to the MPEG-4 AVC Encoder. After completing the configuration, click Apply.. Click Go > General to return to the MPEG-4 AVC Encoder General Configuration page. Click Set Default to return to default settings.The screenshot that follows shows configuration for NTSC Format that supports Closed Captioning. The advanced configuration for PAL Format is different from the NTSC only in that it shows the VBI navigation button (same as in the general configuration), while Closed Captioning field does not show up in PAL.For information on using the buttons at the top of the screen, see Screen Navigation Buttons on page 171.

Interface ADVEnc GOP Size: Type the value for Group of Pictures, which is the number of frames between two I-Frames (range is 1 to 500); default is 60 for NTSC, 50 for PAL.Enable CABAC: Select Yes to enable or No to disable. CABAC (Context-based Adaptive Binary Arithmetic Coding) is an arithmetic coding system used to encode and decode H.264 syntax elements.Enable De-blocking: Deselect to disable the de-blocking filter.Reference Frames: Enter the number of reference frames; range 1 to 5.Bidirectional VOPs: Enter the number of bidirectional VOPs (Video Object Phases); range 0 to 2.

AAC Advanced Audio Coding is awideband audio coding algorithm

that exploits two primary codingstrategies to dramatically reduce

the amount of data needed toconvey high-quality digital audio.

208


VOD Mode: Select to enable the I frame for VOD. VOD mode supports an operation with VOD servers. Some servers, such as the Alcatel OVS, for indexing purposes, require full I-Frames. This mode supports it. If you select this option, the bitstream will have full I-Frames. TANDBERG Television does not recommend using this mode unless it is absolutely required by the video server.

209


Enable Safe Area Blanking: Select to enable. The safe area blanking function is performed on the uncompressed video data before it enters the encoder. When enabled, the safe area blanking causes all video samples outside of the safe action area to be forced to black level.

Enable Half Frame Rate: Check the box to enable or disable half frame rate.

Video Preprocessing The spatial filter employs a non-linear filtering technique and conditions the video signal before it is encoded. This allows the video encoder to more effi-ciently code the overall picture by selectively reducing the entropy of the video signal before encoding it.

Enable Spatial Filter: Check the box to enable or disable the spatial filter. The spatial filter is turned on by default for your use in the following circumstances:

• The video encoder is being used in low bit rate applications.

• The incoming video signal is especially noisy.

This type of filter is not only useful for its noise reduction properties, but also for its ability to improve the compression quality in generalized content while mini-mizing the impact on subjective quality. This improvement is especially true in comparison with conventional spatial filtering techniques (such as median, Gauss-ian).

A side effect of the filter is that it will remove some of the detail in the picture. This loss of detail will appear as a flattening or softening in certain areas of the image. So using the filter is a trade-off between loss of image detail, improved compression efficiency, noise reduction properties, and improved quality and com-pression ratio for noisy input signals.

Because the noise has created a lot of unnecessary entropy information in the video for the encoder to handle, the optimal solution is: in addition to noise reduc-tion, the detail loss due to noise filtering by the spatial filter will be no worse than the loss of picture detail due to the inherent distortion of the encoder so that the effect of using the spatial filter on system performance will be negligible.

Spatial FilterParameters

Strength: Set the spatial filter strength; range: 1 - 128; default: 6. When tuning the filter, use the following procedure:

Leave the passes value at 3 (see below). Do not change that value unless directed by TANDBERG Television.

The strength value controls the trade-off between improved compression effi-ciency and loss of detail in the image. The higher the strength value, the more fil-tering is achieved with a corresponding loss of detail. The best value will be found empirically and subjectively by adjusting the filter and then looking at the result. TANDBERG Television recommends that you start at around 4 and slowly increase the value until you achieve the desired quality. In most cases, the best value will be somewhere between 4 and 12; but overall, this conclusion depends on the video resolution and target bit rate.

Passes: Set the spatial filter number of passes; range: 1 - 3 (default: 3; leave at default unless directed by TANDBERG Television).

210


Luminance Filter: Select the value for the luminance filter. The luminance response may either be rolled-off or boosted in four steps from -1dB through -5dB and from +1dB through +5dB as measured near the high end of the fre-quency range. By default, a flat frequency response is provided. This filter may be used alone or in conjunction with other preprocessing filters.The luminance enhancement function provides a linear filtering process that permits an adjustment to the luminance frequency response. It is performed on the uncompressed video samples prior to encoding. Reduction of high fre-quency components generally improves encoding efficiency but at the expense of some loss in image detail. The boost settings may be used to restore high frequency components lost in analog video interfaces or during transmission.

Analog VideoPreprocessing

Types of analog video signals:

• Y/C: A shorthand term used for luminance (Y) and chrominance (C). Also used to describeS-Video, which implies the separation of the luminance and chrominance parts of a video.

• CVBS (Composite Video Blanking Sync): This video signal has the color, luminance andsynchronization information all combined into one.

• dB: Decibel, a logarithmic unit used to describe a ratio.

Enable Video AGC: Select the check box to enable automatic video gain settings, clear the check box to manually set gain using the Video CVBS Gain function.

TS PID Assignments Video PID: Enter the video PID number as a hexadecimal. (Range 0x20 to 0x1FFE), default is 0x22C.

PCR PID: Enter the PCR PID in hexadecimal. (Range 0x20 to 0x1FFE), default is 0x22C.

PMT PID: Enter the desired PMT PID in hexadecimal. Multiple programs can share the same PMT, or the selected PID must be available. (Range 0x20 to 0x1FFE), default is 0x20.

NOTEEnable Video AGC is only a valid option if the video input is not SDI.

NOTEIf you create a program on an ASI Output and specify a PID here that does not contain a valid PCR, none of the elements of this pro-gram will be transmitted. The iPlex must see the PCRs to properly schedule the PIDs.

211


Program Number: Enter the program number; range is 1 to 65535.

Teletext PID: Enter the Teletext PID number in a hexadecimal format; range is 0x20 to 0x1FFE, default is 0x290.Audio PID Channel 1: Enter the audio PID number as a hexadecimal; range is 0x20 to 0x1FFE; default is 0x22D.Audio PID Channel 2: Enter the audio PID number as a hexadecimal; range 0x20 to 0x1FFE; default is 0x22E.Audio Language Code Channel 1: Enter Audio ISO 639-2 language code for Channel 1; 0 to 3 characters.Audio Language Code Channel 2: Enter Audio ISO 639-2 language code for Channel 2; 0 to 3 characters.Teletext Language Code: Enter Teletext ISO 639-2 language code; 0 to 3 char-acters.Closed Captioning: Click a radio button to select Closed Captioning format from the following values: None, or ATSC.If you turn Closed Captioning on, the encoder will extract closed-captioning from the incoming video signal, if present, and insert it into the user-data field of the video bitstream at the frame level.The ATSC Format follows the ATSC A/53B and EIA-708 standards for closed-captions.

H264 Encode Level: Select from the drop-down list the value of the H.264 encode level.H264 Encode Profile: Select from the drop-down list: Main, Baseline or Extended.

PAL Format The MPEG-4 AVC Encoder Advanced Configuration in PAL format supports VBI (see details for VBI support in VBI Configuration on page 203) and Teletext. The page is the same as the one for NTSC, except for Closed Captioning is not supported in this format.

NOTEPrograms only have one PCR. Thus, an additional PCR will not be referenced in the PMT.

NOTEOnly US Closed-Captioning (EIA-608) is supported on the encoder input.

212


MPEG-4 AVCEncoder

AdvancedStatistics

The MPEG-4 AVC Encoder parameters for statistics are identical to those for configuration.


PAL Format The MPEG-4 AVC Encoder Advanced Statistics in PAL format supports VBI (see details for VBI support in VBI Statistics on page 204). The page is the same as the one for NTSC, except for the Closed Captioning is not supported in this for-mat.

213


MPEG-4 AVC Ultracompression HD Encoder (AVCEnc HD) General Configura-tion and Statistics

Overview MPEG-4 AVC Ultracompression Encoder is capable to compress video more effectively than other encoders and to provide more flexibility for application to a wider variety of network environments. This is a dual-slot encoder.

The MPEG-4 AVC Ultracompression encoder offers two factory-installed input interface options:

• HD-SDI Interface: this interface only supports digital uncompressed video. It can beconfigured to accept either HD-SDI or SD-SDI inputs. See more, HD Encoder on page30.

• SD Interface: this interface only supports standard definition video signals, both analog(composite and s-video) and digital (SD-SDI). See more, SD Encoder on page 31.

Both interfaces support embedded audio in the digital interface, as well as analog balanced or unbalanced audio. They also support digital AES audio.

AVCEnc is a logical name of the MPEG-4 AVC Ultracompression Encoder, HD or SD.

AVCEnc HDGeneral

Configuration

The MPEG-4 AVC Ultracompression Encoder General Configuration page enables you to configure the AVC Encoder interfaces. Select Configuration from the menu. You can find a list of these encoders under either Ports or the appropri-ate MCM blade.


Select an AVCEnc you need to configure.

214


Click Apply when finished. For information on using the buttons at the top of the screen, see Screen Navigation Buttons on page 171.

The parameter fields are as follows.

Description: Enter a description or label for this encoder, 0 to 79 characters (optional).

Video Source: Select from the drop-down list an HD input: Off, HD-SDI, Color Bars, Black, or SD-SDI.

HD-SDI VideoSource

HD Input Format: This parameter shows up as HD Input Format if Video Source selected is Off, HD-SDI, Color Bars, or Black. Select from the drop-down list a video input format: the 1080i number of lines over 25 or 29.97 FrameRates correspond to the HD (high definition).

OP Video Loss: Output Video Loss options depend whether the cable is con-nected or not. Select from the drop-down list the type of an output video loss: Freeze Frame (the last frame is repeated), Black, or Bars (color bars).

Clarus Noise Reduction: This feature is available if it is provided under the license. Select from the drop-down list: Off (if you choose not to use this feature), or Adaptive 1 through Adaptive 4, or Fixed 1 through Fixed 3.

Clarus Deblocking: Check the box to enable or disable Clarus deblocking filter.

215


Clarus Input Deblocking Filter

This is an input deblocking filter that operates on previously encoded data. It automatically detects macroblocks and attempts to clean up the edges.

Resolution 1080: Select from the drop-down list a value of the video resolutions for the 1080i input video (HD): 960, 1280, 1440 04 1920 by 1080 HD resolution.

Mode: Select from a drop-down list a bit rate mode for the video encoder: a Stan-dard (Max 3.0 s), Low Delay (Max 1.5 s), Mega Low Delay (0.75 s), or Seamless Variable Delay.

Mega Low Delay mode

This delay mode uses an even shorter delay and smaller decoder buffer size thaneither the Standard or Low Delay modes, which helps shorten channel changetime, but at the expense of reducing video quality. In this mode, the only GOPstructure supported is IP (no B frames), and there are no hierarchical B frames.

Seamless Variable Delay mode

Unlike the other fixed delay modes (such as Standard, Low Delay, Mega LowDelay), seamless variable delay (SVD) mode provides flexibility in choosing delaysand decoder buffer size. The decoder buffer size is calculated as minimum bitrate xdelay (each of which are user parameters), up to 15 Mb for HD or 10 Mb for SD.

Also, in SVD mode, the video bitrate can be changed on the fly without requiringan encoder restart.

Finally, SVD mode is necessary to enable VBR (Variable Bit Rate) operation.

Video Bit Rate (bps): Enter the bit rate per second at ES (Elementary Stream) level; the range is 250 000 bps - 20 000 000 bps. For HD video source, the bit rate range is 1 000 000 to 20 000 000 bps.

VBR Operation

In VBR mode, the encoded video bitrate can vary over time between theminimum bitrate and maximum bitrate, depending on the complexity of thesource material. The target quality parameter affects the video quality as well asthe average VBR bitrate. The higher the number, the higher the average VBR rate.If VBR is available, the following four parameters appear:

VBR Mode: Click a radio button to turn OFF the VBR Mode (returning to default CBR) or turn it On (No Stuffing).

Seamless Delay (sec): Enter the value for seamless variable delay (0.5 - 4.0 sec-onds); float format: xx.xxxx.

Minimum Seamless Bit Rate (bps): If VBR mode is selected, this is the mini-mum bitrate; the range is 250 000 bps - 20 000 000 bps.

Target Quality (%): Appears only if VBR mode is selected and affects the aver-age bitrate. Enter the value; the range is 30% - 100%.

NOTEVBR is a licensed feature.

216


Enable Service Information: Check the box if you need to configure the service information. For details, see Service Information on page 181.

SD-SDI Video Source If SD_SDI is selected as Video Source, the following parameters are different from those with the HD-SDI Video Source.

SD Input Format: Click one of the radio buttons to select 480i/29.97 or 576i/25 lines over FrameRates.

SD Resolution: Select from the drop-down list the SD Resolution: 720 x 480/576, 704 x 480/576, 640 x 480/576, 544 x 480/576, 528 x 480/576, 480 x 480/576, or 352 x 480/576.

AVCEnc HDGeneral Statistics

The MPEG-4 AVC Ultracompression Encoder General Statistics page pro-vides the information to view the statistics for this encoder. Select Statistics from the menu and select Ports.This will display the Summary Port List. Click the AVCEnc link to display a list of all AVCEnc ports, then select a specific port to view.

The general AVCEnc HD encoder parameters for statistics are basically identical to those of the configuration. The additional parameters are:

Video Locked: Indicates whether the system is (Yes) locked to the video input frame clock or not (No).

Audio Input Cable Type: Shows the audio cable type detected by the hardware.

Firmware Upgrade Status: Shows the status of firmware upgrade, 0 to 63 char-acters.

Daughter Board Version: Indicates the daughter board version, 0 to 9 characters.

217


AVCEnc HDAudio Channels

MPEG-4 AVC Ultracompression Encoder provides six audio channels. To select a channel, use the Go navigation button, then click Audio. If you select (click) Channel 1, this encoder’s Audio Channel 1 Configuration page opens. For infor-mation on using the buttons at the top of the screen, see Screen Navigation Buttons on page 171.

If you need to select a channel other than 1, use the Go button and navigate to the channel you need.

When you select a channel, you will need to confirm the selection by checking the check box on the following page; for example, you selected Channel 2.

218


Checking the box opens the MPEG-4 AVC Ultracompression Encoder Audio Channel 2 Configuration page. For any of the other channels, the procedure is the same. The fields are the same as for Channel 1 with the corresponding channel number.

ConfiguringAVCEnc HD


The page parameters depend on the selected Audio Codec. The screenshot above presents the parameters for the MPEG-1 Layer II codec. Except for the range val-ues, the parameters for the AAC LC (Advanced Audio Coding Low Complexity) and HE-AAC (High Efficiency AAC) audio codecs are the same as for the MPEG-1 Layer II described below. The parameters of the Dolby Digital AC-3 are different, see Configuring AVCEnc HD Dolby Digital AC-3 Audio on page 222. The MPEG-4 AVC Ultracompression Encoder supports six audio channels. The parameters for each codec are the same for all channels with the difference in the channel number only.


This section describes the parameter fields for the MPEG-1 Layer II codec. Note that for the AAC LC and HE-AAC codecs, the parameters are the same.

Interface AVCEnc x/x Enable Ch 1: Check the box to activate this channel active. The default is Channel 1.

219


Audio Source Ch 1: Select the input source for the audio: Input Cable, SDI, or Internal Test Tone.

If SDI is selected, the following parameter is used:

SDI Group Ch 1: Select Group1 Ch1/2, Group1 Ch3/4, Group2 Ch1/2, Group2 Ch3/4, Group3 Ch1/2, Group3 Ch3/4, Group4 Ch1/2, Group4 Ch3/4.

If Input Cable is selected, the following parameter is used:

Audio Input Source: The following values are available: None, Un/Balance 1, and Un/Balance 2.

The rest parameters are the same for all selections of the Audio Source Ch 1.

Audio Codec Ch 1: Select the codec type for the audio channel from the drop-down list: Dolby Digital AC-3, AAC LC, HE-AAC, or MPEG-1 Layer II (the default).

Output Mode Ch 1: Select the output mode: Mono, Stereo or Channel 5.1.

Audio Bitrate Ch 1 (kbps): Select from the drop-down list the audio bit rate for Channel 1 in kbps. The default is 192 kbps.

AV Sync Delay Ch 1 (msec): Enter a value to subtract or add delay to the audio for lip-sync; the range is (-3000) msec - 3000 msec.

PID Information Ch1 Audio PID: Enter PID for the audio channel; range 0x20 - 0x1ffe.

Include PCR: Check the box to include the PCR or uncheck not to include the PCR in the audio stream.

Language Descriptor: Enter a language code, 0 to 3 characters; for example, EN for English (the default).

Audio Type: Select from the drop-down list: Undefined, Clean effects, Hearing impaired, Visual impaired commentary, Reserved for future use.

Enable Dual Mono Split Ch 1: Check the box to enable. The default status is dis-abled (the unchecked box). If enabled, the following parameter appears:


wave for left channel 1 and 2 kHzsine wave for the right channel). NOTE

When selecting SDI, the audio encoder sample rate must match theincoming embedded audio sample rate, in most cases the samplerate is 48 kHz.

NOTE5.1 Audio channel (3/2: L,C,R,SL,SR) is not supported by AudioCodec MPEG-1 Layer II.

NOTENot all the bit rates work for all codecs.

220


Replicated Channel for Ch 1: (or any one from 1 to 6 with which you chose to configure your ultracompression encoder’s Audio). Click the radio button to choose one of the two split channels.

The Codec transitions between the two channels above seamlessly (except possibly for a signal level discontinuity) and without a restart.

Dual Mono SplitSome legacy systems use the “Dual Mono” mode available in AES and some audio encoders to implement support for multiple languages. A Dual Mono signal is just like a stereo signal, but instead of having a left and right channel, it has two inde-pendent mono channels (typically different languages). A receiver must play out only one of them, as selected by the user.

In modern systems, it is usual to run different languages in separate PIDs. In fact, some of the newer audio CODECs do not support this mode. The encoder has the ability to read the Dual Mono signaling on an incoming AES (or SDI embed-ded) audio signal and split the dual-mono feed into two independent feeds. To accomplish this, feed the audio source simultaneously to two audio encoders (for example, Audio 1 and Audio 2) by selecting the same audio source. Then, check the Enable Dual Mono Split box to activate this feature in both audio encoders. Finally, select the Replicated Channel as Channel 1 for one encoder, and Chan-nel 2 for the other.

If configured as above, the system will operate as follows: if the incoming signal is Stereo, it will be simply replicated into the two audio channels (that is, they will have identical content). If the incoming signal switches to Dual Mono, each encoder will take only one channel, as configured. The encoded bitstream will still be stereo in each PID, but the left and right channels will be the same.

Audio Digital Gain Ch1: Enter the value within the range -12dB to 12dB; the default is 0dB.

Use Channel for PIP Ch1: Check the box to enable the use of this audio channel with PIP video.

AVCEnc HDMPEG-1 Layer IIAudio Statistics

The MPEG-4 AVC Ultracompression Encoder Audio Channel 1 Statistics page provides the information to view the data for the Encoder’s selected channel. Select Statistics from the menu and select Ports. This will display the Summary Port List. Click the AVCEnc link to display a list of all AVCEnc ports, then select a specific port to view. The audio encoder parameters for statistics are identical to those of the channel configuration (page 218).

NOTEThis feature is supported with all Audio Codec selections except for AC-3 Pass Through.

NOTEValid with digital inputs only.

221



If SDI is selected as the Audio Source Ch 1, the Statistics page for the MPEG-1 Layer II audio codec is the same for both HD-SDI and SD Interface.

To view the Statistics page of another channel, you need first to configure that channel and then use the Mode button to view its statistics or go to the Statistics ->Ports menu and select the AVCEnc port.

ConfiguringAVCEnc HD

Dolby DigitalAC-3 Audio

The screenshot that follows presents the AVCEnc HD Dolby Digital AC-3 Audio configuration parameters.

222


Interface AVCEnc x/x Enable Ch 1: Check the box to activate this channel. The default is Channel 1.

Audio Source Ch 1: Select the input source for the audio: Input Cable, SDI, or Internal Test Tone.

223


For both HD and SD boards, the first four parameters are the same, see Interface AVCEnc x/x on page 219.

Audio ServiceConfig Ch 1

Audio Coding Mode Ch 1: Select from the drop-down box to specify which channels (1/0: C, 2/0: L, R or 3/2 L, C, R, SL, SR, the latter is also known as Channel 5.1 Audio support) will be coded.

The support for 3/2 L, C, R, SL, SR (Channel 5.1) Audio Coding Mode can only be configured from Audio channel 1 and Audio channel 4. If 5.1 Audio is enabled for channel 1, Audio channels 2 and 3 are automatically disabled. If 5.1 Audio is enabled for channel 4, Audio channels 5 and 6 are automatically disabled.

Data Rate 2_0 Ch 1 (kbps): Select from the drop-down list the output data rate of the AC-3 bitstream:

• for 2/0 L, R and 3/2 L, C, R, SL, SR, the default is 192

• for 1/0: C, the default is 128.

More Audio SvcConfig Ch 1

AC3 Bitstream mode Ch 1: Select from the drop-down list the type of service conveyed in the bitstream: Complete Main, Music and Effects, Visually Impaired, Hearing impaired, Dialogue, Commentary, Emergency, Voiceover/Karaoke.

Dialog Normalization Ch 1 (dB): Enter average dialog level relative to digital 100%; the range is (-31) dB to (-1) dB.

Bitstream Info Ch 1 Audio Production Info Ch 1: Click the radio button to disable or enable (Off or On) the audio production information.

If you enabled the Audio Production Info, the following two parameters show up:

• Mix Level Ch1 (dB): Enter acoustic Sound Pressure Level (SPL) during final mixing; therange is 80 dB to 111 dB.

• Room Type Ch 1: Select from the drop-down list type and calibration of the mixing roomduring final mixing: Not Indicated, Large Room, Small Room.

Dolby Surround Mode Ch 1: Select from the drop-down list to indicate whether the audio Dolby Surround mode is Not Indicated, Not Surround Encoded, or Sur-round Encoded.

Copyright Ch 1: Click the radio button to disable or enable (Off or On) the bit-stream copyright protection.

Original Bitstream Ch 1: Click the radio button to disable or enable (Off or On) the original bitstream.

NOTE5.1 Audio channel is not supported by Audio Codec MPEG-1 Layer II.

224


PCM PreprocessingCh 1

Digital De-emphasis Ch 1: Click the radio button to disable or enable (Off or On) the input channels to be digitally de-emphasized.

DC High-pass Filter Ch 1: Click the radio button to disable or enable (Off or On) a DC-blocking 3 Hz high-pass filter.

Bandwidth Low-pass Filter Ch 1: Click the radio button to disable or enable (Off or On) a bandwidth-limiting low-pass filter.

RF Overmodulation Protection Ch 1: Click the radio button to disable or enable (Off or On) the RF overmodulation protection.

Dynamic Range Profile Ch 1: Select from the drop-down list the dynamic range compression characteristic — one of the Line modes.

Compression Profile Ch 1: Select from the drop-down list a heavy dynamic range compression—an RF mode.


PID Information Ch1 Audio PID: Enter the audio channel PID.

Include PCR: Check the box if you need to include PCR in the audio stream.

Language Descriptor: Enter language code, 0 to 3 characters.

Audio Type: Select audio type from the drop-down list: Undefined, Clean Effects, Hearing impaired, Visual impaired commentary.

Enable Dual Mono Split Ch 1: Check the box to enable. The default is the unchecked box. If enabled, the following parameter appears:

Replicated Channel for Ch 1: (or any one from 1 to 6 with which you chose to configure your AVC Encoder Audio). Click the radio button to choose one of the two split channels.

The Codec transitions between the two channels above seamlessly (except possibly for a signal level discontinuity) and without a restart.

Audio Digital Gain Ch1: Enter the value within the range -12dB to 12dB; the default is 0dB.

Use Channel for PIP: Check the box to enable the Use of this audio channel with PIP video.

NOTEThis feature is supported with all Audio Codec selections except for AC-3 Pass Through.


225


AVCEnc HDDolby Digital

AC-3 AudioStatistics

The AVC Encoder Audio Statistics page provides dolby audio encoder statistics information. Select Statistics >Ports from the menu. This will display the Sum-mary Port List. Click the AVCEnc link to display a list of all AVCEnc ports, then select a specific port to view. The ultracompression encoder’s Dolby Digital AC-3 audio parameters for statistics are identical to those of the configuration, see page 222.

NOTEFor both HD and SD, the parameters are the same.

226


MPEG-4 AVC Ultracompression HD Encoder (AVCEnc HD) PIP Configuration and Statistics

ConfiguringAVCEnc HD PIP

The following screenshot presents the AVCEnc HD PIP Configuration page where you can configure the PIP parameters.

Interface AVCEnc x/x PIP Video Mode: Click a radio button to select PIP Video mode, PIP or PIP Plus. Only PIP support with Low PIP Resolution is available for AVCEnc HD.

Low PIP Resolution: Select the value of the low PIP resolution from the drop-down list.

Bit Rate (bps): Enter the PIP bit rate for PIP stream at ES (Elementary Stream) level, the range is 100 000 to 3 000 000 bps.

PIP GOP StructureGOP Length: Enter the Group of Pictures length, which is the distance between two I-Frames; the range is 12 to 250.

NOTEFor both HD and SD interfaces, the parameters are the same.

227


GOP Structure: Select from the drop-down list the number of B-Frames between two reference frames.

Adaptive GOP: Check the box to enable the encoder to organize the GOP as needed.

Closed GOP: Check the box to force encoding closed GOPs.

PIP Service InformationPIP Video PID: Enter the PID for the encoded video bitstream; the range is 0x20 to 0x1ffe.

PIP PCR PID: Enter the PID to inject the PCR in (usually the same as video); the range is 0x20 to 0x1ffe.

PIP PMT PID: Enter the PID for the program Map table; the range is 0x20 to 0x1ffe.

PIP Program Number: Enter the PMT program number for the encoded bit-stream; the range is 1 to 65535.

AVCEnc HD PIPStatistics

The Ultracompression AVCEnc HD PIP Statistics page allows you to view the encoder’s PIP parameters. Select Statistics >Ports from the menu. This will dis-play the Summary Port List. Click the AVCEnc link to display a list of all AVCEnc ports, then select a specific port to view. If you are in the MPEG-4 AVC Ultracompression Encoder General Statistics page, you can open this page from the Go button.

The following screenshot presents the AVC Encoder PIP Statistics page.

The AVC encoder’s PIP parameters for statistics are identical to those of the con-figuration, see page 260.

228


MPEG-4 AVC Ultracompression HD Encoder (AVCEnc HD) Advanced Configu-ration and Statistics

AVCEnc HDAdvanced

Configuration

The advanced parameters in this page are specific to the MPEG-4 AVC Ultracompression HD Encoder. After completing the configuration, click Apply. To return to default settings, click Set Default. To return to the encode’s General Configuration page, click General under the Go button.

NOTEFor both HD and SD interfaces, the parameters are basically the same, except as noted.

229


Interface AVCEnc x/x GOP Length: Enter the Group of Pictures length, which is the distance between two I-Frames; the range is12 to 500.


Adaptive GOP: Check the box to enable the encoder to insert an I-Frame as needed.

Closed GOP: Check the box to force the use of the closed GOP. (The GOP is closed when it starts with an I Frame and subsequent B-Frames do not rely on I or P frames from the previous GOP.)

Hierarchical B Frame: Check the box to enable the use of the hierarchical B- Frame.

Adaptive Qp: Check the box to enable the adaptive quantization feature.

PES: Click a corresponding radio button to insert the PES (Packetized Elemen-tary Stream) header either per Frame or per GOP at the beginning of a GOP.

Bandwidth: Select from the drop-down list the encoder bandwidth: Soft, Medium, Sharp, or Auto.

MCTF: Check the box to enable or disable the MCTF (Motion Compensated Temporal Filtering, a noise reduction technique) filter.

Only the next two parameters are different between HD and SD MPEG-4 AVC Ultracompression Encoders.

HD Encoder

Enable CC: Check the box to enable Closed Captioning (CC) to be injected intothe stream. If enabled, the following parameter appears.

CC Format: If CC is enabled, click a radio button to select Closed Captioningformat, ATSC or ATSC 2005.

SD Encoder

Betty Removal: Check the box to enable Betty filtering. The filter should beenabled in cases where Betty data services are present and should otherwise beleft disabled.

Line 23 Blanking: Check the box to enable or disable blanking of line 23 forPAL signal.

This feature is available only with SD PAL. This option enables encoding of blackon line 23. Used to avoid VBI information showing on a 4x3 display.

The rest of the parameters are again the same for the two encoders.

The following sections, Audio Analog Gain Source Ch 1 and Audio Analog Gain Source Ch 2, appear if Input Cable is selected as an Audio Source for these channels in the MPEG-4 AVC Ultracompression Encoder Audio Channel 1 and Channel 2 Configuration screens.

230


Audio Analog Gain Source Ch 1Audio Gain Specification: Click a radio button to select the audio gain, EBU or SMPTE.

Left Channel Gain (dB): Enter audio analog left channel gain, range (-96) to 12 dB.

Right Channel Gain (dB): Enter audio analog right channel gain, range (-96) to 12 dB.

Zero (0) is the default and sets the analog decoder chip to automatically control the gain.

Audio Analog Gain Source Ch 2Audio Gain Specification: Click a radio button to select the audio gain, EBU or SMPTE.

Left Channel Gain (dB): Enter audio analog left channel gain, the range is (-96) to 12 dB.

Right Channel Gain (dB): Enter audio analog right channel gain, the range is (-96) to 12 dB.Zero (0) is the default and sets the analog decoder chip to automatically control the gain.

Encoder Service InformationEncoder Video PID: Enter the PID for the encoded video bit stream, the range is 0x20 to 0x1ffe.

Encoder PCR PID: Enter the PID to inject the PCR in (usually the same as video), the range is 0x20 to 0x1ffe.

Encoder PMT PID: Enter the PID for the program Map table, the range is 0x20 to 0x1ffe.

Encoder Program Number: Enter the PMT program number for the encoded bitstream, the range is 1 to 65535.

License Key: Enter the encoder license key, 0 to 30 characters.

Disable Auto Recovery: Check the box to disable or enable auto-recovery.

AVCEnc HDAdvancedStatistics

The MPEG-4 AVC Ultracompression Encoder Advanced Statistics page pre-sents parameters of this encoder. To view this page, go to Statistics - > Ports -> AVCEnc. Then select a specific AVCEnc x/x.

The parameters of the MPEG-4 AVC Ultracompression Encoder advanced statis-tics are the same as those of the configuration with the addition of the parameter Serial Number under the Encoder Service Information section and the sec-tions: License State and Used Licenses.

231


Serial Number: Provides the serial number of the encoder to be used to get the License key.

License StateIndicates with Yes or No whether the following licenses are present:

• Ultra Compression

• HD Premium

232


• Low PIP Resolution

• SD PIP Resolution

• Noise Reduction

• VBR Operation

• The remaining rows: each lists the license and how many of it are available; the range is 0 - 6.For example, you have 4 AAC-LC Stereo licences.

Used LicensesThis section lists licences and how many of them are actually used.

MPEG-4 AVC Ultracompression SD Encoder (AVCEnc SD) General Configura-tion and StatisticsThe MPEG-4 AVC Ultracompression SD Encoder supports:

• NTSC formats both with and without pedestal

• AC-3 Pass Through audio codec

• S-Video analog video format

• VBI with these modes: EBU Teletext, Inverted Teletext, Video Programme Support (VPS),and Wide-screen Signaling (WSS).

AVCEnc SDGeneral

Configuration

The MPEG-4 AVC Ultracompression Encoder General Configuration page enables you to configure the encoder interfaces. Select Configuration from the menu. You can find a list of AVCEnc encoders under either Ports or the appro-priate MCM blade.


Select the encoder you need to configure.

The parameter fields are basically the same as for the General Configuration with AVCEnc HD (for details, see page 214), except for the following:

Video Source SD: Select one of the following: S-Video, Composite Channel-1, Composite Channel-2, or SDI (Digital Video).

233


The SD Input Format, SD Resolution, and Video Bit Rate (bps) fields are the same as described above in the “SD-SDI Video Source” with the HD interface, page 217.

AVCEnc SDGeneral Statistics

The parameter fields are basically the same as for the AVCEnc HD General Statis-tics; for details, see page 217.

234


AVCEnc SDAudio Channels

MPEG-4 AVC Ultracompression SD Encoder provides six audio channels. To select a channel, use the Go navigation button, then click Audio. If you select (click) Channel 1, the MPEG-4 AVC Ultracompression Encoder Audio Channel 1 Configuration page opens.

If you need to select a channel other than 1, use the Go button and navigate to the channel you need. For information on using the buttons at the top of the screen, see Screen Navigation Buttons on page 171.

235


ConfiguringAVCEnc SD


The page parameters depend on the selected Audio Codec. The screenshot that follows presents the parameters for the MPEG-1 Layer II codec. Except for the range values, the parameters for the AAC LC and HE-AAC audio codecs are the same as for the MPEG-1 Layer II described below. The AVCEnc SD supports six audio channels. The parameters for each codec are the same for all channels with the difference in the channel number only.

The screenshot that follows presents the parameters for the MPEG-1 Layer II codec with the SD Interface.

NOTEFor the AAC LC and HE-AAC codecs, the parameters are the same.

236


This page does not differ from the similar page of AVCEnc HD, see page 219.

237


AC-3 Pass Through Audio Codec Ch 1: Additional selection: AC-3 Pass Through. If selected, enables Audio Pass Through the Channels. For parameters with Pass Through, see the screenshot that follows.

When the AC-3 Pass Through audio codec is selected, the Pass-through Stream No Ch 1 parameter (instead of Enable Dual Mono) appears in the PID Information Ch 1 section. From the drop-down list, select Auto or a Channel number from 1 to 6.

AVC EncoderSD MPEG-1 LayerII Audio Statistics

The MPEG-4 AVC Ultracompression SD Encoder Audio Channel 1 Statis-tics page provides the information to view the data for the encoder’s selected channel. Select Statistics from the menu and select Ports. This will display the Summary Port List. Click the AVCEnc link to display a list of all AVCEnc ports, then select a specific port to view. The audio encoder parameters for statistics are identical to those of the AVCEnc HD channel 1 configuration (page 236).


238


The Statistics page for the MPEG-1 Layer II audio codec with SD Interface is the same as that for HD-SDI when SDI is selected as the Audio Source Ch 1 (page 221).

AVCEncSD Dolby Digital

AC-3 AudioConfigurationand Statistics

The AVCEnc SD configuration and statistics parameters with the Dolby Digital AC-3 Audio Codec are the same as those of the AVCEnc HD (page 222 and page 226, respectively).

VBI Support AVCEnc SD encoder provides VBI support for the PAL video system. Click Go > VBI to get to the configuration page.

NOTEAVCEnc SD supports VBI only with the input format 576i/25.

239


In the VBI configuration window you can set the VBI interface as follows.

VBI Service InformationTeletext PID: Enter PID value for the VBI information in a hexadecimal format; range: 0x20 - 0x1ffe.

Language Descriptor: Enter Language Descriptor for the teletext; 0 to - 3 char-acters. The default is EN (English).

VBILines: You can select lines with the following ranges: All, 6 to 23, and 318 to 335 to be processed when extracting the teletext information.

Standard: For each line within the above ranges, the system can be configured for the following processing alternatives:

• EBU Teletext

• EBU Teletext Subtitle

• Inverted Teletext

• VPS (Video Programme Support)

• WSS (Wide Screen Signalling)

ADD: click the Add button to enable processing for the selected line(s). For exam-ple, you added EBU Teletext to Line 8. When you click Apply, AVC Encoder VBI Configuration page re-opens listing all lines where the selected standard Teletext has been added.

240


Teletext extraction can be disabled for a specific line by selecting the correspond-ing checkbox for that line in the Delete column and then clicking the Delete but-ton. For example, you can delete Line 8 entry by checking the box and clicking Delete under the box.

VBI Statistics The statistics window shows the parameters for the VBI configured.

MPEG-4 AVC Ultracompression SD Encoder PIP Configuration and StatisticsWith SD card, the configuration and statistics of the PIP parameters for the AVCEnc SD encoder are basically the same as those of the AVCEnc HD. See page 260 and page 228, respectively. The differences are described below.

241


PIP Video Mode: Click PIP or PIP Plus radio button.

SD PIP Resolution: Select a PIP resolution from the drop-down list.

PIP Plus Support

This feature is based on license and adds support for standard definitionresolutions to the PIP encoder. The encoder can have low resolution (PIP) licenseand PIP Plus license. If both PIP and PIP Plus licenses are available, the user willbe able to choose the desired resolutions corresponding to the selected PIP modefrom the SD PIP Resolution drop-down list. If only one of the licenses isenabled, those resolutions corresponding to the available license is shown in theGUI.

MCTF – PIP: Check the box to enable or disable MCTF – PIP (Motion-compen-sated Temporal Filtering – PIP).

MPEG-4 AVC Ultracompression SD Encoder Advanced Configuration and StatisticsThe advanced parameters in this page are specific to the MPEG-4 AVC Ultracompression Encoder with SD card. After completing the configuration, click Apply. To return to default settings, click Set Default. To return to the AVCEnc SD General Configuration page, click General under the Go button.


AVCEnc SDAdvanced

Configuration

SDI (Digital Video) asVideo Source SD

The AVCEnc SD Advanced Configuration screenshot follows.

242


Both the Interface AVCEnc x/x and Encoder Service Information sections are the same as such sections for the AVCEnc HD (see page 230) with the Betty Removal support instead of Enable CC corresponding to the SD Input Format of 480i/29.97. In addition, the SD mode also provides Aspect Ratio parameter.

Betty Removal: Check the box to enable Betty filtering. The filter should be enabled in cases where Betty data services are present and should otherwise be left disabled.

Betty TV supports a proprietary method of transmitting data services within the active video area. In such a system, digital data is encoded near the borders of the video frame in areas that are normally not visible on an overscanned television monitor. If present, the data services information may adversely affect the video compression performance of the encoder. In order to alleviate this problem, the encoder supports an optional Betty Removal filter, which is specifically designed to blank the portions of the image carrying the encoded data.

Aspect Ratio: Click a radio button to select 4:3 or 16:9 Aspect Ratio. The aspect ratio of an image is its width divided by its height. Two common videographic aspect ratios are 4:3, universal for standard-definition video formats, and 16:9, uni-versal to high-definition television and European digital television.

243


S-Video as VideoSource SD

For Video Source SD selected in General Configuration as S-Video as well as for Composite Channel-1, or Composite Channel-2 as, the Advanced Configuration is as follows.

The Interface AVCEnc x/x and Encoder Service Information sections are the same as such sections for the AVCEnc HD, see page 230 with the addition of the Aspect Ratio parameter, described above and Analog Video Processing param-eters described below.

Analog VideoPreprocessing

For more details on the following fields, see page 210 - page 211.

Video AGC: Check the box to enable/disable Video AGC (Automatic Gain Con-trol) for analog inputs.

The following two fields show up if Video AGC is NOT enabled:

Video CVBS Gain (dB): Video CVBS (Composite Video Blanking Sync) gain; the range is -3 to 6 dB, 0 to 5 characters.

244


Chrominance Gain (dB): Chrominance gain control; the range is -9.58 to 14.03 dB, 0 to 5 characters.

The rest of the fields can be configured regardless of whether Video AGC is enabled or not.

Luminance Filter: Luminance Filter control. Select from the drop-down list.

Brightness: Brightness control; the range is 0 to 255.

Contrast: Contrast control; the range is 0 to 127.

Chrominance Saturation: Chrominance saturation; the range is 0 to 127.

Chrominance Hue: Chrominance hue; the range is 0 to 360.

AVCEnc SDAdvancedStatistics

The AVC Encoder Advanced Statistics page presents the parameters of an AVC Encoder. To view this page, go to Statistics > Ports > AVCEnc. Then select a specific AVCEnc x/x.

SDI (Digital Video) asVideo Source SD

For Video Source SD selected in the General Configuration page as SDI (Dig-ital Video), the Advanced Statistics page is as follows.

245


If AVC Encoder is configured with SD Input Format of 480i/29.97, the fields in the sections Interface AVCEnc x/x, Encoder Service Information, License State, and Used Licences are the same as the corresponding sections for Advanced Statisticsof the HD-SDI interface, see page 231.

If AVC Encoder is configured with SD Input Format of 576i/25, the Interface AVCEnc x/x section contains Betty Removal parameter (page 242) instead of Enable CC.

246


S-Video as VideoSource SD

For Video Source SD selected in the General Configuration page as S-Video, Composite Channel-1, or Composite Channel-2, the Advanced Statistics looks is as follows.

The fields in the Interface AVCEnc x/x and Analog Video Preprocessing sec-tions are the same as in the corresponding SD Interface Configuration page, see page 231.

The fields in the sections Encoder Service Information, License State, and Used Licences are the same as the corresponding sections for Advanced Statis-tics of the HD-SDI interface, see page 231.

247


MPEG-4 AVC Ultracompression (Single Slot) Encoder General Configuration and Statistics

Overview In addition to the dual-slot MPEG-4 AVC Ultracompression Encoder, there is a single-slot MPEG-4 AVC Ultracompression Encoder which fits in a single PMC slot. The advantages for the single-slot encoder are:


• Improved video quality compared to the dual-slot encoder.

• Up to 8 audio channels can be encoded by each card.

The MPEG-4 AVC Ultracompression encoder offers two factory-installed input interface options:

• HD-SDI Interface: this interface only supports digital uncompressed video. It can beconfigured to accept either HD-SDI or SD-SDI inputs. See more, HD Encoder on page30.

• SD Interface: this interface only supports standard definition video signals, both analog(composite and s-video) and digital (SD-SDI). See more, SD Encoder on page 31.

Both interfaces support embedded audio in the digital interface, as well as analog balanced or unbalanced audio. They also support digital AES audio.

AVCEnc is a logical name of the MPEG-4 AVC Ultracompression Encoder, HD or SD. In the following sections, this single-slot encoder is referred to briefly as AVCEnc Single HD or AVCEnc Single SD.

AVCEnc SingleHD General

Configuration

The MPEG-4 AVC Ultracompression (Single Slot) Encoder HD General Configuration page enables you to configure the Encoder’s interfaces. Select Configuration from the menu. You can find a list of these encoders under either Ports or the appropriate MCM blade.


Select an AVCEnc you need to configure.

The following screenshot presents the MPEG-4 AVC Ultracompression (Single Slot) Encoder HD General Configuration page.

248


Click Apply when finished selecting or setting parameters.

The parameter fields are as follows.

Description: Enter a description or label for this encoder, 0 to 79 characters (optional).

Video Source: Select from the drop-down list a video input: HD-SDI, Color Bars, Black, or SD-SDI. The selection of HD_SDI will cause the parameters HD Input Format and Resolution 1080; while the selection of SD-SDI will cause the parameters SD Input Format and SD Resolution. The selection of values – Color Bars or Black – does not effect the presence of other parameters.

Selecting SD-SDI and 576i/25 lines over FrameRates as SD Input Format pro-vides VBI support as shown below.

249


Video Coding Mode: Select from the drop-down list: Off, H.264, or MPEG-2.

For the description of all parameters following the Video Coding Mode, see page 215 and page 217. In the Service Information section (page 217), if enabled, there is an additional parameter:

Language Code: Click a radio button to select ISO/IEC character code table: ISO/IEC 8859-1 Latin-1 or ISO/IEC 8859-6 Arabic.

VBI Configuration VBI support is available when Video Source is set to SD-SDI and SD Input For-mat is set to 576i/25.

250


VBI Service InformationVBI PID: Enter the PID value for the VBI Information; the range is 0x20 to 0x1FFE.

Teletext PID: Enter PID Value for the Teletext information; range: 0x20 - 0x1ffe.

Language Descriptor: Language Descriptor for the teletext, 0 to - 3 characters.

VBILines: Select All Lines or a specific line to process.

Standard: Select the VBI standard to apply to the selected line(s): EBU Teletext, Inverted Teletext, VPS, WSS, or None (default).

Click the Add button when you have completed your selections. When line is added, a check box and Delete button appear. Should you decide to delete a line, check the box and click the Delete button.

AVCEnc HDSingle General

Statistics

The MPEG-4 AVC Ultracompression (Single Slot) Encoder HD General Statistics page provides the information to view the statistics for this encoder. Select Statistics from the menu and select Ports.This will display the Summary Port List. Click the AVCEnc link to display a list of all AVCEnc ports, then select a specific port to view.

The general AVCEnc Single HD encoder parameters for statistics are basically identical to those of the configuration. The additional parameters are:


Audio Input Cable Type: Shows the audio cable type detected by the hardware.


251


Daughter Board Version: Indicates the daughter board version, 0 to 9 charac-ters.

VBI Statistics If Video Source is set as SD-SDI and SD Input Format is set to 576i/25, VBI support is available. TheVBI Statistics screen is shown as follows.

252


For parameters in the VBI Statistics page, see VBI Configuration on page 250.

AVCEnc SingleHD AudioChannels

MPEG-4 AVC Ultracompression (Single Slot) Encoder HD supports eight audio channels. To select a channel, use the Go navigation button, then click Audio. If you select (click) Channel 1, this encoder’s Audio Channel 1 Configuration page opens.


253


Channel 1 is enabled by default. If you need to select a channel other than 1, use the Go button and navigate to the channel you need.


Checking the box opens the MPEG-4 AVC Ultracompression (Single Slot) Encoder Audio Channel 2 Configuration page. For any of the other channels, the procedure is the same. The fields are the same as for Channel 1 with the corre-sponding channel number.

The page parameters depend on the selected Audio Codec. The parameters for each codec are the same for all channels with the difference in the channel number only.

254


ConfiguringAVCEnc Single

HD MPEG-1Layer II Audio

The screenshot that follows presents the parameters for the MPEG-1 Layer II codec. For the description of the parameter fields for the MPEG-1 Layer II codec, see page 219.

AVCEnc SingleHD MPEG-1 LayerII Audio Statistics

The MPEG-4 AVC Ultracompression (Single Slot) Encoder HD Audio Channel 1 Statistics page provides the information to view the data for the Encoder’s selected channel. Select Statistics from the menu and select Ports. This will display the Summary Port List. Click the AVCEnc link to display a list of all AVCEnc ports, then select a specific port to view. The audio encoder parameters for statistics are identical to those of the channel configuration (page 219).


255



ConfiguringAVCEnc SingleHD AAC Audio

The two modes of AAC (Advanced Audio Coding) are called:

• AAC-LC (AAC-Low Complexity)

• HE-AAC (High Efficiency AAC).

The audio AAC codec can be: AAC-LC, HE-AAC, and HE-AAC-V2. For AAC-LC codec, the configuration and statistics parameters are the same as for MPEG-1 Layer II, see the sections above. For the codecs HE-AAC and HE-AAC-V2 there is one parameter, HE Encoding Mode, additionally to the MPEG-1 Layer II parameters; please find it below Audio Bitrate Ch 1 in the screenshot:

HE Encoding Mode: Select from the drop-down list an HE-AAC encoding mode - ADTS (Audio Data Transport Stream), LOAS (Low Overhead Audio Stream), or LATM (Low-overhead MPEG-4 Audio Transport Multiplex).

The parameters for HE-AAC and HE-AAC-V2 are the same and are shown in the screenshot that follows.

256


AVCEnc SingleHD AAC Audio

Statistics

The screenshot below shows the HE-AAC audio statistics corresponding to the configuration page above.

257



HD Dolby DigitalAC-3 Audio

The screenshot that follows presents the AVCEnc Single HD Dolby Digital AC-3 Audio configuration parameters. These parameters are the same as those for the AVCEnc HD, see section on page 222.

258


AVCEnc SingleHD Dolby Digital


The AVCEnc Single HD Audio Statistics page provides dolby audio encoder statistics information. Select Statistics >Ports from the menu. This will display the Summary Port List. Click the AVCEnc link to display a list of all AVCEnc ports, then select a specific port to view. The ultracompression encoder’s Dolby Digital AC-3 audio parameters for statistics are identical to those of the configura-tion, see page 258.

259


MPEG-4 AVC Ultracompression (Single Slot) HD Encoder PIP Configuration and Statistics


HD PIP

The following screenshot presents the AVCEnc Single HD PIP Configuration page where you can configure the PIP parameters.

The parameters, except for MCTF-PIP (see below), are the same as for the AVCEnc HD PIP configuration, see Configuring AVCEnc Single HD PIP on page 260.

MCTF – PIP: Check the box to enable or disable MCTF – PIP (Motion-compen-sated Temporal Filtering – PIP, a noise reduction technique).

AVCEnc SingleHD PIP Statistics

The parameters, except for MCTF-PIP (see above), are the same as for the AVCEnc HD PIP statistics, see AVCEnc HD PIP Statistics on page 228.

MCTF – PIP: Shows whether the MCTF– PIP (Motion-compensated Temporal Filtering – PIP, a noise reduction technique) is enabled or not.

260


MPEG-4 AVC Ultracompression (Single Slot) Encoder HD Advanced Configura-tion and Statistics

AVCEnc SingleHD AdvancedConfiguration

The advanced parameters in this page are specific to the MPEG-4 AVC Ultracompression (Single Slot) Encoder HD. After completing the configuration, click Apply. To return to default settings, click Set Default. To return to the encoder’s General Configuration page, click General under the Go button.

Interface AVCEnc x/x GOP Length: Enter the Group of Pictures length, which is the distance between two I-Frames; the range is 12 to 500.


Adaptive GOP: Check the box to enable the encoder to insert an I-Frame as needed.


Hierarchical B Frame: Check the box to enable the use of the hierarchical B- Frame.

PES: Click a corresponding radio button to insert the PES (Packetized Elemen-tary Stream) header either per Frame or per GOP at the beginning of a GOP.

Bandwidth: Select from the drop-down list the encoder bandwidth: Soft, Medium, Sharp, or Auto.

261


MCTF: Check the box to enable or disable the MCTF (Motion Compensated Temporal Filtering, a noise reduction technique) filter.

Enable CC: Check the box to enable Closed Caption feature. If selected, the fol-lowing parameter shows up:

CC Format: ATSC (the default) and ATSC 2005.

Encoder ServiceInformation

With the HD-SDI Video source, the parameters are:

Encoder Video PID: Enter the PID for the encoded video bit stream, the range is 0x20 to 0x1ffe.

Encoder PCR PID: Enter the PID to inject the PCR in (usually the same as video), the range is 0x20 to 0x1ffe.

Encoder PMT PID: Enter the PID for the program Map table, the range is 0x20 to 0x1ffe.

Encoder Program Number: Enter the PMT program number for the encoded bitstream, the range is 1 to 65535.


Disable Auto Recovery: Check the box to disable or enable auto-recovery.

H.264 HD Profile: Select from the values: Main Level 4 (the default) or High Level 4.

262


With the SD-SDI, the H.264 HD Profile becomes H.264 SD Profile and the following parameter also shows up:

Aspect Ratio: Click a radio button to select 4:3 (universal for standard-definition video formats) or 16:9 (universal to high-definition television and European digital television) Aspect Ratio.

AVCEnc SingleHD Advanced

Statistics

The MPEG-4 AVC Ultracompression Single Slot Encoder HD Advanced Statistics page presents parameters of this encoder. To view this page, go to Sta-tistics > Ports > AVCEnc. Then select a specific AVCEnc x/x.

The parameters of the MPEG-4 AVC Ultracompression Single Slot Encoder HD advanced statistics are the same as those of the configuration, see page 261, with the addition of the parameter Serial Number under the Encoder Service Infor-mation section and the sections: License State and Used Licenses. The fields of these sections are as follows.

Serial Number: Provides the serial number of the encoder to be used to get the parameter below, the License key.



• HD Premium



• Clarus Noise Reduction

• Clarus Deblocking

• VBR Operation

• MPEG-2 HD Compression

• MPEG-2 SD Compression

• H.264 HD Compression

• The remaining rows: each lists the license and how many of it are available; the range is 0 - 6.For example, you have 6 AAC-LC Stereo licences


The last two lines are parameters Disable Auto-recovery and H.264 HD (or SD) Profile.

263


MPEG-4 AVC Ultracompression (Single Slot) Encoder SD General Configuration and StatisticsThe MPEG-4 AVC Ultracompression Single-slot Encoder SD supports:

• NTSC formats both with and without pedestal

• AC-3 Pass Through audio codec

• S-Video analog video format

In the following sections, this encoder is referred to briefly as AVCEnc Single SD.

264


AVCEnc SingleSD General

Configuration

The MPEG-4 AVC Ultracompression Single-slot Encoder SD General Con-figuration page enables you to configure the encoder interfaces. Select Configu-ration from the menu. You can find a list of AVCEnc encoders under either Ports or the appropriate MCM blade.


The parameter fields are basically the same as for the General Configuration with AVCEnc HD (for details, see section on page 215), except for the following:

Video Source SD: Select one of the following: S-Video, Composite Channel-1, Composite Channel-2, or SDI (Digital Video).

Video Coding Mode: Select from the drop-down list: Off, H.264, or MPEG-2 (additional parameter).

The SD Input Format and SD Resolution fields are the same as described in the “SD-SDI Video Source” with the HD interface, page 217.

VBI Configuration VBI support is available when Video Source SD is set to SDI and SD Input For-mat is set to 576i/25. The parameters are the same as for AVCEnc Single HD. For VBI configuration, see page 250.

265


AVCEnc SingleSD General

Statistics

The parameter fields are basically the same as for the AVCEnc HD General Statis-tics; for details, see page 217.

VBI Statistics VBI support is available when Video Source SD is set to SDI and SD Input For-mat is set to 576i/25. The parameters are the same as for AVCEnc Single HD. For VBI statistics, see page 252.

AVCEnc SingleSD AudioChannels

MPEG-4 AVC Ultracompression Single Slot Encoder SD provides eight audio channels. To select a channel, use the Go navigation button, then click Audio. If you select (click) Channel 1, the MPEG-4 AVC Ultracompression Encoder Audio Channel 1 Configuration page opens.

If you need to select a channel other than 1, use the Go button and navigate to the channel you need. For information on using the buttons at the top of the screen, see Screen Navigation Buttons on page 171.

266



Checking the box opens the MPEG-4 AVC Ultracompression (Single Slot) Encoder Audio Channel 2 Configuration page. For any of the other channels, the procedure is the same. The fields are the same as for Channel 1 with the corre-sponding channel number.

267



SD MPEG-1Layer II Audio

The page parameters depend on the selected Audio Codec. The screenshot that follows presents the parameters for the MPEG-1 Layer II codec.

The parameters are the same as for AVCEnc HD. For parameter descriptions, see page 219.

AVCEnc SingleSD MPEG-1 LayerII Audio Statistics

The MPEG-4 AVC Ultracompression (Single Slot) Encoder SD Audio Channel 1 Statistics page provides the information to view the data for the Encoder’s selected channel. Select Statistics from the menu and select Ports. This will display the Summary Port List. Click the AVCEnc link to display a list of all AVCEnc ports, then select a specific port to view. The audio encoder parameters for statistics are identical to those of the channel configuration (page 219).


268



AVCEnc SingleSD AAC AudioConfigurationand Statistics

The MPEG-4 AVC Ultracompression (Single Slot) SD Encoder AAC Audio Con-figuration and Statistics are the same as those of the AVCEnc Single HD. For parameter descriptions, see page 256 and page 257, respectively.


SD Dolby DigitalAC-3 Audio

The screenshot that follows presents the AVCEnc Single SD Dolby Digital AC-3 Audio configuration parameters. These parameters are the same as those for the AVCEnc HD, see section on page 222, except for the field Audio Digital Gain Ch 1.

269


AVCEnc SingleSD Dolby Digital


The AVCEnc Single SD Audio Statistics page provides dolby audio encoder statistics information. Select Statistics->Ports from the menu. This will display the Summary Port List. Click the AVCEnc link to display a list of all AVCEnc ports, then select a specific port to view. The ultracompression encoder’s Dolby Digital AC-3 audio parameters for statistics are identical to those of the configura-

270


tion, see section on page 258, except for Audio Digital Gain Ch 1, which is not used in this case.

MPEG-4 AVC Ultracompression (Single Slot) SD Encoder PIP Configuration and StatisticsThe MPEG-4 AVC Ultracompression (Single Slot) SD Encoder PIP Configura-tion and Statistics are the same as those of the AVCEnc Single HD. For parame-ters description, see page 260.

271


MPEG-4 AVC Ultracompression (Single Slot) Encoder SD Advanced Configura-tion and Statistics

AVCEnc SingleSD AdvancedConfiguration

The advanced parameters in this page are specific to the MPEG-4 AVC Ultracompression (Single Slot) Encoder SD. After completing the configuration, click Apply. To return to default settings, click Set Default. To return to the encoder’s General Configuration page, click General under the Go button.

The parameters, starting with the GOP Length through the Enable CC are the same as for the AVCEnc HD, see AVCEnc HD Advanced Configuration on page 229. For Video AGC through Chrominance Hue parameters, see page 244. For sections Audio Analog Gain Source Ch 1 and Audio Analog Gain Source Ch 2, see page 231. For section Encoder Service Information, see page 231, except for Aspect Ratio and H.264 SD Profile.

The additional parameters are:

• MCTF (before Enable CC): Motion Compensated Temporal Filtering, a special noisereduction technique.

• H.264 HD Profile: Select from the values: Main Level 4 (the default) and High Level 4.

• Aspect Ratio: Click a radio button to select 4:3 (universal for standard-definitionvideo formats) or 16:9 (universal to high-definition television and Europeandigital television) Aspect Ratio.

272


273


AVCEnc SingleSD Advanced

Statistics

The MPEG-4 AVC Ultracompression Single Slot Encoder SD Advanced Statistics page presents parameters of this encoder. To view this page, go to Sta-tistics - > Ports -> AVCEnc. Then select a specific AVCEnc x/x.

The parameters of the MPEG-4 AVC Ultracompression Single Slot Encoder SD advanced statistics are the same as those of the configuration, see page 272, with the addition of the parameter Serial Number under the Encoder Service Infor-mation section and the sections: License State and Used Licenses. The fields of these sections are as follows.

Serial Number: Provides the serial number of the encoder to be used to get the parameter below, the License key.



• HD Premium





• VBR Operation







274


275


Physical Output PortsThe iPlex currently supports one physical output port: ASIOut.

ASIOut General Configuration and Statis-tics

ConfiguringASIOut

The ASIOut Configuration page allows you to configure ASI Output port inter-faces. Select Configuration from the menu. You can find the ASIOut configura-tion page under either Ports or the MCM blade.

After completing the configuration, click Apply. For information on using the buttons at the top of the screen, see Screen Navigation Buttons on page 171.

Interface ASIOut Description: Enter an arbitrary description string (a label) for this port (optional).

Output Bit Rate (bps): Type the output bit rate. Max 160 Mbps shared between both ports; the range is 0 to 160 000 000 bps

ASI Output Packet Size: Select the output packet size, 188 or 204.

Transport Stream This section contains specific MPEG or DVB parameters, when you select MPEG only the Transport Stream ID and Output Stream Type display.

Transport Stream ID: Type the Transport Stream Identifier number.Output Stream Type: Select the type of output stream: MPEG or DVB.

276


If you Enable CAT Generation, enter the following parameters: CA System ID, EMM PID, and Private Data (hexadecimal format). Click Add for each entry. To delete an entry, select the Delete check box and click the Delete button.

When you select DVB Output Stream Type, the following additional parameters display:

Network ID: Type the Network Identifier number

Enable SDT Generation: Select to enable SDT generation.

Enable TDT Generation: Select to enable TDT generation.

If enabled, an additional parameter, Time Zone, displays, for which you canselect Local or UTC.

Enable TOT Generation: Select to enable TOT generation.

If enabled, the following fields will display.

Country Code: Type the code for the country.

Country Region ID: Type the country region identification number.

Local Time Offset Polarity: Select to enable the local time offset polarity.

SDT (Service Description Table) ADVB SI table that contains

descriptions of the services in thesystem e.g. names of services, the

service provider, etc.

TDT (Time and Date Table) A DVB SItable that gives information relating to

the present time and date. Thisinformation is given a separate table

due to the frequent updating of thisinformation.

TOT (Time Offset Table) A DVB SItable that contains time zone and

time offset information in relation tothe TDT.

NIT (Network Information Table) Atable that provides physical

information about the network.

277


Local Time Offset (hh:mm:ss): Type the time offset using the(hour:minute:second) format.

Date of Change (mm/dd/yyyy): Type the change date using the (month/day /year) format.

Time of Change (hh:mm:ss): Type the change time using the(hour:minute:second) format.

Next Local Time Offset (hh:mm:ss): Type the next time offset using the(hour:minute:second) format.

Enable NIT Generation: Select to enable NIT generation.

If enabled, the following fields will display: Network Name and NetworkDelivery Type (Satellite, Cable, or Terrestrial).

Satellite Delivery Selecting Satellite as the network delivery type displays the following parameters:

Frequency (GHz): Enter the RF feed frequency in gigahertz.Orbital Position (Degrees): Enter the satellite orbital position in degrees.West or East: Click the satellite direction.Polarization: Select the desired signal position: Linear-Horizontal, Linear-Verti-cal, Circular-Left or Circular-Right.Modulation: Gives the type of modulation: Gigabit.Symbol Rate (Msymbols/s): Enter the symbol rate in megasymbols per sec-ond.FEC Inner: Select the Inner Forward Error Correction rate: 1/2, 2/3, 3/4, 5/6, or 7/8.See DVB specification EN 300 468.

QPSK (Quadrature Phase ShiftKeying) A phase modulation

scheme used in satellite datatransmission. Bits are encoded in

sequential carrier phasetransitions.

278


Cable Delivery Selecting Cable as the network delivery type displays the following parameters.

Frequency (MHz): Enter the RF feed frequency in megahertz.FEC Outer: Select the desired Outer Forward Error Correction rate: No outer FEC coding or RS (204/188).Modulation: Gives the type of modulation: 16, 32, 64, 128 or 256 QAM.Symbol Rate (Msymbols/s): Enter the symbol rate in megasymbols per sec-ond.FEC Inner: Select the Inner Forward Error Correction rate: 1/2, 2/3, 3/4, 5/6, or 7/8.See DVB specification EN 300 468.

Terrestrial Delivery Selecting Terrestrial as the network delivery type displays the parameters shown below.

Center Frequency: Type center frequency: range is 10 to 42949672950.

Bandwidth (MHz): Select bandwidth in megahertz: 7 or 8.

Constellation: Select constellation: Gigabit, 16-QAM, or 64-QAM.

Hierarchy: Select hierarchy: Non-hierarchical, alpha = 1, alpha = 2, or alpha = 4.

HP Code Rate: Select HP code rate: 1/2, 2/3, 3/4, 5/6, or 7/8.

LP Code Rate: Select LP code rate: 1/2, 2/3, 3/4, 5/6, or 7/8.

Guard Interval: Select guard interval: 1/32, 1/16, 1/8, or 1/4.

Transmission Mode: Select transmission mode: 2k Mode, or 8k Mode.

Other Frequency Flag: Click radio button: No other frequency in use or One or more other frequency in use.

HP code rate (High Priority coderate) A high priority bit stream.

Two different code rates appliedto two different levels of themodulation have the aim of

achieving hierarchy.Transmission then starts with thecode rate for the HP level of the

modulation and ends with the onefor the LP level.

LP code rate (Low Priority coderate) A low priority bit stream.

Two different code rates appliedto two different levels of themodulation have the aim of

achieving hierarchy.Transmission then starts with thecode rate for the HP level of the

modulation and ends with the onefor the LP level.

279


See DVB specification EN 300 468.

ASIOut Statistics To view the statistics for the ASIOut select Statistics from the menu and select Ports. This will display the Summary Port List. Click the ASIOut link to display a list of all ASIOut ports, then select the specific port to view.

For information on using the buttons at the top of the screen, see Screen Naviga-tion Buttons on page 171. The configuration section describes most of the param-eters that appear on the statistics page; however, the following statistics will also display:

Firmware Version Main Processor: Shows firmware version for the main processor.

Aux Processor: Shows firmware version for the aux processor.

Revision ID: Board Revision ID; range: 0 - 255.

280


ASIOut Advanced Configuration and Sta-tisticsFrom an Output Port Configuration screen click Go > Advanced to display the Output Port Advanced Configuration screen.

ASIOut AdvancedConfiguration

The Output Port Advanced Configuration screen allows you to configure advanced parameters.

ASIOut Advancedparameters

Table ID: Select table from the drop-down list to add to the default None: NIT, NIT Other, SDT, or SDT Other. Use the ADD button to add a table, or Delete button if you need to delete a table.

Table Repetition Rate (msec): Enter a value; no range.

Descriptors In the next sections of the Output Port Advanced Configuration screen you can configure PMT Program Descriptors and PMT Element Descriptors for both MPEG and DVB streams. The DVB Output Stream adds NIT Network, NIT Transport, and SDT Descriptors.

NOTEThese descriptors do not pass through iPlex table processing; and therefore, if other aspects of the program are changed, such as PID numbers, the descriptors will not be altered to reflect these changes.

281


User-created descriptors take precedence over the same routed descriptor. Specific descriptors can be set for a particular output port. A descriptor created for an absent table is applied when the table is generated or routed. Descriptors are checked and suppression or overriding of existing descriptors is determined by the iPlex. For instance, for the PMT program descriptor, the program number will be checked to see if it already exists before it is generated. See the tables in the next section for a list of MPEG and DVB descriptor tags.

Adding Descriptors

To Add Descriptors1 From the Home menu, select Configuration > Ports.

2 From the Summary Port List screen, click the type of output port that youwant to work with (UDPOut, ASIOut, ATMOut, RTPOut, or Backhaul).

282


3 From the Chassis Port List Configuration screen, click the specific portthat you want to work with (e.g. ASIOut1/6).

4 In the Port Configuration screen, click Go > Advanced. Depending onwhich output stream type you are using, check the MPEG table on page 284or DVB table on page 285 for tags reference.

5 NIT descriptors can be either NIT Transport Descriptors (inner loop) usingTSID and a Tag, or NIT Network Descriptors (outer loop) using only a Tag.SDT descriptors use a Service ID. PMT descriptors have a Program Number.

Enter the following information:■ Program Number A 16-bit field that defines the different program elements

that belongs to a program.■ Tag (or Descriptor Tag) This is a 8 bit field that identifies a descriptor. See the

tables below.■ Element PID The Program Identification number. (Range 0x0010 - 0x1FFE).■ Data ASCII or hexadecimal descriptor data. The maximum acceptable data size

is 253 bytes.■ TSID Transport stream ID is a unique identifier of a TS within an original

network. (Range 1 - 65535).■ Hex If selected, use hexadecimal format in the data field. Otherwise, use an

ASCII string.■ Service ID A unique identifier of a service within a TS (Range 1 - 65535).

After the required information is entered for a particular descriptor, click Add toenable that descriptor. When you have added all the descriptors that you need set,click Apply at the bottom of the screen to apply all changes.

Deleting Descriptors To delete a descriptor

1 Click the Delete button beside the descriptor that you want to delete.

2 Click Apply to apply the changes to your configuration.

283


Descriptor Tags as per MPEG Specifications

Descriptor Tag Description

0x00 Reserved

0x01 Reserved

0x02 Video stream

0x03 Audio stream

0x04 Hierarchy

0x05 Registration

0x06 Datastream alignment

0x07 Target background grid

0x08 Video window

0x09 Conditional access

0x0A ISO 639 language

0x0B System clock

0x0C Multiplex buffer utilization

0x0D Copyright

0x0E Maximum bit rate

0x0F Private data indicator

0x10 Smoothing buffer

0x11 System target decoder (STD)

0x12 IBP

0x13-0x1A ISO/IEC defined in 13818-6

0x1B MPEG-4 Video

0x1C MPEG-4 Audio

0x1D Initial object descriptor

0x1E SL

0x1F FMC

0x20 External ES ID

continued

284


Descriptor Tags as per DVB Specifications

0x21 MuxCode

0x22 FMX Buffer Size

0x23 Multiplex Buffer

0x24-0x3F ITU-T Rec. H.22.0 | ISO/IEC 13818-8 Reserved

0x40-0xFF User Private


0x40 Network name

0x41 Service list

0x42 Stuffing

0x43 Satellite delivery system

0x44 Cable delivery system

0x45 Reserved for future use

0x46 Reserved for future use

0x47 Bouquet name

0x48 Service

0x49 Country availability

0x4A Linkage

0x4B NVOD reference

0x4C Time-shifted service

0x4D Short event

0x4E Extended event

0x4F Time-shifted event

0x50 Component

0x51 Mosaic

continued


285


Actual-Other TableCorrection andRepetition Rate

In DVB systems, a transport stream may contain “actual” and “other” tables. iPlex will parse incoming NIT or SDT tables and compare the configured Transport Stream ID and Network ID. The table that matches the parameters will be modi-

0x52 Stream identifier

0x53 CA identifier

0x54 Content

0x55 Parental rating

0x56 Teletext support

0x57 Telephone

0x58 Local time offset

0x59 Subtitling

0x5A Terrestrial Delivery System

0x5B Multilingual network name

0x5C Multilingual bouquet name

0x5D Multilingual service name

0x5E Multilingual Component

0x5F Private data specifier

0x60 Service move

0x61 Short smoothing buffer

0x62 Frequency list

0x63 Partial transport stream

0x64 Data broadcast

0x65 CA system integrator

0x66 Data broadcast

0x67-0x7F Reserved for futre beat

0x80-0xFE User-defined

0xFF Forbidden


286


fied to become the “actual” table and all remaining unmatching tables are modified where necessary to be “other tables.”

TABLE: PIDs and Table IDs for NIT/SDT Actual/Other

Setting Actual-OtherTable Correction

To set Actual-Other Table Correction:

1 Select Configuration, then Ports, then ASIOut (for example).

2 Select the specific port, such as ASIOut1/6 (for example).

3 As the Output Stream Type, select DVB. The Actual-Other parameterdisplays.

4 Select the Actual-Other Table Correction check box to activate it.

Setting the TableRepetition Rate

To set the table repetition rate:

1 In the Transport Stream screen, click Advanced.

2 Enter the Table ID and the Table Repetition Rate (msec) in the two fieldsprovided.

Click Add.

ASIOut AdvancedStatistics

To view descriptor settings, select Statistics from the menu at the left, or from the Mode button from the Output Port Advanced Configuration screen. The fol-lowing screenshot is an Advanced Statistics screen for the DVB Output Stream.

NOTEActual-Other Table Correction is available on all output ports.

SI Table Type

DVB fixed PID

Actual Table ID

Other Table ID

SDT 0x11 0x42 0x46

NIT 0x10 0x40 0x41

287


288


Creating Logical PortsTo create a new logical port select Configuration from the menu and select the first menu item New Port. This will display the Create Network Port page. Then select the port type from the drop-down menu.

Port Type: Select one of the ports from the drop-down list shown above.

Once you select the Port Type, enter the appropriate information.

Port Number: Type applicable port number.

Input Blade: Select the MCM blade you want to use.

Interface/GE: Select the interface that receives IP traffic.

Data Type: Select the data packetizer type you want to use: Data Pipe, Section, or M2T.

When all required fields are entered, click Create.

NOTES1. IPv6 addressing is available as an option only for the UDPOutand RTPOut ports with multicast destination address. See IPv6Support on page 45.2. If you do not have a physical ATM submodule installed in yourchassis, you will not have the option to create an ATMIn or ATMOutport.3. The Data Type packetizer cannot be changed once the port is created. If you need to change it, delete the port and re-create it with the desired Data Type Packetizer.

289


Logical Input PortsMost logical input port configurations seen in this chapter use Gigabit Ethernet interfaces. However, when using Network Interface an additional port parameter displays: the ATM Port Association. For most examples, the M2T packetizer is used as the data type, which allows the user to select the input stream type as DVB or MPEG. Network input ports (UDPIn, TCPIn, and RTPIn) receive their data from IP packets. Generally, IP packets can have unicast or multicast destination addresses. For proper operation of the input port, you must exercise care to ensure the deliv-ery of IP packets. In the case of unicast packets, this may impose additional requirements in the data source and in the network infrastructure surrounding the iPlex. The following paragraphs describe the special considerations for the cases of IP packets delivery.

Unicast traffic delivered over ATM: Send packets to the IP address assigned to the ATMInterface, in the appropriate PVC.

Multicast traffic delivered over ATM: No special requirements. iPlex will join the specified group and will respond to IGMP group memberships requests. You must specify the appropriate PVC.

Unicast traffic delivered over Gigabit Ethernet: This is the most restrictive case. Each MCM has an internal backplane IP address, and unicast packets should go to this address. Moreover, the underlying network connected to the iPlex needs to route these packets properly. More specifically, follow these steps:

1 Configure the data source to send the traffic to the internal backplane IPaddress of the blade where the user created the port. This address is in theport statistics page.

NOTES1. Most Classical IP over ATM implementations do not supportmulticast (although the iPlex does), so this may not work in RouterMode.2. As the chassis receives multicast packets over ATM, by default those packets are forwarded to the backplane, in addition to being delivered to the UDPIn port that is listening to them. This is done to have these packets available for further routing, as required. How-ever, if many such ports are created, the process of receiving, pro-cessing the transport stream, sending it out, and sending another copy of the original packets may overload the MCM. In these cases, you have the option of turning off the forwarding of received multi-casts into the backplane, thus leaving more processing power avail-able for additional ports. This is done globally for the interface (that is, the entire ATMInterface). This control is the Forward Received Multicasts checkbox, found in the interface configuration screen. See Interface ATM on page 151 for a description of this control.

290


2 Deliver the actual packets to one of the iPlex Gigabit Ethernet ports. Youshould configure this port as part of a VLAN.

3 Configure the IP address of one of the Gigabit Ethernet VLANs as the next-hop gateway for the blade IP address, either in the data source or in the routerconnected to that VLAN.

Blade IP addresses default to the 172.17.1.0/24 range, which is one of theprivate ranges defined in RFC 1918. If that conflicts with your network, youcan reconfigure the backplane address.

Multicast traffic delivered over Gigabit Ethernet: One of the parameters in the port creation is the VLAN (only for UDPIn and RTPIn; TCPIn does not support multicast). The network infrastructure must deliver the multicast packets to any ports in the selected VLAN. The iPlex will respond to IGMP queries for the address.

Unicast traffic delivered over ASI: For UDPIn ports over ASI (that is, ports receiving UDP packets carried over MPEG), you must send the packets to the IP address of the SMD interface associated with it. Also, the packet’s destination MAC address must match the interface’s MAC address, and you must configure the SMD interface to listen on the appropriate PID.

Multicast traffic delivered over ASI: Similar to the previous case, but without the need of matching the destination address. You must configure the SMD inter-face to listen on the appropriate PID.

Other logical input ports include FileIn (files present in the iPlex and spooled) and ATMIn (data received over Native ATM on AAL-5 PDUs).

TCPIn Ports Configuration and Statistics

ConfiguringTCPIn

In this configuration, TCPIn port uses the Gigabit Ethernet interface and the M2T packetizer. Selecting the M2T packetizer allows you to select the input stream type. If you select the DVB stream type (as depicted in the screenshot that follows), you can additionally configure the port to parse the SDT and NIT. For details, see Con-figuring ASIIn on page 174. After configuring the port, click Apply to effect the settings.

291



Port Parameters Port Name: Shows the name and location of the interface.

Port Type: Shows type of port.

Packetizer: Shows packetizer being used.

Configuration TCPIn Description: Enter an arbitrary description string (i.e., a label) for this port. This has no influence on iPlex operation.

Port Number: Type port number.

TCP Flow Control: If selected, another field will display in which you can specify a bit rate and the TCPIn device will exercise flow control to throttle the data source and limit the bit rate to the configured value. If TCP Flow Control is not selected, the device will allow the data source to send data as fast as supported by the iPlex and the intervening network.

TCP Bit Rate (bps): This field only displays if TCP Flow Control is selected. Specify the bit rate in bits per second. Range 0 - 160000000 (default 160000000).

Transport Stream For packetizer parameter details, see Transport Stream on page 403.

If you select TCPIn over ATM there will not be any additional parameters to con-figure. See the following note for details.

292


TCPIn Statistics To view the statistics for the TCPIn port, select the Statistics from the menu and select Ports. This will display the Summary Port List. Click the TCPIn link to display a list of all TCPIn ports, then select the specific port.


The configuration section describes most of the parameters that appear on the sta-tistics page; however, the following statistic also displays:

IP Address: Shows the target IP address to which you should direct the stream.

NOTE ON TCPIn PORTS OVER ATMThe TCPIn port supports operation over ATM. Since the TCP protocol itself does not support multicast operation, the TCPIn port over ATM will use whatever PVC is configured for unicast traffic for that particular physi-cal port. The exact details of this operation are a function of the mode set for the ATM adapter (routed or bridged), as follows:—If the ATM adapter is in bridged mode, all TCP traffic will use the default PVC. Since the iPlex does not support the concept of a next-hop gateway in bridged mode, in practice this limits TCPIn external endpoints (i.e., data sources) to the subnet defined for the ATM adapter.—If the ATM adapter is in routed mode, the TCP traffic will use the ATM routing table. Packets will use whatever PVCs are defined to reach the destination subnetwork, or the default PVC if there is no specific route.

293


ConfiguringExternal Data

Sources toConnect to the

iPlex

External data sources that provide TCP data must be configured to connect to the internal backplane address of the blade where the port has been created. This is the field displayed in the “IP Address” field of the TCPIn statistics page.

IP Tunneling forTCPIn Port

The iPlex accepts incoming TCP connections to a specified port. Once the con-nection is established, the iPlex expects that the TCP bitstream will contain Layer-3 IP packets. These packets are then converted to MPEG transport packets using the Multiprotocol Encapsulation defined in ETSI EN 301 192. If the iPlex does not recognize IP packets in the bitstream, the connection is forcefully dropped.

To create a TCPIn port with the IP Tunneling packetizer:

1 In the Configuration menu, click New Port.

2 Select TCPIn as the port.

3 Enter the port number.

4 Select the input blade.

5 In the data type list, click IP Tunneling.

6 Click Create.

NOTEThe data source or the network infrastructure must contain a route for this IP address, with the desired SCM gigabit port as the next hop gateway. Please see the “Logical Input Ports” section found on page 290.

NOTEThere are no standards for tunneling IP packets over a TCP connec-tion. To use this feature, you must have an application that has been designed for it: either a custom application that you have written or TANDBERG Television’s zBand Server.

294


The configuration window is shown below:


Along with the new packetizer IP Tunneling, the TCPIn port has two additional parameters for flow control:

• TCP Flow Control: If selected, another field will display in which you can specify a bit rateand the TCPIn device will exercise flow control to throttle the data source and limit the bitrate to the configured value. If TCP Flow Control is not selected, the device will allow thedata source to send data as fast as supported by the iPlex and the intervening network.

• TCP Bit Rate (bps): This field only displays if TCP Flow Control is selected. Specify the bitrate in bits per second. Range 0 - 160000000 (default 160000000).

IP TunnelingParameters

PID: Enter the PID number as a hexadecimal. Range: 0x0 - 0x1ffe

IP Mapping MAC Address: If this box is not selected, the MPE destination MAC address of the injected packets will be given by the MAC Address field. If this box is selected, the MPE destination MAC address will be built as follows:

NOTETCP flow control (and reliability) is between the Data Source and the iPlex Input Port. In general, the MPEG transport packets gener-ated by the TCPIn port are stream-routed to one or more output ports. If there is not enough bandwidth in the port to accommo-date these packets, they will be dropped.

295


• For multicast packets, the MAC address is built as per RFC-1112.

• For unicast packets, the MAC address is built by taking the first two bytes specified in the“MAC Address” field and appending the four-byte IP address to them.

MAC Address: Enter the MAC address to be used.

Section Packing: If this box is selected, the MPE sections will be packed.

TCPIn Statistics -IP Tunneling

After configuring the port you can view the port statistics by selecting the Statis-tics >Ports. In the Summary Ports List, click TCPIn link for the list of TCPIn ports, then select the specific port; for example, TCPIn1/0. The following screen-shot shows TCPIn1/0 statistics.


The following additional statistics for IP Tunneling are available:

• IP Packets Generated: Shows the number of IP packets generated and forwarded.

• IP Packets Discarded: Shows the number of IP packets that are discarded because they areinvalid (wrong IP header checksum, or wrong IP version - only IPv4 is supported).

• Bytes Dropped: Number of bytes dropped before finding a valid IP Datagram.

NOTETCP connections are forcefully dropped if no IP packets are found; these statistics will display the number of bytes read from the con-nection and then discarded.

296


Routing TCPInData to One or

More OutputPorts

Once the selected port is receiving data, the resulting transport packets must be routed to one (or more, if you wish) output ports. TCPIn data with the IP Tunnel-ing Packetizer is typically routed to an ASI Output port, but there are no restric-tions - you can route it to any output port. Since there are no tables associated with this input, you will need to use a stream route.

NOTEIt is your responsibility to ensure that the output port has enough bandwidth to accommodate the stream.For example, if you are routing a TCPIn port to an ASI Output, where the available bandwidth is only 2 Mb/s, turn on TCP flow con-trol in the port and set up a maximum of 2 Mb/s, thus ensuring that all the packets are injected. If you try to inject more packets than available bandwidth, transport packets will be dropped in the output port, even though TCP ensures that they are properly delivered to the input port.

NOTEIt is recommended that, if at all possible, the TCPIn port be located in the same blade as the intended output, to optimize backplane routing.

297


UDPIn Port Configuration and Statistics

ConfiguringUDPIn

In this configuration, UDPIn port uses the Gigabit Ethernet interface and the M2T packetizer. Selecting the M2T packetizer allows you to select the input stream type. If you select the DVB stream type, you can additionally configure the port to parse the SDT and NIT. For details, see Configuring ASIIn on page 174. After entering parameters, click Apply.



Port Type: Shows type of port.Packetizer: Shows packetizer being used.

Configuration UDPIn Description: Enter an arbitrary description string (a label) for this port. This has no influence on iPlex operation.

Port Number: Type applicable port number.

Sync Detect Timeout: If a UDPIn port stops receiving data, it will declare loss of signal (which, in the iPlex, is called “loss of sync”). You can configure the signal loss timeout here (the period of time that the UDPIn needs to wait before it will

298


declare the loss of signal). Once the port declares loss of sync, the table informa-tion for the port is reset and a log entry is generated.

Multicast IP Address IP Address: Type the multicast IP address for the port, or enter 0.0.0.0 to restrict it to unicast traffic only.

VLAN Name: Select the VLAN name, if applicable (not available using Network Interface, such as ATM).

Transport Stream For packetizer parameter details, see Transport Stream on page 403.

If you select the network interface, you can choose ATM or SMD for the UDPIn port. The following additional parameters will display:

Multicast IP Addressover ATM

Multicast IP Address over ATM: Enter IP address of the selected multicast group, or 0.0.0.0 if you want only unicast reception.



Multicast IP Addressover SMD

Multicast IP Address over SMD: Enter IP address of the selected multicast group, or 0.0.0.0 if you want only unicast reception.

NOTEFor unicast delivery the default value 0.0.0.0 is required. Once you have created this port you can locate the appropriate IP address to direct your data traffic from the port statistics screen.

299


UDPIn Statistics To view the statistics for the UDPIn port select the Statistics from the menu and select Ports. This will display the Summary Port List. Click the UDPIn link to display a list of all UDPIn ports, then, select the specific port.


The configuration section describes most of the parameters that appear on the sta-tistics page; however, the following statistic also displays:

IP Address: Shows IP address of the blade. Use this address as the destination for unicast traffic.

RTPIn Port Configuration and Statistics

ConfiguringRTPIn

When creating the RTPIn port, you will not have a Data Type to select, instead this port has a check box to Enable RTCP. The RTP port behaves differently than the other input ports: when you enter the Port Number, you must use an even number—the system will automatically create a control port using the odd number. RTP ports only accept Transport Streams.

Enable RTCP: Select check box to enable RTCP.

300


After completing the configuration, click the Create button.


Configuration RTPIn RTP Recv Port: Shows the receiving port number entered at time of creation.

RTP ReportDestination

IP Address: Type IP address for destination server.

Port Number: Type port number for destination.

VLAN Name: Select the VLAN name, if applicable—not available when using a Network Interface, such as ATM.

RTP Link Reliability Link Reliability: Select None, Retransmission, or FEC from the drop-down box. Packets transmitted over an IP network may drop in transit for a variety of reasons. The RTPIn/Out ports have provisions to try to recover from these packet losses. The provisions are as follows:

• None: No recovery provided.

• Retransmission: If the receiving port detects packet loss, it will request a retransmission. Ifthe sender still has the original packet it will re-send. RTCP Negative Acknowledgementmessages defined in the H.261 RTP profile, RFC 2032, request retransmission.

• FEC: The sender transmits additional packets used to reconstruct the lost data. The protocolused is the RTP Generic Profile for Forward Error Correction, RFC 2733.

Received Buffer Size Received Buffer Size: Enter the received buffer size, in packets. This buffer is used for resequencing packets if they arrive out of order. Also, if you select Link Reliability as “Retransmission”, this buffer is used to hold the data until the retransmitted packet is received. In that case, you should set this buffer to an amount of packets at least equal to the round-trip delay of your network.

RTP (Real-time TransportProtocol) An IP protocol that

supports real-time transmission ofvoice and video.

RTCP (RTP Control Protocol) Acompanion protocol to RTP that is

used to maintain QoS.

301



Transport Stream For packetizer parameter expanded details, see Transport Stream on page 403. If you select an ATM network interface for RTPIn, the following parameters display.

RTP Report Destination over ATMIP Address: Enter the destination IP address for the RTP reports.

Port Number: Enter the port number.

302


VPI: Enter the Virtual Path Identifier for the PVC used in this route.

VCI: Enter the Virtual Circuit Identifier for the PVC used in this route.

RTPIn Statistics To view the statistics for the RTPIn port, select Statistics from the menu and then select Ports. This will display the Summary Port List. Click the RTPIn link to display a list of RTPIn ports, then select the specific port.



303


RTP Recv Port: Shows the receive port number entered at time of creation.IP Address: Shows IP address of the receiver (user must specify this IP address to send unicast data to the iPlex).

RTP ReportDestination

IP Address: Shows IP address of the destination server.Port Number: Shows the port number of the destination server.VLAN Name: Shows the VLAN name, if applicable—not available when using a Network Interface, such as ATM).

RTP Link Reliability Link Reliability: Shows the selected method as None, Retransmission, or FEC.

Received Buffer Size Received Buffer Size: Shows the received buffer size.

RTCP SourceInformation

Shows sender information when the sender has RTCP enabled. The information contains CSRC number, Name, Email, Location, and Phone Number.

RTPInput Statistic Shows the CSRC number, Packets Received and the (high/low) sequence number of the last RTP packet.

RTCP Sender Report Shows the RTCP report which includes the CSRC number, Packet Count, Bytes Count and the Receive Time.

304


ATMIn Port Configuration and Statistics

ConfiguringATMIn

When creating the native ATMIn port, you must associate it with a physical Net-work Interface (ATM submodule).


Port Parameters Port Name: The name for the port based on the port type, blade and slot.

Port Type: The type of port (RTPIn, TCPIn, UDPIn, etc).

Port Association: Shows the ATM submodule interface associated with ATMIn.

Configuration ATMIn Description: Enter an arbitrary description string (a label) for this port. This has no influence on iPlex operation.

VCI: Gives Virtual Circuit Identifier for this route (ATM only).

VPI: Gives Virtual Path Identifier for this route (ATM only).

Sync Detect Timeout: If a UDPIn port stops receiving data it will declare loss of signal (which, in the iPlex, is called “loss of sync”). You can configure the signal loss timeout here (the period of time that the UDPIn needs to wait before it will


305


declare the loss of signal). Once the port declares loss of sync, the table informa-tion for the port is reset and a log entry is generated.

Transport Stream For packetizer parameter expanded details, see Transport Stream on page 403.

ATMIn Statistics To view the statistics for the native ATMIn port select the Statistics from the main menu and then select Ports. This will display the Summary Port List. Click the ATMIn link to display a list of all ATMIn ports, then select the specific port.


306


FileIn Port Configuration and Statistics

Configuring FileIn Before you create the FileIn port, you must load your files on to the PCMCIA Flash using the Download Data File under the Configuration menu (see Data File on page 127). Then you can view the Data Files by selecting Show Data File under the Statistics menu. You should copy the file name and location exactly as it appears so you can enter it into the File Name text box.

After adding parameters, click Apply. For information on using the buttons atthe top of the screen, see Screen Navigation Buttons on page 171.

Enable File Spooling: Enable to start the file spooling.

File Name: Type the location and file name of the saved file.

Bit Rate (bps): Specify the transmission bit rate required.

Transport StreamFor DVB Parsing parameters expanded details, see Transport Stream on page 403.

307


FileIn Statistics To view the statistics for the FileIn port select the Statistics from the menu and then select Ports. This will display the Summary Port List. Click the FileIn link to display a list of FileIn ports, then select the specific port.

308


Logical Output PortsLogical output ports always have an association. If the intention of this port is to output over Gigabit Ethernet, its logical association is with an input port (UDPIn, Backhaul, RTPIn, ASIIn, ATMIn, or Encoder). This logical association gives a “limit” to the iPlex as to which input port will provide the data for routing so that the iPlex can optimize its internal routing. If the intention of this port is to output over ATM, then its logical association is with the particular ATM submodule it will use—these ports have no input restrictions. ATMOut ports are an exception in the sense that they always have an association with an ATM submodule. For the remainder of this section, the examples use ports with a Gigabit Ethernet output and an ASIIn association.

CBR PaddingLogical output ports have the capability of padding the output bitstream in all net-working outputs (UDPOut, RTPOut, ATMOut and Backhaul) to make it a CBR (constant bit rate) stream. When enabled, this feature causes the output port to add NULL packets to the outgoing transport stream to make it CBR.

A CBR stream can support interoperability with legacy devices that are incapable of VBR (variable bit rate) operations. PCRs (Program Clock References) are also re-stamped to match the outgoing rate.

Configuring CBRPadding

To configure the CBR padding function, do the following in the Transport Stream section of a logical Port Configuration page (shown below).

NOTE If a logical output port (for example, UDPOut) is associated with a logical input port (for example, UDPIn), the logical input port cannot be deleted until the associated logical output port(s) is (are) deleted. For example, if you create UDPIn1/0 and then create UDPOut1/0 and UDPOut1/1, both associated with UDPIn1/0 and then attempt to delete UDPIn1/0, this operation will fail (regardless of whether or not there are routes between these ports).

NOTEThis feature requires the presence of at least one PCR flow in the stream routed to the output port.

309


Enable CBR Padding: Check this box to enable the function. If the function is enabled, a new field appears where you can configure the desired stream rate.

CBR Padding Bit Rate (bps): Enter the desired overall rate in bits per second.

CBR PaddingStatistics

Once CBR Padding is enabled, the statistics page for the port contains additional information about the status of the PCR padding function activity (see below). This information is useful in solving problems related to CBR padding.

Transport StreamEnable CBR Padding: Indicates with Yes or No whether the CBR Padding function is enabled or disabled.

CBR Padding Bit Rate (bps): If CBR Padding is enabled, this field is present and shows the configured target bit rate.

CBR Padding StatisticsThis section is present if CBR padding is enabled. The fields are event counts, and their meanings are as follows.

NOTE When configuring this feature:• MPORTANT: Make sure that the overall bit rate must be higher than the peak rate

of the stream coming out of the port.This function is not capable of reducing the bit rate of a bitstream to be compatible with a given padding level. If you need such a reduction, you need to have a transrater installed in your system. The CBR pad-ding function can smooth instantaneous peaks, but you run the risk of loosing buffer model compliance (and PCR interval compliance). If the incoming rate is higher than the configured padding rate for an extended period of time, there will be data loss.

• The padding function depends on PCRs to operate. If the bitstream does notcontain PCRs, it cannot be CBR-padded.

At the network level, the resulting packet stream will be CBR within 100 millisecond windows.

310


Invalid PCR Instances: In normal operation, this count is expected to stay at zero. A non-zero count here indicates a potential problem with the stream source. On satellite feeds, this may indicate noise or corruption in the feed. It is uncom-mon to see a count of invalid PCRs.

PCR Discontinuity Instances: In normal operation, this count is expected to stay at zero. A non-zero count may be a symptom of a misconfigured upstream source, or a satellite feed that is going in and out of lock.

PCR Timeout Instances: This count indicates the number of times a PCR disap-peared from the stream. This may be a normal event: for example, if an encoder is reconfigured, it will stop streaming for a short period of time and cause this count to increment. Another situation is when a service is active only during certain times of the day: this count will increment every time the service disappears. If this count is non-zero and that is unexpected, the upstream sources must be checked.

Input Rate Too High Instances: This count must always be zero. If it is non-zero, it indicates that the stream in the port exceeded the configured CBR padding rate. This must be addressed by either reducing the bit rate of the sources, or by increasing the value in the CBR Padding Bit Rate field.

Buffer Allocation Failures: This count must be always zero. If it is ever non-zero, please contact TANDBERG Television Customer Support.

Null Packets Inserted: This count must always increment. It records the number of null packets added to the output to reach the desired rate.

PCR Packets Inserted: This count may or may not increment. The output port may insert “extra” PCR packets to maintain DVB PCR interval compliance after re-stamping. It is not an error to have a non-zero count here. See NOTE that fol-lows.

CBR PaddingOperation

The CBR padding is performed as follows:

1 NULL packets are added at the right places in the bitstream to make it CBR.

2 PCRs are corrected to reflect the fact that the bitstream is CBR.

This function can also insert extra PCR packets to maintain the DVB compliance, that is, to insure the 40 millisecond maximum PCR interval.

NOTEThere will be a problem in the output every time this counterincreases.

NOTE If you have PCRs in a separate PID and this count is incrementing, you will see a higher bit rate in the PCR PID than the input rate. Again, this is normal and no action is required.

311


Output Port Advanced ConfigurationLogical output ports have an Output Port Advanced Configuration screen that provides parameters for enabling descriptors and setting the table ID, as well as setting the repetition rate. Specific descriptors can be set for a particular output port. Not all parameters apply to all descriptors. See the specific descriptors below to determine which descriptors use which parameters. Example of Output Port Advanced Configuration screen follows.

Repetition Rate To set the repetition rate parameters, enter Table ID and the Table Repetition Rate and click Add.

Table ID: Select table ID: None, NIT, NIT Other, SDT, SDT Other.

Table Repetition Rate (msec): Type the Table Repetition Rate in milliseconds.

The repetition rate is the duration between sending the table in milliseconds. If you enter a value of 100, then the table will be repeated 10 times a second: 10 * 100 = 1000mS.

PMT ProgramDescriptor

Prog No: A 16-bit field that defines the different program elements that belong to a program.

312


Tag: An 8-bit field that identifies a descriptor. See the MPEG and DVB descrip-tor tables, page 284 and page 285.

Data: ASCII or hexadecimal descriptor data. The maximum acceptable size is 253 bytes.

Hex: A check box, that if selected, applies hexadecimal format to the Data field.

PMT ElementDescriptor

This descriptor has the following parameters: Prog No, Element PID, Tag, Data, and Hex.

NIT Network Descriptor: This descriptor has the following parameters: Tag, Data, and Hex.

NIT Transport Descriptor: This descriptor has the following parameters: TSID, Tag, Data, and Hex.

SDT Descriptor: This descriptor has the following parameters: Service ID, Tag, Data, and Hex.

After all of the information is entered or checked for a particular descriptor, click Add.

To delete a descriptor, click Delete beside the descriptor to be deleted, then click Apply for the changes to be applied to your configuration. The Delete button is only displayed beside descriptors that are already added.

When you finish with all of the descriptors, click Apply.

NOTEThese descriptors do not pass through Mediaplex table processingand, therefore, if other aspects of the program are changed, such asPID numbers, the descriptors will not be altered to reflect thesechanges.

313


UDPOut Port Configuration and Statistics

ConfiguringUDPOut

In the UDPOut port configuration page enter the appropriate parameters for TOS Bit Field, TTL Value, Destination IP Address, and Port Number, then select a VLAN, Enable SAP SDP, type the Transport Stream ID, select the Output Stream Type, and, if desired, Enable CAT Generation.

After adding parameters, click Apply. For information on using the buttons at the top of the screen, see Screen Navigation Buttons on page 171.


Port Type: Shows type of port.

Port Association: Shows the port associated with UDPOut.

314


ConfigurationUDPOut

Description: Enter an arbitrary description string (a label) for this port. This has no influence on iPlex operation.

Internet Protocol: IPv4 or IPv6 destination address.

TOS Bit Field: Type the value of the TOS bit field.

TTL Value: Type the TTL value, which is the number of hops the packet can have before being discarded.

IP Destination Destination IP Address: Enter IP address of destination.

Port Number: Enter port number of destination.

VLAN Name: Select a VLAN.

Enable SAP SDP Enable SAP SDP: Click this box and the following parameters will display: Ses-sion Name, Session Description, Session E-mail, Session Phone Number, Multi-cast Address, Session Port Number and a check box to initiate the session.

TOS (Type Of Service) A field inan IP packet (IP datagram) that isused for quality of service (QoS).

TTL (Time To Live) This valuedecrements each time the IP

frame moves through a router.When the number reaches the

value of zero, the stream isdiscarded.

NOTEThe port will be created even if you do not enter a valid IP address or click Apply. However, make sure you do have a valid IP address.

SAP (Session AnnouncementProtocol) An IETF protocol for

distributing session descriptionmessages to potential recipients.

It is used to send SDP messages.

SDP (Session DescriptionProtocol) An IETF protocol thatdefines a text-based message

format for describing amultimedia session. Data such as

version number, contactinformation, broadcast times andaudio and video encoding types

are included in the message.

NOTEEnable SAP SDP is not available on UDPOut ports created over SME.

315


If you select ATM as the network interface when creating the UDPOut port, the following parameters will display:

IP Destination OverATM

IP Address: Enter IP address of destination.

Port Number: Enter port number of destination.



ATM Traffic Class

ATM Traffic Class: Select UBR, VBR, or CBR from the drop-down list. If you select UBR, there are no additional parameters to enter. If you select CBR, you must specify the Bit Rate. If you select VBR, there are three additional parame-ters—Peak Bit Rate, Sustained Bit Rate, Maximum Burst Size.

Bit Rate (bps): Enter the bit rate value in bits per second (CBR only).

Peak Bit Rate (bps): Enter the peak bit rate value in bits per second (VBR only).

Sustained Bit Rate (bps): Enter the sustained bit rate value in bits per second (VBR only).

Max Burst Size: Enter the maximum burst size (VBR only).


UBR (Unspecified Bit Rate) Anasynchronous transfer mode

(ATM) level of service that doesnot guarantee available

bandwidth. It is very efficient, butnot used for critical data.

CBR (Constant Bit Rate) Astream with constant short term

bit rate. The bit rate of thesestreams may only vary within a

very narrow range.

VBR (Variable Bit Rate) A streamwith varying short-term and longterm bit rates. The bit rate of thestream can vary randomly within

a well-defined range.

NOTETraffic shaping options (dropdown list) will not be available if the ATM Network Interface card is either ATM DS3 or ATM E3.

NOTEThe traffic class controls the traffic shaping at the iPlex ATMOutput. If you select a traffic class with parameters that are not appropriate for the outgoing traffic, there will be data loss. If in doubt, select UBR.

316


Additionally, if you select SME as the network interface for a UDPOut port, the following parameters will display:

IP Destination OverSME

Destination IP Address: Enter IP address of destination.Port Number: Enter port number of destination.PID: Type MPEG PID (hexadecimal) for this IP injection route.IP Mapping MAC Address: Select the check box for the IP address to form the MAC address and set the first and second MAC bytes.MAC Address: Type the MAC address of the next hop for this IP injection route.Discipline: Select the MPE discipline name. For more details, see Configuring SME on page 153.

Transport Stream Transportation Stream ID: Enter the ID.

Output Stream Type: Select MPEG or DVB.

Disable PSI Generation on Idle: Check the box to disable the PSI generation if stream bitrate is absent for more than 2 seconds. If stream bitrate is again detected while table spooling is suppressed, the PSI generation is resumed.

Enable CBR Padding: Check the box to enable. If enabled, the following param-eter shows up:


For more details about the CBR Padding function, see CBR Padding on page 309.

NOTEMake sure that the overall rate routed to this port is lower than the rate specified here.

317


UDPOut Statistics To view the statistics for the UDPOut port select Statistics from the menu and select Ports. This will display the Summary Port List. Click the UDPOut link to display a list of all UDPOut ports, then select a specific port to view.

To obtain current data, click the Reset Counters button. For information on using the buttons at the top of the screen, see Screen Navigation Buttons on page 171.

IF the CBR Padding function is enabled, a number of the function’s statistics parameters appear in the Transport Stream section of the UDPOut Port Statis-tics page. For these parameters, see CBR Padding Statistics on page 310.

The configuration section describes most of the parameters that appear on the sta-tistics page; however, the following statistics will also display:

UDPOut Statistics Bytes Sent: Shows the number of bytes sent.

318


UDP Packets Sent: Shows the number of UDP packets sent.

UDP Packets Dropped: Shows the number of UDP packets dropped.

TS Packets Forwarded: Shows the number of TS packets forwarded.

TS Packets Dropped: Shows the number of TS packets dropped.

ES UDP Packets sent: Shows the number of ES packets forwarded.

ES UDP Packets Dropped: Shows the number of ES packets dropped.

Streams/ProgramsList

For Streams and Programs Lists, see Programs, Elements and Streams List Statistics on page 406.

Configuring aUDP Backhaul

Port

This port is designed to be used to build a multi-program transport stream over UDP on Gigabit Ethernet using programs from multiple blades.

The iPlex UDPOut Gigabit Ethernet port is associated with a particular input defined at the time of creation of the port. Only programs from that input are available for routing. This optimizes internal routing in the iPlex.

Third-party devices not capable of multiplexing programs from multiple multicast-ing streams require a single MPTS with all the programs, unless you use the iPlex and standard UDPOut or RTPOut ports to send streams between the iPlexes.

To create a Backhaul port:The Backhaul port is created the same way as any other logical port.

1 Select Configuration, then select New Port.

2 From the Port Type drop-down menu, select Backhaul.

3 From the Output Blade drop-down menu, select the blade.

4 Click Create.

5 Once the port is created, continue to configure it as you would any otherUDPOut port. See UDPIn Port Configuration and Statistics on page 298.

The Statistics screens are the same as for other UDPOut ports.

319


RTPOut Configuration and Statistics

ConfiguringRTPOut

When creating the RTPOut port, optionally Enable RTCP. The RTP port behaves differently than the other output ports. Enter the Port Number using an even number and the system will automatically create a control port.

Enable RTCP: Select check box to enable RTCP.

After completing the configuration, click the Create button.


NOTEIf you receive a message saying that the iPlex cannot create the port, make sure the port number is an even number and that it is not being used by another port. Some ports may also be used internally by the system and will not be available. It is recommended that you use port numbers over 2000.

320


321


Port Parameters Port Name: Shows the name and location of the interface.Port Type: Shows type of port.Port Association: Shows the associated port sending the data.

ConfigurationRTPOut

Description: Enter an arbitrary description string (i.e., a label) for this port. This has no influence on iPlex operation.RTP Recv Port: Shows receive port number entered at time of creation.

Internet Protocol: IPv4 or IPv6 destination address.TOS Bit Field: Type the value of the TOS bit field.TTL Value: Type the TTL value, which is the number of hops the packet can have before being discarded.

IP Destination IP Address: Type destination IP address.Port Number: Type destination port number.VLAN Name: Select a VLAN name, if applicable.

Link Reliability: Select None, Retransmission, or FEC from the drop-down box. If you select None, there are no additional fields to configure. If you select Retransmission, you must set the Retransmission Buffer Size; and if you select FEC, you must set the FEC Group Size.

Retransmission Buffer Size: Type the number of packets required forretransmission (range 1-500); that is, increase the number to recover from agreater delay.

FEC Group Size: Type the number of RTP packets used to generate an FECpacket (range 2-24); that is, lower the number to increase the bandwidth.

Enable Mobile Encapsulation: Check the box to enable or disable.Mobile RTP Video Payload Type: Enter the RTP Video Payload Type, range 96-127.Mobile RTP Audio Payload Type: Enter the RTP Audio Payload Type, range 96-127.

Information to Send Enter the sender’s data: Name, Email, Location, and Phone Number.

Information Local Enter the local data: Canonical Name (alias), Name, Email, Location, and Phone Number.

CRSC Information Click Apply before entering CRSC information, such as: name, e-mail address, location, and phone number. Once you enter the information, click Add. If you have subsequent entries, you must click the Add button for each entry. When complete, click Apply.

CSRC (Contributing SouRCe)The source of an RTP stream.

RTCP (RTP Control Protocol) Acompanion protocol to RTP that is

used to maintain QoS. RTPnodes analyze network conditionsand periodically sends each other

RTCP packets that report onnetwork congestion.

FEC Group Size: This is thenumber of RTP packets

combined to generate one FECpacket. For example, if the FEC

Group Size is set to two, for everytwo RTP packets we will send

one FEC packet.

322


SAP SDP Enable SAP SDP: Click this box and the following parameters will display: Ses-sion Name, Session Description, Session Email, Session Phone Number, Multicast Address and a check box to initiate the session. For more details, see page 315.

Transport Stream Transport Stream ID: Type the Transport Stream Identifier number.Output Stream Type: Click the type of output stream: MPEG or DVB. By click-ing DVB, you can enable the following check boxes: SDT Generation, TDT Gen-eration, TOT Generation and NIT Generation. For details, see UDPOut Port Configuration and Statistics on page 314.

Disable PSI Generation on Idle: Check the box to disable the PSI generation.if stream bitrate is absent for more than 2 seconds. If stream bitrate is again detected while table spooling is suppressed, the PSI generation is resumed.

Enable CAT Generation: Check to enable CAT generation. If you enable CAT the additional fields display: CA System ID, EMM PID, and Private Data (if any indicated).





323


RTPOut Statistics To view the statistics for the RTPOut port select Statistics from the menu and then Ports. This will display the Summary Port List. Click the RTPOut link to display a list of RTPOut ports, then select a specific port.


324



A description for most of the statistic values for the RTPOut port are in the con-figuration section, except for the following additional fields.

RTCP ReceiverReport

If the receiver has RTCP enabled, it will send a receiver report to the sender. It uses the CSRC information for identification.

Fraction Lost: Displays the fraction lost of RTP packets between the two receiver reports.

Packet Lost: Displays the number of packets lost since the beginning of the transmission.

Receiver Time: Displays the time the sender received the report.

When selecting ATM as the Network Interface for RTPOut, the following fields display:

IP Destination overATM

If your IP destination is over ATM, select the Network Interface radio button.

IP Address: Enter the destination IP address.

Port Number: Enter the destination port number.

VPI: Enter the Virtual Path Identifier for the PVC used in this route.

VCI: Enter the Virtual Circuit Identifier for the PVC used in this route.

NOTEYou must have an ATM submodule available.

NOTES1. VCIs from 0- 31 are typically reserved.2. When using ATM DS3 or ATM E3 Network Interface cards, you should note the VPI/VCI ranges are limited to 0-7/0-511.

325


ATMOut Configuration and Statistics

ConfiguringATMOut

When creating the native ATMOut port, you must associate it with a physical Net-work Interface (ATM submodule).


Port Parameters Port Name: Shows the name and location of the ATMOut port.

Port Type: Shows the type of port.

Port Association: Shows the ATM submodule interface associated with ATMOut port.

ConfigurationATMOut


VPI: Type the Virtual Path Identifier for this route (ATM only).

PDU (Protocol Data Unit) Thetechnical name for a frame of

data transmitted over a data link(layer2) in a communications

network.

326


VCI: Type the Virtual Circuit Identifier for this route (ATM only).

TS Packets per PDU: Type the number of Transport Stream packets per AAL-5 PDU.

ATM Traffic Class

ATM Traffic Class: Select UBR, VBR, or CBR from the drop-down list. If you select UBR there are no additional parameters to enter. If you select CBR, you must specify the Bit Rate. If you select VBR, there are three additional parame-ters: Peak Bit Rate, Sustained Bit Rate, and Maximum Burst Size.

Bit Rate (bps): Enter the bit rate value in bits per second (CBR only).

Peak Bit Rate (bps): Enter the peak bit rate value in bits per second (VBR only).

Sustained Bit Rate (bps): Enter the sustained bit rate value in bits per second (VBR only).

Max Burst Size: Enter the maximum burst size (VBR only).

Transport StreamTransport Stream ID: Type Transport Stream Identifier number.

Output Stream Type: Click the type of output stream: MPEG or DVB. By click-ing DVB, you can enable the following check boxes: SDT Generation, TDT Gen-eration, and NIT Generation. Selecting NIT will give you the option of the following delivery systems: Satellite, Cable, and Terrestrial. For details see UDPOut Port Configuration and Statistics on page 314 in the previous section.

Disable PSI Generation on Idle: Check the box to disable the PSI generation.if stream bitrate is absent for more than 2 seconds. If stream bitrate is again detected while table spooling is suppressed, the PSI generation is resumed.



UBR (Unspecified Bit Rate) Anasynchronous transfer mode

(ATM) level of service that doesnot guarantee available

bandwidth. It is very efficient, butnot used for critical data.



very narrow range.



NOTETraffic shaping options (dropdown list with UBR, VBR, CBR) will not be available if the ATMInterface card is either ATM DS3 or ATM E3.

327




Enable CATGeneration

Enable CAT Generation: Select to enable CAT generation.

ATMOutStatistics

The ATMOut link opens the Port Statistics page for the native ATMOut port, which provides specific statistics for ATMOut.



Port Parameters Port Name: Shows the name and location of the ATMOut interface.

Port Type: Shows the type of interface.

Port Association: Shows the name and location of the associated interface.

Statistics ATMOut Description: Shows the description entered when the port was configured.


328


VPI: Gives Virtual Path Identifier for this route (ATM only).

VCI: Gives Virtual Circuit Identifier for this route (ATM only).

TS Packets per PDU: Shows the number of Transport Stream packets per PDU.

ATM Traffic Class ATM Traffic Class: Shows the traffic class as UBR, VBR, or CBR. If UBR is selected there are no additional parameters shown. If you select CBR, the Bit Rate is displayed. If you select VBR, there are three additional parameters that display: Peak Bit Rate, Sustained Bit Rate, Maximum Burst Size.

Bit Rate (bps): Shows the bit rate in bits per second (CBR only).

Peak Bit Rate (bps): Shows the peak bit rate in bits per second (VBR only).

Sustained Bit Rate (bps): Shows the sustained bit rate in bits per second (VBR only).

Max Burst Size: Shows the maximum burst size (VBR only).


329


Control PortsControl ports comprise all MediaProc ports.

MediaProc Submodule PortsThe MediaProc submodule ports include one or more MediaProc ports. The con-figuration and statistics pages of MediaProc ports follow.

For configuring a MediaProc port, see Configuring a DSP 4PAC (Media Processor) Submodule on page 155.

For MediaProc statistics, see DSP 4PAC (Media Processor) Submodule Statistics on page 99.

.

330


DVB-S2 SupportDVB-S2 (Digital Video Broadcasting - Satellite - 2nd Generation) allows trans-mission of one or more MPEG-2 audio/video streams modulation with constant or adaptive encoding. DVB-S2 is an enhanced specification replacing the DVB-S standard which is used for satellite broadcasting used by mobile units for sending external footage back to television stations.

ASIPlus CardThe iPlex supports DVB-S2 by the ASIPlus card via CCM (Constant Coding and Modulation) and ACM (Adaptive Coding and Modulation) modes, which opti-mize the transmission parameters for various users.

For CCM functionality, the ASIPlus card needs to have non-zero bitrate present in the license field. This can be confirmed by viewing the ASIPlus control port statistics. The maximum allowed bitrate per ASIPlus card is 135 MBits/sec. This enables the user to select CCM mode from the ASIPlus control port configura-tion page.

Once the CCM mode is selected, the iPlex creates 2 ASIOut ports for that ASIPlus card and the licensed bitrate is applicable per each ASIOut port. For example, if the ASIPlus card is licensed for 100 MBit/sec, then each ASIOut port will have the capability to handle up to 100MBit/sec.

For ACM functionality, the ACM license flag needs to be selected. If selected, then the allowed bitrate for CCM becomes the maximum allowed symbol rate per ASIOut port. So, in the above example if ACM is licensed for the ASIPlus card, then the maximum allowed symbol rate per ASIOut port will be 100 MSymbol/sec.

Once ACM or CCM mode is selected, 2 ASIOut ports are created, and their corre-sponding SME network interface ports are also created. For example, if an ASIPlus card is present in slot 2, then an ASIPlus1/2 control port is created at boot time, and once ACM or CCM mode is selected, iPlex will create ASOut1/4 and ASIOut1/5 ports as well as network interface ports SME1/4 and SME1/5.

Selecting ACM or CCM ModeThe following screenshot shows the ASIPlus port configuration where you can select an ACM or CCM mode to support DVB-S2.

NOTEMedia routing feature is not available for these created ports.

331


The mode includes these choices: DVB-CA IP, ASIOutACM, ASIOutCCM, and Inline DVB CA.

The ASIPlus Statistics page above shows the ASIOut CCM mode selection, while the ASIPlus Statistics page below shows the ASIOut ACM mode selection performed at the configuration time.

332


Input Ports and PacketizersThe iPlex will accept data that is to be injected using the following protocols:

• IP Forwarding: these are raw IP packets received by the iPlex to be forwarded over the DVB-Sor DVB-S2 link.

• UDP/IP: the data to be injected is delivered to the iPlex as the payload of UDP datagrams.

• TCP/IP: the data to be injected is delivered to the iPlex using the TCP/IP protocol.

For ACM or CCM functionality, these three ports will be created as attached ports to one of the network interface SME ports.

You can create one of the input ports, IPFwdIn, UDPIn, or TCPIn, select from the Create Network Port page.

Creating InputPorts

IPFwd, UDP, and TCP are created differently. For IPFwdIn, you need to select the Input Blade and the Interface, one of the SME’s.

To create a UDPIn or TCPIn, click the Network Interface radio button, and an Interface parameter appears. Select an SME, then select a Data Type.

333


SupportedPacketizers

The following packetizers are supported:

• Data Pipe: Takes bits and places them in the payload of transport packets, as per ETSI EN301 192 section 4. This packetizer allows global control of the PUSI bit – that is, the PUSI bitwill be either set on all transport packets or not depending on the configuration control.

• Section: Takes sections and maps them into transport packets.

• M2T (Transport): Takes transport packets and injects them as they are.

• IP Tunneling MPE (MPE): Takes IP packets as the input and packetizes them according toETSI EN 301 192 section 7. This packetizer supports the “IP Copy” option for thedestination MAC address, whereby the 6-byte MAC address is formed by pre-pending the 4-byte IP address with two bytes, whose values are configurable per port.

The following table shows the supported packetizers for each type of port.

Supported Packetizers per Port

Upon selection parameters, click the Create button.

ASIOut Port and Bandwidth ManagementAttached input port is associated with a particular output, and its data can only be routed to that output. It can receive flow control from the output and throttle its sources to the actual available bandwidth.

The ASI Output port bandwidth is managed at the transport stream level. The bandwidth management is applicable to both ACM & CCM and is accomplished by the Symbol Rate parameter of the ASI Output port.

Port MPE Transport Data Piping Section

IP Forwarding X

UDP/IP X X X X

TCP/IP X X X X

334


For ACM mode, the bandwidth management algorithm is part of the MODCOD scheduling algorithm. For every routed data into a given ASI Output port, the Quality of Service (QOS) parameters are provided via IPF forwarding input port.

ACM Mode PortsFor ACM mode, the bandwidth management algorithm is part of the MODCOD scheduling algorithm. For every routed data into a given ASI Output port, the Quality of Service (QOS) parameters are provided via the input ports.

IPFwd InConfigurationand Statistics

IPFwd Input Configuration page is shown as follows.

Port Name, Port Type, and Port Association are configured at port creation.

Description: Enter port description, 0 to 79 characters (optional).

MPE Routes are configured after port creation. They can be added, deleted, and changed on the fly.

Traffic QOS The following parameters define the Quality of Service (QOS) traffic.

Minimum Bit Rate (bps): Enter the committed bit rate for this route. The sum of the minimum bit rates for all ports should not exceed the available bandwidth in the output port.

Maximum Bit Rate (bps): Enter the maximum bit rate this route is allowed to use in the output port after all the minimum bit rates have been satisfied.

335


Priority: Enter the priority (range 0 - 4). The equipment will offer a minimum of 5 priority levels, numbered from 0 (highest priority) to 4 (lowest priority). After all the minimum bit rates have been satisfied, routes with more traffic will be serviced in strict priority order. In other words, if there is extra available bandwidth, all pri-ority 0 routes will be serviced up to their Maximum Bit Rate; if there is still band-width left, then the priority 1 routes will be serviced, and so on.

Enable Latency: Check the box to enable or uncheck to disable latency. This parameter controls how long the data can be buffered in the system. Data exceed-ing the maximum latency will be dropped at the head of the queue.

Dynamic MODCOD: Check the box to enable or uncheck to disable the Dynamic MODCOD. A MODCOD specifies a specific combination of modula-tion scheme and FEC coding rate.

Default MODCOD: Select a default MODCOD from the drop-down list.

The following figure shows the IPFwdIn port statistics.

UDPInConfigurationand Statistics

Port Name, Port Type, Port Association, and Packetizer are configured at port creation.


Port Number: Enter port number, range 1024 to 65535.

Multicast IP AddressIP Address: Enter IP address between 224.0.0.0 and 239.255.255.255.

VLAN Name: Enter Vlan Name if Multicast IP.

336


Sync Detect Timeout (sec): Enter sync detection timeout, range 1 to 60 sec-onds.

Traffic QOS For the first four parameters and Default MODCOD, see similar section for IPFwdIn port, on page 335. Additional parameters is:

Section Port PID Value: Enter PID to be used for creating the transport pack-ets; range: 0x0 - 0x1ffe.

Click Apply when finished configuring. You can change your entries by clicking Clear or delete port by clicking Delete Port buttons.

The screenshot that follows shows the UDPIn port statistics for the ACM mode.

337


TCPInConfigurationand Statistics

Port Name, Port Type, Port Association, and Packetizer are configured at port creation.


Port Number: Enter port number, range 1024 to 65535.

Idle DisconnectEnable: Check the box to enable disconnecting the TCPIn port on idle or uncheck the box to disable this function.

Timeout (sec): Enter the number of seconds to establish the timeout value for disconnecting TCP connection on idle; range: 1 sec - 3600 sec.

338


Traffic QOS For the first three parameters and Default MODCOD, see similar section for IPFwdIn port, on page 335.

Section Port PID Value: Enter PID to be used for creating the transport pack-ets; range: 0x0 - 0x1ffe.

Click Apply when finished configuring. You can change your entries by clicking Clear or delete port by clicking Delete Port buttons.

The screenshot that follows shows the TCPIn port statistics for the ACM mode.

NOTE The Enable Latency parameter for the TCP Input port is not used.

339


ASIOut Port andBandwidth

Management

Attached input port is associated with a particular output, and its data can only be routed to that output. The input port can receive flow control from the output and throttle its sources to the actual available bandwidth.

The ASI Output port bandwidth is managed at the transport stream level. The bandwidth management is applicable to both ACM & CCM.

For ACM mode, the bandwidth management algorithm is part of the MODCOD scheduling algorithm. For every routed data into a given ASI Output port, the Quality of Service (QOS) parameters are provided.

ASIOut PortGeneral

Configuration

The ASIOut port general configuration parameters in the ACM mode are as follows.

Interface ASIOutx/xDescription: Enter port description, 0 to 79 characters (optional).

Symbol Rate (Symbol/s): Enter symbol rate for ACM; range: 0 Symbols/s - 160,000,000 Symbols/s. It is “symbol” because in ACM mode the outbound channel capacity is no longer utilized with constant efficiency.

Stuffing Frame MODCOD: Select MODCOD from the drop-down list to be used for Stuffing Frame. A Stuffing Frame is a BBFRAME whose payload con-sists entirely of MPEG-2 null TS packets. Stuffing Frames are generated for padding the outbound channel.

Frame Type: Click a radio button to select an output frame, Normal or Short.

340


NCR GenerationEnter the following parameters for the Network Clock Recovery (NCR) genera-tion.

Enable: Check the box to enable the NCR generation or uncheck to disable.

PID: Enter PID to use for NCR Generation; range: 0x20 - 0x1ffe.

Repetition Rate (msec): Enter the value of Repetition Rate; range 20 -100 msec.

MODCOD: Select from the drop-down list.

MPE PID ListPID: Enter the PID for the MPE Decapsulation; range: 0x0 - 0x1fff.

Section Packing: Check the box to enable packing of sections in the same trans-port packet.

Launch Timeout (msec): Enter timeout mseconds to define the time waiting for partially filled MPEG-2 transport packets before they can be sent if no additional data is received; range: 50 msec - 65535 msec.

Use the Add button if you need more to specify more MPE PIDs whose section-packing behavior you want to control.

Click Apply when done configuring.

341


ASIOut PortGeneral Statistics

The following screenshot shows the ASIOut port general statistics in the ACM mode.

ASIOut AdvancedConfiguration

The following screenshot shows the ASIOut port advanced configuration page in the ACM mode. This page allows you to enable as many MODCODs as your application requires.

Note that the ASIOut port in CCM mode does not have Advanced Configuration and Statistics.

342


ASIOut AdvancedStatistics

The following screenshot shows the ASIOut port advanced statistics page in the ACM mode. This page shows the enabled MODCODs.

343


CCM Mode Ports

IPFwd INConfigurationand Statistics

If you need to switch from ACM to CCM mode, you first need to delete import ports attached to the network SME ports. If you did not delete the created input ports, iPlex issues the following error message:

Can't modify: error: ASIOut ports are still in use by attached input ports.

The IPFwd Input Configuration and Statistics pages in the CCM mode are basi-cally the same as those in the ACM mode, except for the Dynamic MODCOD and Default MODCOD parameters that are not present in CCM mode, see page 335.

344


UDPInConfigurationand Statistics

The UDPInput Configuration and Statistics pages in the CCM mode are basically the same as those in the ACM mode, except for the Default MODCOD and Section Port PID Value (if Section was selected as Data Type) parameters that are not present in CCM mode, see page 336.

345


For multicast, you need to enter the VlAN name.

346


TCPInConfigurationand Statistics

The TCPInput Configuration and Statistics pages in the CCM mode are basically the same as those in the ACM mode, except for the Default MODCOD and Section Port PID Value (if Section was selected as Data Type) parameters that are not present in CCM mode, see page 338.

347


348


ASIOutConfigurationand Statistics

ASIOut Configuration and Statistics pages in the CCM mode differ from the ACM mode in the first section only.

The ASIOut configuration parameters are as follows.

Interface ASIOut x/xDescription: Enter description, 0 to 79 characters (optional).

Output Bit Rate (bps): Enter Output Bit Rate; maximum 160 Mbps shared between both ports.

ASI Output Packet Size: Click a radio button to select an output packet size, 188 or 204.

The sections NCR Generation and MPE PID List are the same as in the ACM mode, see page 341.

There are no ASIOut Port Advanced Configuration and Statistics in the CCM mode.

349


350


Transrater Ports: XrtrIn and XrtrOutThere are six XrtrIn and XrtrOut ports on a DSP 6PAC Video Processing sub-module. There are slots for eight submodules per unit.

The XrtrIn Configuration and XrtrOut Configuration pages enable you to con-figure the Transrater DSPs. Select Configuration from the menu. You can find the Xrtr Input and Output configuration screens under either Ports or the MCM. After completing the configuration, click Apply.

XrtrIn

XrtrOut

351



Configuring XrtrIn and XrtrOut PortsPort Name and Port Type: These fields are statistical based on which port is selected to work with, and are not configurable.


Bit Rate (bps): Type the desired bit rate as bit per second.


Output Stream Type: Select either MPEG or DVB.

Enable CAT Parsing: Select or clear the check box to enable or disable CAT parsing.

Enable CAT Generation: Select or clear the check box to enable or disable CAT generation.

Strict CBR: Select one of the following values: Disabled or Video packets. By disabling strict CBR, the transrater will guarantee that the outgoing bit rate never exceeds the configured bit rate, but it may fall under. The output stream is still VBR, but capped. If you set strict CBR to Video Packets, the stream will be pad-ded with filler packets in the Video PID to become a CBR stream. The intention of Strict CBR is to create streams for video servers that require CBR operation. For CBR operation, see page 311.

Video PID to Transrate: Type the video PID in hexadecimal format for a stream route and 0 to auto-detect the video PID of a program route.

Transport Stream ID: Type a unique identifier for the Output Transport Stream.

352


XrtrIn StatisticsTo view the statistics for the XrtrIn port, select Statistics from the menu and select Ports. This will display the Summary Port List. Click the XrtrIn link to display a list of XrtrIn ports, then click a specific XrtrOut port to view.

XrtrOut StatisticsTo view the statistics for the XrtrOut port, select Statistics from the menu and select Ports. This will display the Summary Port List. Click the XrtrOut link to display a list of XrtrOut ports, then select a specific XrtrOut Port to view.


353


Transcoder PortsThe transcoder ports include MPEG-4 AVC input and output transcoder ports (logical names XcdrIn and XcdrOut, respectively) and MPEG-4 AVC Ultracom-pression transcoder ports, with respective logical names AVCXcdrIn and AVCX-cdrOut. These are dual-slot ports. In addition, there are MPEG-4 AVC Ultracompression (Single Slot) transcoder input and output ports.

Each MPEG-4 AVC Transcoder port is located on a DSP 4PAC (Media Proces-sor) submodule installed in a slot on an MCM blade. There are slots for eight 4PAC submodules per unit.

Each MPEG-4 AVC Ultracompression Transcoder port is located on an MPEG-4 AVC Ultracompression Transcoder submodule installed in a slot on an MCM blade. There are slots for four MPEG-4 AVC Ultracompression Transcoder submodules per unit.

MPEG-4 AVC Transcoder Input (XcdrIn) Configuration and StatisticsYou must configure /observe the statistics of the following screens:

• MPEG-4 AVC Transcoder Input General Configuration / Statistics

• MPEG-4 AVC Transcoder Input Advanced Configuration / Statistics

• MPEG-4 AVC Transcoder Input Audio Channel 1 Configuration / Statistics

• MPEG-4 AVC Transcoder Input Audio Channel 2 Configuration / Statistics

XcdrIn GeneralConfiguration

Invoke the MPEG-4 AVC Transcoder Input General Configuration screen by clicking on Ports under Configuration on the left side Main menu; Summary Port List window opens. Click XcdrInlist of Port Names appears; click on the Port Name, which you want to configure.

354


Description: Enter a description string for this port (optional).

Encoding Method: Specify whether to encode in variable or constant bit rates. Choices include VBR, CBR (ES), and CBR (TS). Depending on the selection, the parameters – before Enable Service Information – are as follows:

• CBR (ES)

Video Bit Rate (bps): Specify the bit rate of the encoded stream; the range is 30 000 to 4 000 000.

• CBR (TS)

Specify Transport Rate: Check the box to specify Transport Rate to allow entering transport rate instead of video bit rate.

Transport Rate (bps): This parameter shows up if Specify Transport Rate is enabled. Enter the transport bit rate of the encoded stream. The range is from 500 000 to 4 000 000 bps. The default is 1500000 bps.

• VBR

Video Bit Rate (bps): Specify the bit rate of the encoded stream; the range is 500 000 to 4 000 000.

Peak Bit Rate (bps): Specify the peak bit rate for the encoded stream; the range is 500 000 to 4 000 000.

Enable Service Information if CBR (ES or TS) is selected: Click to enable SDT table generation. If enabled, the Service Information includes:

• Service Name: for example, MPEG-4 AVC Encoder• Service Provider Name: for example, Mediaplex• Service Type: select from the list; for example, Digital television service• Original Network ID: Enter Original Service ID used in SDT, 0 to 65535.

355


Transport Stream ID: Enter a unique identifier for the Input Transport Stream.

Video Resolution: Select from the drop-down list the video resolution to use for encoding.

Enable Audio Pass Through: Click the checkbox to enable Audio Pass Through the Channels.

Enable Non-AV Pass Through: AV is Audio/Video. Check the box to enable or disable the use of all the incoming non-video/audio MPEG2 (P)SI tables for transcoder. When this feature is enabled:

• the transcoder does not change the PID for Output Audio/Video

• the transcoder continues to output the PCR on Video PID and updates PMT to reflect thechange

• the transcoder updates PMT if any video or audio stream type has changed after transcoding;for example, input Video MPEG-2 will be changed to H264 video type.

• the input to transcoder must have PAT and PMT (program association and map) tables. Ifinput to transcoder does not have those tables, then a user-defined program should be createdto provide input PAT and PMT tables to transcoder.



XCdrIn GeneralStatistics

Click Statistics on the MPEG-4 AVC Transcoder Input General Configura-tion screen to get the MPEG-4 AVC Transcoder Input General Statistics screen. The statistics page corresponding to the Configuration shown in page 354 follows.

NOTEIf the transcoder with the routes already defined is reconfigured to enable the non-video/audio pass through, the program route has to be done again.

356


The page consists of 2 parts: Interface and Streams List. The entries in the Interface are self-explanatory. The Streams List section lists streams for Pro-grams, Elements, or Streams with their respective stats. For each Programs, Ele-ments or Streams list, clicking a Chart button brings a corresponding chart. Reset and Refresh buttons are also available.


XcdrIn AudioChannel 1

Configuration

Invoke the MPEG-4 AVC Transcoder Input Audio Channel 1 Configuration screen by clicking Go > Audio on the MPEG-4 AVC Transcoder Input Gen-eral Configuration screen and then Channel 1:

AAC Audio Bit Rate (kbps): Select Audio Bit Rate from the drop-down list.


357


XcdrIn AudioChannel 1Statistics

Click Audio on the MPEG-4 AVC Transcoder Input General Statistics screen and then Channel 1 to go to the MPEG-4 AVC Transcoder Audio Channel 1 Statistics screen:


XcdrIn AudioChannel 2

Configuration

The configuration for Audio Channel 2 is conceptually the same as Audio Channel 1. See XcdrIn Audio Channel 1 Configuration on page 357.

XcdrIn AudioChannel 2Statistics

The statistics for Audio Channel 2 is conceptually the same as Audio Channel 1. See XcdrIn Audio Channel 1 Statistics on page 358.

XcdrIn AdvancedConfiguration

Invoke the MPEG-4 AVC Transcoder Input Advanced Configuration screen by clicking Go > Advanced on the MPEG-4 AVC Transcoder Input General Configuration screen.

358


Interface XcdrIn x/xGOP Size: Enter the group of pictures size, or I Frame Interval; range: 6 to 500. Max 500 For H264, max is 500; for Mobile Encoder, max is 120.

Enable CABAC: Check the box to enable or disable Context-Based Adaptive Binary Arithmetic Coding.

Enable De-blocking: Check the box to enable or disable Deblocking Filter.

VOD Mode: Check the box to enable or disable I Frame for VOD (Video on Demand).

TS (Transport Stream) PID AssignmentsVideo PID: Enter; range: 0x20 - 0x1ffe.

PCR PID: Enter; range: 0x20 - 0x1ffe.

PMT PID: Enter; range: 0x20 - 0x1ffe.

Program Number: Enter; range: 1 - 65535.

Audio PID Channel 1: Enter; range: 0x20 - 0x1ffe.

359


Audio PID Channel 2: Enter; range: 0x20 - 0x1ffe.

Audio Language Code Channel 1: Enter audio ISO 639-2 language code for Channel 1; 0 to 3 characters.

Audio Language Code Channel 2: Enter audio ISO 639-2 language code for Channel 2; 0 to 3 characters.

Teletext Language Code: Enter Teletext ISO 639-2 language code; 0 to 3 char-acters.

Enable Frame Repeat: Check the box to enable or disable frame repeat if input is not full frame rate.



XcdrIn AdvancedStatistics

Click Go > Advanced on the MPEG-4 AVC Transcoder Input General Statis-tics screen to go to the MPEG-4 AVC Transcoder Input Advanced Statistics screen:


MPEG-4 AVC Transcoder Output (XcdrOut) Configuration and Statistics

XcdrOut PortConfiguration

Invoke the Port Configuration screen by clicking on Ports under Configuration on the left side Main menu; Summary Port List window opens. Click XcdrOut;

360


list of Port Names appears; click on the Port Name, which you want to config-ure.

Configuration XcdrOut Description: Enter additional description (optional).

Transport Stream with MPEGTransport Stream ID: Type the Transport Stream Identifier number.

Output Stream Type: MPEG or DVB. The above screenshot shows the configu-ration parameters for MPEG selection.

Transport Stream with DVBWith DVB selection, the page is as follows.

361


The DVB selection adds the following parameters in the Transport Stream sec-tion:

Network ID: Enter the Network identification.

Enable the generation of the following: SDT, TDT, TOT, and NIT. About these parameters, see the “Transport Stream” section starting on page 276.

Actual-Other Table Correction: Enable Actual-Other SI Table Correction. For details about this parameter, see Actual-Other Table Correction and Repetition Rate on page 286.

Enable CAT Enable CAT Generation: Select to enable CAT generation.


XcdrOut PortStatistics

Click Mode > Statistics on the Port Configuration screen to get the Port Sta-tistics screen. The statistics pages contain additional parameters:

Video Format: Shows Input MPEG-2 video format.

Horizontal Resolution: Shows horizontal resolution in pixels, Input MPEG-2 horizontal video resolution; range: 72 - 720.

Vertical Resolution: Shows vertical resolution in pixels, input MPEG-2 vertical video resolution; range: 48 - 576.

362


With MPEG output stream, the page is as follows.

With DVB output stream, the page is as follows.

363


For parameter descriptions, see XcdrOut Port Configuration on page 360. For information on using the buttons at the top of the screen, see Screen Navigation Buttons on page 171.

MPEG-4 AVC Ultracompression Transcoder Input Port (AVCXcdrIn) Con-figuration and StatisticsTo set up the MPEG 4 AVC Ultracompression Transcoder Input, you must con-figure the variables present on its General configuration page. Depending on your needs, you may need to configure variables found in the Advanced page.

By default, the transcoder will simply pass-through the audio streams present in the input program unmodified. If you wish to transcode the audio as well, the set-tings for that are found in the Audio Channel 1 through Audio Channel 6 screens.

Finally, if your transcoder is licensed for PIP, you can configure that in the PIP Configuration screen.

AVCXcdrIn is a logical name of the MPEG 4 AVC Ultracompression Transcoder Input port. For brevity, in the sections that follow this logical name is used to ref-erence this port.

AVCXcdrIn PortGeneral

Configuration

Invoke the MPEG-4 AVC Ultracompression Transcoder Input General Configu-ration screen by clicking on Ports under Configuration on the left side Main menu; Summary Port List window opens. Click AVCxcdrIn; list of Port Names appears.

Select the AVCXcdrIn port, which you want to configure. The following screen appears.

NOTEIt is not possible to simultaneously pass-through and transcode thesame audio channel, but it is possible to replicate a transcodedaudio channel.

364


.

Click Apply when finished configuring. For information on using the buttons at the top of the screen, see Screen Navigation Buttons on page 171.

Interface AVCXcdrInx/x

The parameter fields are as follows.Description: Enter a description or label for this transcoder, 0 to 79 characters (optional).

Transcoder Video Format: Click a radio button to select a Video Format input: HD or SD.

HD Video FormatHD Format: Select from the drop-down list a video input format: 720p/50, 720p/59.94, 1080i/25, or 1080i/29.97. The shown above selection of 1080i num-ber of lines over one of 29.97 FrameRates corresponds to the HD (high defini-tion); the 720p number of lines over 50 or 59.94 FrameRates correspond to the SD (standard definition).

OP Video Loss: Output Video Loss options depend on whether the cable is con-nected or not. Select from the drop-down list the type of an output video loss: Freeze Frame (the last frame is repeated), Black, or Bars (color bars).


Clarus Deblocking: Check the box to enable or disable Clarus deblocking filter.

Clarus Input Deblocking Filter

This is an input deblocking filter that operates on previously encoded data. It automatically detects macroblocks and attempts to clean up the edges.

365


Resolution 1080: Select from the drop-down list a value of the video resolutions for the 1080i input video (HD): 960, 1280, 1440 or 1920 by 1080 HD resolution.

Mode: Select from a drop-down list a bit rate mode for the video encoder: Stan-dard (max 3.0 s), Low Delay (max 1.5 s) delay, Mega Low Delay (max 0.75 s), or Seamless Variable Delay.

Mega Low Delay mode

This delay mode uses an even shorter delay and smaller decoder buffer size thaneither the Standard or Low Delay modes, which helps shorten channel changetime, but at the expense of reducing video quality. In this mode, the only GOPstructure supported is IP (no B frames), and there are no hierarchical B frames.

Seamless Variable Delay mode

Unlike the other fixed delay modes (such as Standard, Low Delay, Mega LowDelay), seamless variable delay (SVD) mode provides flexibility in choosing delaysand decoder buffer size. The decoder buffer size is calculated as minimum bitrate xdelay (each of which are user parameters), up to 15 Mb for HD or 10 Mb for SD.

Also, in SVD mode, the video bitrate can be changed on the fly without requiringan encoder restart.

Finally, SVD mode is necessary to enable VBR (Variable Bit Rate) operation.

(Standalone) VBR Operation

In VBR mode, the encoded video bitrate can vary over time between theminimum bitrate and maximum bitrate, depending on the complexity of thesource material. The target quality parameter affects the video quality as well asthe average VBR bitrate. The higher the number, the higher the average VBR rate.


SD Video FormatIf SD is selected as a video input format, the following parameters are different from those with the HD Video Format.

SD Format: Click one of the radio buttons to select 480i/29.97 or 576i/25 lines over FrameRates.


AVCXcdrIn PortGeneral Statistics

The MPEG-4 AVC Ultracompression Transcoder General Statistics page provides the information to view the statistics for the AVCXcdrIn. Select Statistics from the menu and select Ports.This will display the Summary Port List. Click the

NOTEVBR is a licensed feature.

366


AVCXcdr link to display a list of all AVCXcdr ports, then select a specific port to view.

Or you can click Statistics on the Mode button of the MPEG-4 AVC Ultracompres-sion Transcoder Input General Configuration screen to get the MPEG-4 AVC Ultracompression Transcoder Input General Statistics screen. The statistics page corresponding to the Configuration shown in page 365 follows.

The general MPEG-4 AVC Ultracompression transcoder input parameters for statistics are basically identical to those of the configuration, page 365. The additional parameters are:



Daughter Board Version: Enter the Daughter Board Version, 0 to 9 characters.

The Streams List section lists streams for Programs, Elements, or Streams with their respective stats. For each Programs, Elements or Streams list, clicking a Chart button brings a corresponding chart. Reset and Refresh buttons are also available. For Streams List description, see Streams List on page 408.


367


ConfiguringAVCXcdrIn PortAudio Channels

MPEG-4 AVC Ultracompression Transcoder provides six audio channels. The transcoder supports simultaneous decoding of four stereo audio streams.

To select a channel, use the Go navigation button, then click Audio. First, you need to enable the channel you want to configure. If you select (click) Channel 1, this screen appears.

Enable Audio Transcoding Ch 1: Click the box to enable Audio Transcoding Channel 1, and the MPEG-4 AVC Ultracompression Transcoder Audio Channel 1 Configuration page opens.If you need to select a channel other than 1, use the Go button and navigate to the channel you need. The same procedure should be performed for other channels.


The page parameters depend on the selected Audio Codec, MPEG-1 Layer II or Dolby Digital AC-3. Except for the range values, the parameters for the audio codecs AAC LC and HE-AAC are the same as for the MPEG-1 Layer II described below.

The parameters of the Dolby Digital AC-3 are different, see Configuring AVCXcdr Dolby Digital AC-3 Audio on page 371.

Other Audio Channels The configuration for Audio Channel 2 through 6 is conceptually the same as Audio Channel 1.

NOTEChannel will be transcoded when Enabled and Pass Through whenDisabled.

NOTEThe parameters for each codec are the same for all six audiochannels with the difference in the channel number only.

368


ConfiguringAVCXcdrIn MPEG-1

Layer II Audio

:

Interface AVCXcdr x/xEnable Audio Transcoding Ch 1: Check the box to activate this channel.

Enabling an Audio Channel means that information transmitted through that channel will be transcoded. Disabling an Audio channel makes information be passed through that channel without transcoding. By default, all audio channels are disabled, that is, by default, information is passed through.

Transcoder Audio Source Ch 1: Select from PMT (Program Map Table) Audio Ch1 through Ch 10 or Test Tone. This table will contain the transcoded informa-tion data for the selected channel.

Audio Codec Ch 1: The available selections are: MPEG-1 Layer II, Dolby Digital AC-3, AC-3 Pass Through, AAC-LC, and HE-AAC.

Output Mode Ch 1: Select from the drop-down list an Output Mode – Stereo, Mono, or 5.1. Only Mono or Stereo is supported.

Audio Bitrate Ch 1 (kbps): Select from the drop-down list the audio bit rate for Channel 1 in kbps. The default is 192 kbps.

NOTEThe AC-3 Pass Through audio codec is not supported.

369



Enable Dual Mono Split Ch 1: Check the box to enable.If enabled, the following parameter appears.Replicated Channel for Ch 1: (or any one from 1 to 6 with which you chose to configure your MPEG-4 AVC Ultracompression Transcoder Audio). Click the radio button to choose one of the two split channels.

The Codec transitions between the two channels above seamlessly (except possi-bly for a signal level discontinuity) and without a restart. The PMT source channel for both the dual mono channels must be the same. For more information about Dual Mono Split, see Dual Mono Split on page 221.

Audio Digital Gain Ch 1: Enter the value within the range -12dB to 12dB; the default is 0dB.

Use Channel for PIP Ch 1: Check the box to enable or disable the use of this audio channel with PIP video.


AVCXcdrIn MPEG-1Layer II Audio

Statistics

The MPEG-4 AVC Ultracompression Transcoder Audio Channel 1 Statistics page provides the data for the Transcoder’s selected channel. Select Statistics from the menu and select Ports. This will display the Summary Port List. Click the AVCXcdr link to display a list of all AVCXcdr ports, then select a specific port to view.


NOTENot all the bit rates work for all codecs. If an audio codec is changed, the old bitrate may be not valid for a new audio codec. In such a case, that audio channel will be automatically set to the default bitrate corresponding to the new codec selection. Syslog message is generated to notify the user about this change. For example, if the user configured system to AAC stereo with the bitrate 224 kbps and at the same session the user changed the codec to HE-AAC stereo, the bitrate will be set to 64kbps (default bitrate for HE-AAC codec) because the old bitrate (224Kbps) is invalid for the new codec.

NOTEOnly one dual mono PID will be supported in dual mono split mode.


370


The MPEG-1 Layer II audio parameters for statistics are identical to those of the channel configuration (page 369).

To view the Statistics page of another channel, you need first to configure (enable) that channel and then use the Mode button to view its statistics or go to the Statistics ->Ports menu and select the AVCXcdr port.

ConfiguringAVCXcdr Dolby

Digital AC-3 Audio

The following screenshot presents the MPEG-4 AVC Ultracompression Transcoder Dolby Digital AC-3 Audio configuration parameters.

After completing configuration, click Apply.

371


Interface AVCXcdrIn x/xEnable Audio Transcoding Ch 1: Check the box to activate the channel.

Enabling an Audio Channel means that information transmitted through that channel will be transcoded. Disabling an Audio channel makes information be passed through that channel without transcoding. By default, all audio channels are disabled, that is, by default, information is passed through.

Transcoder Audio Source Ch 1: Select the PMT audio source channel, PMT Audio Ch 1 through PMT Audio Ch 10, or Test Tone. This table will contain the transcoded information data for the selected channel.

372


Audio Codec Ch1: Select the codec type for the audio channel: MPEG-1 Layer II, Dolby Digital AC-3, AC-3 Pass Through, AAC-LC, and HE-AAC.

Audio Service Config Ch 1Audio Coding Mode Ch 1: Select from the drop-down list: 1/0:C; 2/0 L, R; or 3/2: L, C, R, SL, SR—to specify which channel will be coded. (The 3/2 L, C, R, SL, SR is also known as 5.1 Audio support.)

The support for 3/2 L, C, R, SL, SR (5.1) Audio Coding Mode can only be con-figured for Audio channel 1 and Audio channel 4. If 5.1 support is enabled for channel 1, Audio channels 2 and 3 are automatically disabled. If 5.1 support is enabled for channel 4, Audio channels 5 and 6 are automatically disabled.

Data Rate 2_0Ch 1 (kbps): Select from the drop-down list the output data rate of the AC-3 bitstream:• for 2/0 L, R and 3/2 L, C, R, SL, SR, the default is 192.

• for 1/0: C, the default is 128.

More Audio SVC Config Ch 1AC-3 Bitstream Mode Ch 1: Select from the drop-down list the type of service conveyed in the bitstream.

Dialog Normalization Ch 1 (dB): Enter average dialog level relative to digital 100%; the range is (-31) dB to (-1) dB.

Bitstream Info Ch 1Audio Production Info Ch 1: Click the radio button to disable or enable (Off or On) the audio production information.

If you enabled the Audio Production Info, the following two parameters show up:

• Mix Level Ch1 (dB): Enter acoustic Sound Pressure Level (SPL) during final mixing; therange is 80 dB to 111 dB.

• Room Type Ch 1: Select from the drop-down list type and calibration of the mixing roomduring final mixing: Not Indicated, Large Room, Small Room.

NOTEWhenever a 5.1 audio stream is transcoded to stereo, downmixingwill be performed.

NOTE5.1 Audio channel is not supported by Audio Codec MPEG-1 Layer II.

373


Dolby Surround Mode Ch 1: Select from the drop-down list to indicate whether the audio Dolby Surround mode is Not Indicated, Not Surround Encoded, or Sur-round Encoded.

Copyright Ch 1: Click the radio button to disable or enable (Off or On) the bit-stream copyright protection.

Original Bitstream Ch 1: Click the radio button to disable or enable (Off or On) the original bitstream.

PCM Preprocessing Ch1Digital De-emphasis Ch 1: Click the radio button to disable or enable (Off or On) the input channels to be digitally de-emphasized.

DC High-pass Filter Ch 1: Click the radio button to disable or enable (Off or On) a DC-blocking 3 Hz high-pass filter.

Bandwidth Low-pass Filter Ch 1: Click the radio button to disable or enable (Off or On) a bandwidth-limiting low-pass filter.

RF Overmodulation Protection Ch 1: Click the radio button to disable or enable (Off or On) the RF overmodulation protection.

Dynamic Range Profile Ch 1: Select from the drop-down list the dynamic range compression characteristic — one of the Line modes.

Compression Profile Ch 1: Select from the drop-down list a heavy dynamic range compression—an RF mode.


Enable Dual Mono Split Ch 1: Check the box to enable. If enabled, the follow-ing parameter appears.Replicated Channel for Ch 1: (or any one from 1 to 6 with which you chose to configure your MPEG-4 AVC Ultracompression Transcoder Audio). Click the radio button to choose one of the two split channels.The Codec transitions between the two channels above seamlessly (except possi-bly for a signal level discontinuity) and without a restart.

For more information about Dual Mono Split, see Dual Mono Split on page 221.

Audio Digital Gain Ch1: Audio Digital Gain Ch1: Enter the value within the range -12dB to 12dB; the default is 0dB.

Use Channel for PIP Ch 1: Check the box to enable or disable the use of this audio channel with PIP video.

NOTEOnly one dual mono PID will be supported in dual mono split mode.


374


AVCXcdrIn DolbyDigital AC-3 Audio

Statistics

The MPEG-4 AVC Ultracompression Transcoder Audio Statistics page provides dolby audio transcoder statistics information. Select Statistics->Ports from the menu. This will display the Summary Port List. Click the AVCXcdr link to dis-play a list of all AVCXcdr ports, then select a specific port to view. The MPEG-4 AVC Ultracompression transcoder’s Dolby Digital AC-3 audio parameters for statis-tics are identical to those of the configuration, see page 371.

ConfiguringAVCXcdrIn Port

PIP

You can navigate to the PIP configuration page using the Go button. The follow-ing screenshot presents the MPEG-4 AVC Ultracompression Transcoder Input PIP Configuration page where you can configure the PIP parameters.

375


Interface AVCXcdrIn x/xPIP Video Mode: Click a radio button to select PIP Video Mode: PIP or PIP Plus.

If PIP is selected, the following parameter is used:

Low PIP Resolution: Select the value of the low PIP resolution from the drop-down list.

If PIP Plus is selected, the following parameter is used:

SD PIP Resolution: Select the value of the low SD PIP resolution from the drop-down list.

Bit Rate (bps): Enter the PIP bit rate for PIP stream at ES (Elementary Stream) level, the range is 100 000 to 3 000 000 bps.

MCTF: Check the box to enable MCTF (Motion-compensated Temporal Filter-ing).

PIP GOP StructureGOP Length: Enter the Group of Pictures length, which is the distance between two I-Frames; the range is 12 to 250.

GOP Structure: Select from the drop-down list the number of B-Frames between two reference frames (IP, IBP, IBBP, IBBBP).

Adaptive GOP: Check the box to enable or disable the transcoder to organize the GOP as needed.

Closed GOP: Check the box to force encoding closed GOPs.

NOTEThis parameter is present if the Transcoder Video Format is SD.

376


AVCXcdrIn PortPIP Statistics

The MPEG-4 AVC Ultracompression Transcoder Input PIP Statistics page pro-vides the information to view the data for the MPEG-4 AVC Ultracompression Transcoder’s PIP parameters. Select Statistics->Ports from the menu. This will display the Summary Port List. Click the AVCXcdr link to display a list of all AVCXcdr ports, then select a specific port to view. If you are in the MPEG-4 AVC Ultracompression Transcoder Input General Statistics page, you can open this page from the Go button.

The following screenshot presents the MPEG-4 AVC Ultracompression Transcoder Input PIP Statistics page.

The MPEG-4 AVC Ultracompression Transcoder’s PIP parameters for statistics are identical to those of the configuration, see page 375.

AVCXcdrIn PortAdvanced

Configuration

Invoke the MPEG-4 AVC Ultracompression Transcoder Input Advanced Configuration screen by clicking Advanced on the Go button of the MPEG-4 AVC Ultracompression Transcoder Input General Configuration screen.


377



GOP Length: Enter the Group of Pictures length, which is the distance between two I-Frames; the range is12 to 500.


Adaptive GOP: Check the box to enable the transcoder to insert an I-Frame as needed.


Hierarchical B Frame: Check the box to enable the use of the hierarchical BFrame.

PES: Click a corresponding radio button to insert the PES (Packetized Elemen-tary Stream) header either per Frame or per GOP at the beginning of a GOP.Bandwidth: Select from the drop-down list the transcoder bandwidth: Soft, Medium, Sharp, or Auto.

MCTF: Check the box to enable MCTF (Motion-compensated Temporal Filter-ing).

Enable CC: Check the box to enable Closed Captioning (CC) to be injected into the stream. If enabled, the following field appears:CC Format: Click a radio button to select Closed Captioning format, ATSC or

NOTEThis parameter is present if the Transcoder Video Format is SD.

378


ATSC 2005.

The transcoder automatically detects the input CC format from the MPEG-2 video stream and converts it to the selected format (ATSC or ATSC 2005). The input formats supported include: ATSC, Divicom, and SCTE 20. Also supported is Motorola (GI) format as it is the same as SCTE 20 with the exception of one bit.


Disable Auto Recovery: Check the box to disable auto-recovery. Enabled by default.

AVCXcdrIn PortAdvancedStatistics

The MPEG-4 AVC Ultracompression Transcoder Advanced Statistics page pre-sents the advanced parameters of an MPEG-4 AVC Ultracompression Transcoder. To view this page, go to Statistics - > Ports -> AVCXcdr. Then select a specific AVCXcdr x/x.

The parameters of the MPEG-4 AVC Ultracompression Transcoder advanced statistics are the same as those of the advanced configuration with the addition of the parameter Serial Number under the Transcoder Interface section and the sec-tions: License State and Used Licenses.

Serial Number: Provides the serial number to get the License key.

379




• HD Premium





• VBR Operation

• The remaining rows: each lists the license and how many of it are available; the range is 0 - 6.For example, you have 4 AAC-LC Stereo licences.

Used LicensesThis section of the page lists licences and the number of those that are actually used. In addition, the is a parameter:

Disable Auto-recovery: Indicates whether this function is enabled or not.

MPEG-4 AVC Ultracompression Output Port (AVCXcdrOut) Configuration and Statistics

AVCXcdrOut PortConfiguration

Invoke the MPEG-4 AVC Ultracompression Transcoder Output Port Configura-tion screen by clicking on Ports under Configuration on the left side Main menu; Summary Port List window opens. Click AVCXcdrOut; list of AVCXcdrOut Port Names appears; click on the Port Name, which you want to configure.

PMT Manipulationand PID Assignment

The AVCXcdrOut port accepts single program transport stream as input. The streams in the program are identified from the entries in the Program Map Table (PMT), which is the transcoder audio source selected in the MPEG-4 AVC Ultra-compression Transcoder Input Audio Channel 1 (or 2-6) Configuration screen, see page 369. Video stream is always transcoded. Audio streams in the input program can be selected for pass-through or transcoding from the above screen. For transcoding, either two stereo pairs or one 5.1 Audio channel is sup-ported.

In the default configuration, all streams in the program, except the video stream, are passed through. If more than one video stream is found in the program, the first video entry in the PMT or the video stream carrying PCR (Program Clock Reference) is selected for transcoding. Other video streams are dropped.

Tables are always passed through. Since video is always transcoded to H264, the stream type of video element is set to H264 in the tables before it is output. If any

380


of the audio streams are transcoded, the stream types of corresponding entries in the tables are updated to reflect the new codec type.

The output of MPEG-4 AVC Ultracompression Transcoder contains two pro-grams:

• The first program contains the main video and all the transcoded audio streams and passedthrough streams. The program number for the first program is the same as the programnumber of the input source.

• The second program contains the PIP video. The PIP program number is one plus the mainprogram number. The PMT PID for PIP is dynamically generated to be a unique one.

The PIP video PID is by default 0x201. If this PID already exists in the input pro-gram, a unique PID is generated for the PIP video stream.

Unique PID values are also dynamically generated for any audio channels that are replicated and transcoded. The parameter sets differ depending on the selected Output Stream Type, MPEG or DVB.

MPEG Output Stream Type.

Port Parameters

Port Name: The name of the port whose configuration is displayed.

Port Type: AVCXcdrout.

Configuration AVCXcdrOut

Description: Enter description, 0 to 79 characters (optional).

Scan Conversion: Select from the drop-down list: Center CutOut, Letter/Pillar Box, or the default, Use AFD (Active Format Descriptor).

381


Output AFD: By default, the box is checked, that is, AFD is output (Yes). Uncheck the box if output AFD is not desired (No).

Scan Conversion The above two GUI parameters control the scan conversion process. Whenever a stream with 4:3 aspect ratio (SD) is transcoded to 16:9 output aspect ratio (HD), or vice versa, whenever 16:9 is transcoded to 4:3, the transcoder needs to make a decision on how to format the input picture onto a different-sized output. The right decision will depend on what the “active area” is within the input coded frame. For example, if we are transcoding from 16:9 to 4:3:

• If the active area occupies the full 16:9 coded frame, the 16:9 frame will be letter-boxed ontothe 4:3 output (that is, black bands are added to the top and bottom).

Input Output

• If the active area is 4:3 content centered within the 16:9 frame (that is, with black bands on thesides), the sides will be cropped and the 4:3 center-cut picture will be fit onto the 4:3 output.

Input Output

AFD is a 4-bit value carried in the user data of an MPEG-2 stream (or the SEI data of a H.264 stream) that signals the active area within the coded frame. The transcoder will look at the input AFD information (if present) and the input aspect ratio to determine how to resize the picture for the new output aspect ratio, as well as to output new AFD information.

If AFD information is absent or disappears on input, the transcoder will assume that the active area is the same as the aspect ratio of the coded frame, per specifica-tion: it will assume a default AFD value of 1000b as the coded frame.

The Scan Conversion parameter controls the picture resizing. If set to Output AFD (default), it will perform the scan conversion based on input AFD, as described above. The other two options override this behavior. If set to Letter-box/Pillarbox, it will ignore input AFD and will always perform letterboxing (16:9 -> 4:3) or pillarboxing (4:3 -> 16:9). If set to Center Cutout, it will ignore input AFD and will always perform center cutout (cropping) of the input picture.

The Output AFD parameter controls whether or not the transcoder will output AFD to describe the output active area, regardless of any scan conversion being

NOTEThe Scan Conversion parameter only applies when transcodingfrom 16:9 -> 4:3 or 4:3 -> 16:9.

382


performed. This parameter applies in all cases (16:9 -> 4:3, 4:3 -> 16:9, 4:3 -> 4:3, and 16:9 -> 16:9).

If transcoding from 4:3 -> 4:3 or 16:9 -> 16:9, no scan conversion is performed, as the output picture is the same size as the input picture. However, it will output valid AFD information, subject to override by the Output AFD parameter. If input AFD is present, it will be copied to the output AFD. If input AFD is absent or disappears, it will output 1000b - “as the coded frame”.

Transport Stream

Transport Stream ID: Type the Transport Stream Identifier number.

Output Stream Type: MPEG or DVB. The screenshot above shows the MPEG selection. The screenshot for DVB, see below

Enable CAT Generation: Check the box to enable or disable CAT generation. If enabled, CAT generation parameters show up.

For Transport Stream and Cat Generation parameters, see page 276.

DVB Output Stream Type

The DVB Output Stream Type selection adds the following parameters in the Transport Stream section:

Network ID: Enter the Network identification.

383


Enable the generation of the following: SDT, TDT, TOT, and NIT. About these parameters, see the “Transport Stream” section starting at page 276.

Actual-Other Table Correction: Enable Actual-Other SI Table Correction. For details about this parameter, see Actual-Other Table Correction and Repetition Rate on page 286.

AVCXcdrOutPort Statistics

Click Statistics on the Port Configuration screen to get the Port Statistics screen. The screen pages are different with MPEG and DVB Output Stream Types.

MPEG OutputStream Type

384


The above page presents the following parameters of the AVCXcdrOut port with the MPEG Output Stream Type in addition to those described in the correspond-ing Configuration page, see page 380.

Statistics AVCXcdrOutDescription: Optional label string.

Decoder Video Lock: Indicates with “Yes” or “No” whether the decoder can or not lock the input video

Configuration Status: Shows transcoder’s configuration status, 0 to 199 charac-ters.

Scan Conversion: Shows selected scan conversion mode.

Output AFD: Shows whether output AFD is enabled or not.

Decoder Video Input StatsHorizontal Resolution: Incoming video horizontal resolution; range 352 to 1920.

Vertical Resolution: Incoming video vertical resolution; range 240 to 1080.

Bit Rate: Decoder video input bitrate; range 0 - 25 000 000.

Frame Rate: Decoder video input frame rate.

Aspect Ratio: Decoder video input aspect ratio.

Coding Type: Decoder video input coding type.

Scan Format: Input scan format: Interlaced or Progressive.

Decoder Audio Input Stats Ch 1Coding Type Ch 1: Shows coding type for Channel 1.

Coding Mode Ch 1: Shows coding mode for Ch 1.

Bitrate Ch 1: Shows Channel 1’s bitrate.

Sample Rate Ch 1: Shows Channel 1’s sample rate.

Transport StreamSee corresponding AVCXcdrOut Configuration page 383.

Streams ListThe Streams List section lists streams for Programs, Elements, or Streams with their respective stats. For each Programs, Elements or Streams list, clicking a Chart button brings a corresponding chart. Reset and Refresh buttons are also available. For more information, see Streams List on page 408.Output AFD

385


DVB Output StreamType

The parameters of the AVCXcdrOut port Statistics with the DVB Output Stream Type are the same as those with the MPEG, except for the Transport Stream; see corresponding Configuration screen, page 383.

386


MPEG-4 AVC Ultracompression (Single Slot) Transcoder Input Port Configuration and StatisticsTo set up the MPEG 4 AVC Ultracompression (Single Slot) Transcoder Input, you must configure the variables present on its General configuration page. Depending on your needs, you may need to configure variables found in the Advanced page.

By default, the transcoder will simply pass-through the audio streams present in the input program unmodified. If you wish to transcode the audio as well, the set-tings for that are found in the Audio Channel 1 through Audio Channel 8 screens. Please note that it is not possible to simultaneously pass-through and transcode the same audio channel, but it is possible to replicate a transcoded audio channel. Finally, if your transcoder is licensed for PIP, you can configure that in the PIP Configuration screen.

Each MPEG-4 AVC Ultracompression (Single Slot) Transcoder port is located on an MPEG-4 AVC Ultracompression (Single Slot) Transcoder submodule installed in a slot on an MCM blade. There are slots for eight such submodules per unit. The advantages for the single-slot transcoder are:

• Fits in a single slot, so 8 of them can be fitted in one iPlex

• Improved video quality compared to the dual-slot encoder

• Up to 8 audio channels can be transcoded by each card

The AVCXcdrIn is a logical name of the MPEG-4 AVC Ultracompression Input Transcoder port. In the following sections, this single-slot transcoder is referred to briefly as AVCXcdrIn Single.

AVCXcdrIn SinglePort General

Configuration

Invoke the MPEG-4 AVC Ultracompression (Single Slot) Transcoder Input Gen-eral Configuration screen by clicking on Ports under Configuration on the left side Main menu; Summary Port List window opens. Click AVCxcdrIn; list of Port Names appears.

Select the MPEG-4 AVC Ultracompression (Single Slot) Transcoder Input port, which you want to configure. The following screen appears.

387



The parameter fields are as follows.Description: Enter a description or label for this transcoder, 0 to 79 characters (optional).

Transcoder Video Format: Click a radio button to select a Video Format input, HD or SD.

Video Coding Mode: Select a value from the drop-down list: Off, H.264, or MPEG-2.

HD Video FormatHD Format: Select from the drop-down list a video input format: 720p/50, 720p/59.94, 1080i/25, or 1080i/29.97. The shown above selection of 1080i num-ber of lines over one of 29.97 FrameRates corresponds to the HD (high defini-tion); the 720p number of lines over 50 or 59.94 FrameRates correspond to the SD (standard definition).

OP Video Loss: Output Video Loss options depend whether the cable is con-nected or not. Select from the drop-down list the type of an output video loss: Freeze Frame (the last frame is repeated), Black, or Bars (color bars).


Resolution 1080: Select from the drop-down list a value of the video resolutions for the 1080i input video (HD): 960, 1280, 1440 or 1920 by 1080 HD resolution.

Mode: Select from the drop-down list a bit-rate mode for the video encoder: Stan-dard (max 3.0 s), Low Delay (max 1.5 s delay), Mega Low Delay (max 0.75 s), or Seamless Variable Delay (SVD). See details on Mode, in the section at page 365.

388



SD Video FormatIf SD is selected as a video input format, the following parameters are different from those with the HD Video Format.

SD Format: Click one of the radio buttons to select 480i/29.97 or 576i/25 lines over FrameRates.


AVCXcdrIn SinglePort General

Statistics

The MPEG-4 AVC Ultracompression (Single Slot) Transcoder General Statistics page provides the information to view the statistics for the AVCXcdrIn Single port. Select Statistics from the menu and select Ports. This will display the Sum-mary Port List. Click the AVCXcdr link to display a list of all AVCXcdr Single ports, then select a specific port to view.

Or you can click Statistics on the Mode button of the MPEG-4 AVC Ultracompres-sion (Single Slot) Transcoder Input General Configuration screen to get the MPEG-4 AVC Ultracompression (Single Slot) Transcoder Input General Statistics screen. The Statistics page corresponding to the Configuration shown in page 388 follows.

389


The general MPEG-4 AVC Ultracompression single-slot transcoder input parameters for statistics are basically identical to those of the configuration, page 388. The additional parameters are:



Daughter Board Version: Shows the Daughter Board Version, 0 to 9 characters.

The Streams List section lists streams for Programs, Elements, or Streams with their respective stats. For each Programs, Elements or Streams list, clicking a Stream Chart button brings a corresponding chart. Reset and Refresh buttons are also available. For Streams List description, see Streams List on page 408.


390


ConfiguringAVCXcdrIn PortAudio Channels

MPEG-4 AVC Ultracompression (Single Slot) Transcoder provides eight audio channels. By default, all channels are disabled. The transcoder supports simulta-neous decoding of four stereo audio streams. For details, see page 368.

ConfiguringAVCXcdrIn Single


The parameter fields of the AVCXcdr Single MPEG-1 Layer II Audio channel are the same as those for the AVC Ultracompression transcoder with dual slot. For their description, see page 369.


AVCXcdrIn SingleMPEG-1 Layer IIAudio Statistics

The MPEG-4 AVC Ultracompression (Single Slot) Transcoder Audio Channel 1 Statistics page provides the data for the transcoder’s selected channel. Select Sta-tistics from the menu and select Ports. This will display the Summary Port List. Click the AVCXcdr link to display a list of all AVCXcdr Single ports, then select a specific port to view. For parameter field descriptions, see page 370.

To view the Statistics page of another channel, you need first to configure (enable) that channel and then use the Mode button to view its statistics or go to the Statistics ->Ports menu and select the AVCXcdr port.

391



AAC Audio

The audio AAC (Advanced Audio Coding) codec can be: AAC-LC, HE-AAC, and HE-AAC-V2. For AAC-LC (AAC Low Complexity) codec, the configuration and statistics parameters are the same as for MPEG-1 Layer II, see the sections above. For the codecs HE-AAC (AAC High Efficiency) and HE-AAC-V2 there is one parameter, HE Encoding Mode, additionally to the MPEG-1 Layer II parame-ters; please find it below Audio Bitrate Ch 1 in the screenshot:

HE Encoding Mode: Select from the drop-down list an HE-AAC encoding mode - ADTS (Audio Data Transport Stream), LOAS (Low Overhead Audio Stream), or LATM (Low-overhead MPEG-4 Audio Transport Multiplex).

The parameters for HE-AAC and HE-AAC-V2 are the same and are shown in the screenshot that follows.

AVCXcdrIn SingleAAC Audio Statistics

The screenshot below shows the AAC audio statistics corresponding to the con-figuration page above.

392



Dolby Digital AC-3Audio

The following screenshot presents the MPEG-4 AVC Ultracompression (Sin-gle Slot) Transcoder Dolby Digital AC-3 Audio Channel 1 Configuration parameters. The parameter fields of the AVCXcdr Single Dolby Digital AC-3 Audio Audio channel are the same as those for the AVC Ultracompression transcoder with dual slot. For their description, see page 371. After completing the configuration, click Apply.

AVCXcdrIn SingleDolby Digital AC-3

Audio Statistics

The following screenshot presents the MPEG-4 AVC Ultracompression (Sin-gle Slot) Transcoder Dolby Digital AC-3 Audio Channel 1 Statistics parame-

393


ters. The parameters are the same as those for the AVC Ultracompression transconder with dual slot, see page 375.


Port PIP

The following screenshot presents the MPEG-4 AVC Ultracompression (Sin-gle Slot) Transcoder Input PIP Configuration page where you can configure the PIP parameters. The parameters are basically the same as for the similar port with double slot, see section on page 375.

The difference is that MCTF parameter is used with both HD and SD video for-mats

394


AVCXcdrIn SinglePort PIP Statistics

The MPEG-4 AVC Ultracompression (Single Slot) Transcoder Input PIP Statis-tics page provides the information to view the data for the MPEG-4 AVC Ultracom-pression (Single Slot) Transcoder’s PIP parameters. Select Statistics->Ports from the menu. This will display the Summary Port List. Click the AVCXcdrIn link to display a list of all AVCXcdrIn ports, then select a specific port to view. If you are in the MPEG-4 AVC Ultracompression Transcoder Input General Statistics page, you can open this page from the Go button.

The following screenshot presents the MPEG-4 AVC Ultracompression (Sin-gle Slot) Transcoder Input PIP Statistics page

The MPEG-4 AVC Ultracompression (Single Slot) Transcoder’s PIP statistics parameters are identical to those of the configuration of the AVC Ultracompres-sion transcoder with dual slot, see page 375.

395


AVCXcdrIn SinglePort AdvancedConfiguration

Invoke the MPEG-4 AVC Ultracompression (Single Slot) Transcoder Input Advanced Configuration screen by clicking Advanced on the Go button of the MPEG-4 AVC Ultracompression (Single Slot) Transcoder Input General Configuration screen. For information on using the buttons at the top of the screen, see Screen Navigation Buttons on page 171.

Except for two parameters described below, all other parameters are the same as for the AVC Ultracompression transcoder with the dual slot, see page 377.


MCTF: This parameter is present whether Transcoder Video Format is HD or SD. Check the box to enable or disable the MCTF (Motion Compensated Tem-poral Filtering), a noise reduction technique.

H.264 HD Profile: Click the radio button to select Main Level 4 (default) or High level 4. With SD, H.264 SD Profile: Main Level 3 (default) or High level 3.

AVCXcdrIn SinglePort Advanced

Statistics

The MPEG-4 AVC Ultracompression (Single Slot) Transcoder Advanced Statis-tics page presents the advanced statistics parameters of an MPEG-4 AVC Ultracom-pression (Single Slot) Transcoder. To view this page, go to Statistics - > Ports -> AVCXcdr. Then select a specific AVCXcdr x/x.

The parameters of the MPEG-4 AVC Ultracompression (Single Slot) Transcoder advanced statistics are the same as those of the advanced configuration (see sec-tion above) with the addition of the parameters Serial Number and License Key in the Transcoder Interface section and the additional sections: License State and Used Licenses.

Serial Number: Provides the serial number of the transcoder to be used to get the parameter below, the License key.

396




• HD Premium





• VBR Operation




397





MPEG-4 AVC Ultracompression (Single Slot) Output Port Configuration and Sta-tistics

AVCXcdrOutSingle Port

Configuration

Invoke the MPEG-4 AVC Ultracompression (Single Slot) Transcoder Output Port Configuration screen by clicking on Ports under Configuration on the left side Main menu; Summary Port List window opens. Click AVCXdrOut; list of Chassis Port Names Configuration window appears; click on the Port Name, which you want to configure. For brevity, the MPEG-4 AVC Ultracompression (Single Slot) Transcoder Output Port is referenced in the sections that follow as AVCXcdrOut Single.

For the background information and features of the MPEG-4 AVC Ultracompres-sion Transcoder Output Ports, see page 380.


The parameter sets differ depending on the selected Output Stream Type, MPEG or DVB. Except for one parameter, the parameters of the AVCXcdrOut Single with MPEG are the same as those of the dual-slot AVC Ultracompression transcoder, see page 381.

398


The additional parameter is:



Except for two parameters, the parameters of the AVCXcdrOut Single with DVB are the same as those of the dual-slot AVC Ultracompression transcoder, see page 383. The additional parameters are:

Output AFD: By default, the box is checked, that is, AFD (Active Format Descriptor) is output (Yes). Uncheck the box if output AFD is not desired (No).


AVCXcdrOutSingle Port

Statistics

Click Statistics on the Port Configuration screen to get the Port Statistics screen. The screen pages are different with MPEG and DVB Output Stream Types.


The parameters are basically the same as those for the dual-slot AVC Ultracom-pression transcoder, see page 384.

399



Scrambled (in the section Decoder Video Input Stats): True if any part of the input stream is scrambled.

Additional section: Misc. Decoder Stats and its parameters:

Decoder CC Errors: Shows the number of Decoder CC errors.

Video Syntax Errors: Shows the number of Video Syntax errors.

Disable PSI Generation on Idle (section Transport Stream): Shows whether the PSI generation, if stream bitrate is absent for more than 2 seconds, is disabled or not.

400



The parameters of the AVCXcdrOut Single port Statistics with the DVB Output Stream Type are the same as those with the MPEG, except for the Transport Stream section. For parameters of the Transport Stream section, see corre-sponding paragraphs on page 383.

401


Data Type PacketizersWhen creating a port, you must select a Data Type. When you select the Data Type, the additional parameters in statistics depending upon your selection (M2T, Data Pipe, Section, or IP Tunneling) will be the same for each port.

M2T PacketizerSelecting the Data Type as M2T for all input ports displays parameters desribed in the following sections.

M2TConfiguration

When configuring M2T parameters select the input stream type from the drop-down list: MPEG, DVB, ATSC, or GI, then you can Enable Table Forwarding or Enable CAT Parsing as required. If you selected DVB as the input stream type, you can also Enable SDT Parsing and NIT Parsing.

M2T Statistics If you have enabled parsing of CAT, SDT and NIT, and these tables are present in the incoming transport stream, the following parameters will display. For informa-tion on using the buttons at the top of the screen, see Screen Navigation Buttons on page 171

402


.

Transport Stream Shows basic information on the Transport Stream.

Transport Stream ID: Shows Transport Stream Identifier number.Enable Table Forwarding: Select to enable, clear to disable table forwarding.


Enable SDT Parsing: Shows SDT parsing enabled, Yes or No.

Enable NIT Parsing: Shows NIT parsing enabled, Yes or No. If you enable NIT the following additional fields display: Network ID, Network Name, and Network Delivery Type (Satellite, Cable, Terrestrial). For more details, see Transport Stream on page 177.

Enable CAT Parsing: Shows CAT parsing enabled, Yes or No.

CAT Parameters If you enable CAT, the following fields display: CA System ID and EMM PID, and Private Data.





is widely used in satellite turn-around applications for example,

Comcast/AT&T “Head-end In TheSky” (HITS) systems.

403


Section PacketizerSelecting the Data Type as Section displays parameters described in the following sections.

SectionConfiguration

When configuring Section parameters select the check box to enable section pack-ing and set the section port PID in hexadecimal.

Section Statistics If you enable Section Packing, you will see the following parameters:

Section Packing: Shows section packing enabled (Yes or No).Section Port PID Value: Shows the PID number for section packing.

Section PortStatistics

Data Events Dropped: Shows the number of data events dropped.

Bytes Dropped: Shows the number of bytes dropped.

Section Header Error: Shows the instances when there were errors in the section header.

Data Pipe PacketizerSelecting the Data Type as Data Pipe displays parameters described in the follow-ing sections.

Data PipeConfiguration

When configuring Data Pipe parameters enter the PID in hexadecimal, select the check box to enable a timeout, if required, and set the timeout value in millisec-onds.

Data PipeStatistics

If you enable a Data Pipe timeout, you will see the following parameters:

Data Pipe PID Value: Shows the PID number for Data Pipe.Data Pipe Timeout Enable: Shows Data Pipe timeout enabled, Yes or No.Data Pipe Timeout Value (msec): Shows the timeout value in milliseconds.

404


IP Tunneling PacketizerSelecting the Data Type as IP Tunneling displays parameters described in the fol-lowing sections.

IP TunnelingConfiguration

For IP Tunneling, configure parameters shown in the illustration below.

PID: PID to be used for creating the transport packets; range: 0x0 - 0x1ffe.

IP Mapping MAC Address: Check the box to enable mapping MAC address.

MAC Address: Enter MAC address used for encapsulation in the shown format.

Section Packing: Click the box to enable or disable packing of sections in the same transport packet.

IP TunnelingStatistics

Selecting IP Tunneling data type adds statistics parameters shown below.

IP Packets Generated: Gives the number of generated IP packets (if any).

IP Packets Discarded: Gives the number of dropped IP packets (if any) due to unsupported formats.

Bytes Dropped: Gives the number of dropped bytes due to the error caused by IP checksum header or invalid packet size.

405


Programs, Elements and Streams List StatisticsPrograms, Elements and Streams List parameters are the same for all input ports. Output port parameters differ slightly from input parameters. If a stream does not contain any Program parameters, then the Programs List will not display. This is also true for Elements List and Streams List. The basic difference between input and output is that on the output only the option to create “user created” pro-grams and elements is available.

At the bottom of all the statistics pages there are three radio button options: Pro-grams, Elements, and Streams.

Click the View Chart button to see a graphical representation of the stream; details of this feature are in the next section Real-Time Monitoring. Click the Advanced button to view the descriptors. For more details, see Descriptors on page 281.

Programs List

Click Refresh to refresh the table. Click Program Chart or Program RouteChart for a charted representation of that data.

Program Number: Provides the MPEG program identifier number.

Name: Provides the name of the program (DVB).

PMT PID: Provides the PMT PID number in hexadecimal format.

Input: Lists the input port and program number (output ports only).

Service Type: Provides the DVB service type.

User Created: Shows ‘Yes’ for user created programs or ‘No’ for existing pro-grams.

NOTETo see the program names, it is necessary to configure the Transport Stream as DVB and then enable SDT parsing.

406


Elements ListPress Refresh to refresh the table.

PID: Gives the element PID number.

Program: Gives the associated MPEG number.

Element Type: Gives the MPEG stream type.

Input: Lists the input port and program number (output ports only).

User Created: Shows ‘Yes’ for user created programs or ‘No’ for existing pro-grams.

NOTEFields showing “N/A” are not applicable for MPEG and GI. The Programs/Elements/Streams list section only appears if they are present in the Transport Stream.

407


Streams ListPress Reset Stats to restart the recording of stats for this program. Press Refresh to refresh the table, or press Stream Chart to generate a charted representation of this data.

PID: Lists the Packet Identifiers found in the transport stream.

Stream Type: Indicates the type of stream for each PID (e.g. PAT, NIT, SDT, TDT, Video, and others), if known.

Program Number: Program to which this PID belongs, if known.

Input: If this PID originates from an input port, it is listed here.

Packets Processed: Indicates how many packets were received for this PID.

Duplicate Packet: Indicates how many duplicate packets were detected for this PID. Duplicate packets are successive packets with the same value in the Continu-ity Counter (CC) field.

Counter Errors: Indicates the number of Continuity Counter error instances detected for this PID.

Bit Rate (b/s): The measured bit rate for this PID.

408


Real-Time MonitoringReal-time monitoring is a graphical representation of the Transport Stream, which the user can view from Port Statistics. This feature uses a Java Plug-in that automatically launches when you click the Stream Chart button at the bottom of a port statistics page.

Installing the Java Plug-inThe first time you install the Java plug-in, you are presented with a standard Secu-rity Warning connecting to Sun Microsystems for the download. Click Yes to con-tinue.

The next box shows the download in progress and provides the status of the download.

Continue the installation by following the wizard.

NOTEIf a network error message displays, then the Sun Microsystems network may be down or your connection to the internet is not avail-able. Wait and try again later.

409


Stream Chart ButtonThe Stream Chart button opens a window for the designated input or output port. The window will automatically show the maximum image depending on the range, unless it is manually changed.

The following window is a UDPOut port in Program View.

ControlsDepending on the stream or program, the chart’s other controls are available by right-clicking the chart.

View View displays the data as a bar chart, line chart or pie chart.

Bar Chart in StreamView

x-axis: Bit rate in megabits per second.

y-axis: PID number of streams and bit rate in megabits per second.

NOTEIn this example, the name of the program is displayed on the y-axis. The stream type and color designations are in the legend pane.

410


Line Chart in StreamView

x-axis: Time in seconds.

y-axis: Bit rate in megabits per second.

Legend Pane: PID number (in hexadecimal) and color designations identify streams..

NOTEIn Program View the names of the programs are shown.

411


Pie Chart in StreamView

Segments: Major segments show PID number (in hexadecimal) and bit rate in megabits per second. Smaller segments display as color only.

Legend Pane: PID numbers (in hexadecimal) and color designations identify streams.

412


Program Route Chart This chart displays the bit rate in Mbit/s for audio and video elements for pro-grams on a certain port (in this case, the programs routed between ASIOut1/0 and ASIIn1/6). In the right pane, there is a legend for determining which elements are audio and which are video.

413


Scale Scale displays the charts at different ratios: 1:1, 1:2, 1:4, 1:8; and also refines thescale by adding or subtracting increments from 1 to 10.

Type Selecting Type lets you display either a program view or stream view of the chart.

Sample Sample controls the time in seconds that the information displays within the chart, with a latency of 1 second to 60 seconds.

414

Configuration Scenarios

Chapter 5

415


Configuration Scenarios OverviewIn this chapter, you will go step-by-step through the operation of configuring the iPlex for typical operation scenarios; first using the Web GUI and second using CLI. This chapter also contains typical configuration issues in a Question and Answer format.

Menu commands appear in the following format: Main Menu item > Sub Menu item > and so forth. For example, Configuration > IP Routing> VLAN; that is, click Configuration from the main menu, then click IP Routing, which displays under Configuration, and finally click VLAN, which displays under IP Routing.

The configuration scenarios described in detail are as follows:

• Scenario 1: Routing a Single Program from ASIIn to UDPOut on page 417

• Scenario 2: Routing a Custom Program from ASIIn to UDPOut on page 423

NOTES1. The menus in this chapter can be accessed by users in the rootand administrator groups.2. The CLI Guide has a similar chapter covering some of the scenar-ios discussed in this chapter. See “Configuration Scenario” in the CLI Guide.

416


Scenario 1: Routing a Single Program from ASIIn to UDPOutThe first configuration might be a setup for receiving a Transport Stream contain-ing video information sent to an IP set-top box through the Gigabit Ethernet port as a channel for watching the video content.

Physical SetupMCM: ASIIn cable to ASIIn port

SCM: Fiber cable connected to Gigabit Ethernet [GE1] to the network switch, router or another iPlex.

STEPS1 Creating a VLAN—as a point of reference for the Gigabit Ethernet.

2 Configure ASIIn port.

3 Check ASIIn statistics.

4 Create a UDPOut port.

5 Configure Media Routing—to direct the program from ASIIn to UDPOut.

6 Check port statistics.

If using the previous version of Media Routing, see Configuration Scenario 1: Rout-ing a Single Program from ASIIn to UDPOut on page 473.

NOTEYou can also find this scenario in the Command Line Interface Ref-erence Guide, see section “Single Program Route from ASIIn to UDPOut Using CLI.”

417


STEP 1: Settingup the VLAN

Configuration > IP Routing > VLANIn the VLAN Configuration page enter the following parameters:

• IP address of port—depends on user network. Example: 172.30.1.1

• Subnet mask—depends on user network. Example: 255.255.255.0

• Select GE1 and Untagged from the drop-down box to select the Gigabit Ethernet 1 port, orselect Tagged if your network uses VLAN tags (if you are not sure, ask your networkadministrator).

Click the Add button or use the Delete button in conjunction with the Delete check box to remove the entry. After completing the configuration, click the Apply button.

Check SCMClick Home on the main menu tree or go to the physical iPlex chassis; on the SCM you should see a green light by the selected Gigabit Ethernet if it has an opti-cal fiber connection.




GE (Gigabit Ethernet) AnEthernet technology that raises

transmission speed to 1 Gbps. Itis used primarily for backbones.The first IEEE standard (802.3z)

for Gigabit Ethernet defined itsuse over Multi-mode optical fiber

providing full-duplex operationfrom switch to end station or toanother switch and half-duplex

using CSMA/CD in a sharedenvironment.

NOTEThe first VLAN ID default is “2.”

418


STEP 2:Configuring

ASIIn

Configuration > MCM > ASIIn > ASIIn1/6In the ASIIn Configuration page:

1 Type a description of the interface and select the active channel (the ASIInsubmodule has two physical inputs, A and B—input A is located at the top ofthat submodule).

2 Enable Table Forwarding.

3 The stream type must match the incoming stream (GI, MPEG, DVB orATSC). For this example, we will assume a DVB feed. For DVB feeds, youhave the option of parsing the SDT, NIT, and CAT—more information aboutthe stream displays (for example, program names from the SDT).

4 After completing the configuration, click Apply.

STEP 3:Checking ASIIn

Statistics

Statistics > MCM > ASIIn > ASIIN1/6If the Programs List is empty, there is no feed. Check by clicking Stream. If there are no statistics then there is no signal. Check the port: Statistics > Ports >ASIIn. The port should say “In Sync.” If the port says “No Signal,” there is a problem with the connection or the feed upstream.

STEP 4: Creatingthe UDPOut Port

Configuration > New PortThe first item on the Configuration menu tree allows you to create a new logical network port.

ASI (Asynchronous SerialInterface) One of DVB’s physical

interfaces used for transmittingMPEG-2 Transport Streams.







419


1 Select the Port Type you want to use from the Port Parameters drop-downlist box: UDPOut.

2 In the next page, select the blade you want to use for the ASIIn port. Selectthe Gigabit Ethernet radio button to transmit via the Gigabit Ethernetport(s).

3 Next, you need to select the input that contains the content that you intend toroute through that port. Once created, this port will only allow you to routecontent from the selected input.

4 Click the Create button.

5 Configure the UDPOut port on the Port Configuration page as follows:■ Type the description of the port (optional).■ Select the Internet Protocol: click on radio button IPv4 or IPv6.■ Enter a value for the TOS Bit Field (range: 0-255)■ Enter a value for TTL (range: 0-255), which is the number of hops the packet

can have before being discarded.■ Type a multicast address in Destination IP Address.■ Type a port number (range: 1024 - 65535).

■ Select the VLAN you wish this stream to route through.

NOTEThe IP address and port number must match what the set-top box is expecting.

420


6 After completing the configuration, click Apply.

STEP 5:Configuring

Media Routing

Configuration > Media RoutingFor information on configuring Media Routing, see Configuring Media Routing on page 103.

The Media Routing Configuration page opens with three groups to choose from an input, processing, and output ports. For choosing your routing, see Media Routing Setup Media Routing on page 104. Upon setting up your route, press the NEXT button, which opens the page with four display panels for configuration purposes. You can designate program and stream routes, add, remove, and edit programs and elements, as well as add or remove stream routes.

421


STEP 6:Checking Port

Statistics

Statistics > Ports > UDPOut > UDPOut1/0Look at the Program List. You can also view a graphical representation of the stream by clicking View Chart.

422


Scenario 2: Routing a Custom Program from ASIIn to UDPOutThe second configuration might have a non-compliant stream from the encoder that lacks tables, or you may just want to change SDT information, the program number or the PID value.

The iPlex can compensate for the non-compliant stream as long as the operator knows which kind of stream is in each PID. Given this information, the iPlex can generate the tables and add them to the stream. Additionally, the iPlex can modify existing values within the stream, such as a program number.

In this example, we will assume an encoder connected to ASIIn1/6 with MPEG-2 video on PID 0x20, MPEG-2 audio on PID 0x21, and PCRs in the video PID.

Physical SetupMCM: ASIIn cable to ASIIn port from an external Encoder or a demodulator.


Steps1 Create a UDPOut port, see page 419.

2 Configure Media Routing—to create tables and route the stream, see page 109and page 112.■ Program Creation.■ Add Elements.■ Route the Stream.

3 Check UDPOut port statistics, see page 422.

If using the previous version of Media Routing, see Scenario 2: Routing a Custom Program from ASIIn to UDPOut on page 481.

STEP 1: Creatinga UDPOut Port

Configuration > New Port The first item on the Configuration menu tree allows you to create a new logical network port.

NOTEYou can also find this scenario in the Command Line Interface Ref-erence Guide, see section “Custom Program Route from ASIIn to UDPOut Using CLI.”

423


1 Select the Port Type you want use from the Port Parameters drop-down listbox: UDPOut.

2 In the next page, select the blade you want to use for the ASIIn port. Selectthe Gigabit Ethernet radio button to transmit via the Gigabit Ethernetport(s). Next, you need to select the input that contains the content that youintend to route through that port. Once created, this port will only allow youto route content from the selected input. Click the Create button.

3 Configure the UDPOut port in the Port Configuration page as follows:■ Type the description of the port (optional).■ Enter a value for the TOS Bit Field (range: 0-255)■ Enter a value for TTL (range: 0-255), which is the number of hops the packet

can have before being discarded.■ Type a multicast address in Destination IP Address.■ Type a Port Number (range: 1024 - 65535)

.

■ Select the VLAN Name you wish this stream to come through.■ Enter the Transport Stream ID for the stream.■ Select the Output Stream Type (MPEG or DVB), in this example MPEG is

selected.■ Enable CAT Generation, if required.


424


STEP 2:Configuring

Media Routing

Configuration > Media Routing1 Select the UDPOut port (you created in step 1) in the Output Port section

and right-click to call the context port menu.

2 Enter the program data and click ADD.

3 To add elements to the program, see Managing Custom Element on page 115.

Route the Stream 4 After creating the program and elements, you can stream-route the PID: clickon the PID on the input port and click on the custom element on the outputport.


Statistics

Statistics > Ports > UDPOut > UDPOut1/01 Look at the Program List at the bottom of the page to view the program that

you just created.

2 Next, select the Elements radio button to display the audio and videoelements.

425


Configuration Questions and AnswersThe following section covers some of the configuration issues you may encounter while setting up the iPlex.

Topic 1: UDPOut Settings

Question Why are some UDPOut ports restricted to transmitting content from only one input port?

Answer There are three kinds of UDPOut ports:

1 Ports that transmit over the Gigabit Ethernet (GE) interface(s)

2 Ports that transmit over the ATM interface(s)

3 Ports that transmit over the SME interface(s)

Gigabit Ethernet Ports can only transmit programs from a single input, defined at the time of the port’s creation. This is done to optimize chassis resources. Ports that transmit over ATM or SME have no such limitations. If you need to create a network port over Gigabit Ethernet to transmit a multi-program transport stream with elements from multiple inputs, you can use a backhaul port, which does not have the same limitation as the UDPOut port

Question What is the meaning of the IP address entered in the UDPOut port.

Answer The IP address you enter in the UDPOut port is the IP destination address of the stream—that is the address you send the streams to. This can be a unicast address or a multicast address.

Question What is the relationship between output ports and input ports/blades?

Answer Input and output streams have associated “ports.” The ports may be either physi-cal ports; that is, ASI Input or Output ports, or logical ports that you create, such as UDP or RTP ports. Ports exist in the chassis blades. For physical ports, the blade is where the port is physically present; for logical ports, you must choose the blade based on the following criteria:

■ If you want to create an UDPOut port that streams over ATM, then you have tocreate it on the blade that has the relevant ATM submodule. The same appliesfor an UDPIn port that receives from ATM.

■ If you want to create an UDPOut port that streams out on Gigabit Ethernet,then you must create it in the blade that has the content that you want to route.

■ If you want to create an UDPIn port that receives from Gigabit Ethernet, youcan create it in any arbitrary blade, although TANDBERG Televisionrecommends that you create it on the blade where you will route most of theoutputs.

426


Question Can the UDPIn port accept streams from multiple resources?

Answer No. Each UDPIn port can only accept a single stream (single or multiple pro-grams). If you want to support multiple programs, just create multiple UDPIn ports.

Question How is channel selection made on input streams from server?

Answer What characterizes each UDPIn is a UDP port number and possibly by a multicast IP address, if you are using multicast. You need to configure the UDPIn ports to match what the server is doing. For example, if your server has two streams out, one on 225.1.1.1, port 2001, and another on 225.1.1.2, port 2002, you create the two UDPIn ports with these parameters, and you have a one-to-one “connection” between the ports and the content.

Topic 2: iPlex IP Settings

Question Can iPlex work as a switch between VLAN ports?

Answer Yes. The iPlex has full VLAN capability on the GE ports. The way it works is as follows: you can group an arbitrary subset of the GE ports into a VLAN. Then you assign an IP address to this VLAN. Logically, it works like this:

You must go to the Configuration/IP Routing/VLAN menu, create a new VLAN, select which physical GE ports will be in this VLAN, and assign it an IP address/port. The iPlex will respond to that address on any of the selected ports, and will provide a traditional transparent bridge for unicast traffic. iPlex will not forward

427


multicast traffic between VLAN ports. The only exception is Spanning Tree BPDUs, which are automatically forwarded.

Question Do the control ports and GE ports need to be on different networks?

Answer Yes, they do. This means that you cannot have a streaming client in the same machine that you are using for control, unless that machine has multiple Ethernets to the different LANs.

NOTEIn the UDPOut configuration window, you can select into whichVLAN that particular traffic will egress. If the VLAN has multiplemembers and the UDPOut has a multicast destination IP address,by default, the packets will egress on all ports, but you can changethat in the Configuration/IP Routing/Multicast window.

428

Redundancy

Chapter 6

429


Network Redundancy Diagram

The TANDBERG Television (1+1) Redun-dancy SolutionThe TANDBERG Television iPlex product line offers (1:1) redundancy without the need for an external management system. This ensures maximum reliability with a fast switchover time in case of failure and avoids the need to use expensive video or ASI switchers. This model also allows for in-service software upgrades (that is, the ability to perform software upgrades with no down time).

A diagram of the iPlex Redundancy System is shown below.

NOTEThe Redundancy menus can be accessed by users in the root and administrator groups.

ATMsources

datasources

transport streamsources

ATMswitches

layer 2switches

ASID/As

video/audioD/As

ATMswitches

layer 2switches

externalswitches

ATMdestinations

datadestinations

transportstream

destinationsvideo/audiosources

ASI Outputcards

ATMcards

GigEports

ASI Input cards

Encodercards

ATMcards

GigEports

ASI Input cards

Encodercards

ASI Outputcards

ATMcards

GigEports

ATMcards

GigEports

Redundant iPlex System

Initial Hot-Standby Section

Initial Primary Section

ControlPC

430


Input Redundancy OptionsTo ensure fast switchover, both the primary and hot-standby components process the data in parallel. This requires that both the hot standby and the primary com-ponents have simultaneous access to the video and ASI input signals. The means by which this simultaneous access is done is left to the discretion of the customers (i.e., it is a trade-off between reliability and cost).

The following alternatives are available:

• Many receivers (video or ASI) have multiple outputs. These multiple outputs can be cableddirectly to primary/hot-standby pairs. A configuration such as this has a single point of failure(the receiver).

• If the receiver does not have multiple outputs, an appropriate Distribution Amplifier (D/A)can be used. Distribution Amplifiers are typically very reliable.

431


• Customers desiring maximum redundancy will use separate receivers for the primary/hot-standby pair.

Output Redundancy Options for IPTVEach iPlex has two Gigabit Ethernet ports for output. These ports use the indus-try-standard “Small Form-factor Pluggable” (SFP) transceivers, available as 1000BaseT copper, multimode fiber, or single-mode fiber. The configuration of these ports is up to the customer; the streams can be replicated on them, or split between them in any way.

In a redundant system, both ports are connected to the network, but only the pri-mary unit will be actually transmitting. The hot-standby unit will be “forming” the packets internally, but will not transmit to avoid duplication. If a redundancy switch happens (either automatically or manually), the unit transitioning from hot-standby to primary will start transmitting, and the unit transitioning from primary to hot-standby will stop transmitting. As with the control port, the primary/hot-standby gigabit data ports share one single IP address.

NOTE The iPlex has the capability of switching the redundancy on loss of input signal if so configured.

432


Customers have a few alternatives on how to connect the primary/hot-standby units to the distribution network. As with the input ports, these alternatives repre-sent a trade-off between cost and reliability, as follows:

• For customers seeking the lowest-cost solution, both outputs can be connected to the sameswitch or router. This choice again leads to a single point of failure (that particular switch orrouter). The backup iPlex turns off the gigabit link to make the operation simpler for therouter or switch.

• For customers seeking the maximum reliability option, each iPlex output can be connected toan independent switch.

iPlex

iPlex

Router NetworkiPlex

iPlex

Router Network

iPlexRouter

iPlexRouter

Network

iPlexRouter

iPlexiPlexRouterRouter

iPlexRouter

iPlexiPlexRouterRouter

NetworkNetwork

433


• An even more reliable architecture can be built by having two switches, and connecting eachiPlex to both switches, using both output ports. The iPlex implements the Spanning TreeProtocol in its data ports, which ensures that only one copy of each stream will be delivered.

Router

iPlex

Router

iPlex

Network

RouterRouter

iPlexiPlex

RouterRouter

iPlexiPlex

NetworkNetwork

434


iPlex Unit PairingThe iPlex does not need any special hardware to support redundancy. For iPlex, the redundancy is all software with the use of Ethernet and GE ports available on SCMs and MCMs subsystems. The front panel LCD is also used for displaying state of units in a redundant system.

The iPlex units are grouped into primary/hot-standby pairs. The two units in the pair are required to have the same configuration (that is, the same submodules in the same locations and the same licenses).

Redundancy Port on iPlexEach iPlex has a dedicated Ethernet 10/100 copper port for redundancy control. Pairs of redundant units are connected through this interface. Customers have a choice of just using a crossover or normal cable for this connection (to reduce the number of components; the system auto-detects MDI-MDIX), or using a switch interconnecting multiple units (to allow for flexibility when selecting the pairs). This “redundancy control network” is used by the paired units to exchange config-uration and state information, and to keep their settings synchronized.

Control Port on iPlexThe iPlex has another 10/100 copper Ethernet port for control. Web GUI, CLI and/or SNMP transactions happen through this port. Each iPlex has its own indi-vidual IP address for the control port. A redundant pair also has a common IP address, which is always used by whatever unit is currently the primary. This way, the management system (or the operator) does not need to know which individual unit is the primary (online) to be able to configure it. Configuration actions done to the primary unit are automatically reflected to the backup.

This port is also the first backup for the redundancy port. When communication over the redundancy port fails, all the traffic to the other unit happens on this port until the redundancy port up back to life.

4321

4321

CONTROL

REDUNDANCY

CONSOLE

ALARM

GE1

GE2

100/240 VAC~6A

LINK

STATU

S

IN

OU

TATM

/DS3

LINK

ATM/E3

STATU

S

IN

OU

TSTATUS

MM

LINK OC-3/STM

-1A

TMSTATUS

SM

LINK OC-3/STM

-1A

TM

RD

YA

CT

RD

YA

CT

AS

I OU

T

1A1B2A2BAUDIO

AV

Cenc

CI/Y

/SD

I

C2/CRDY

ACT

AUDIO

AV

Cenc

CI/Y

/SD

I

C2/CRDY

ACT

RD

YA

CT

RD

YA

CT

AS

I IN

1A1B2A2B

4321

4321

CONTROL

REDUNDANCY

CONSOLE

ALARM

GE1

GE2

100/240 VAC~6A

LINK

STATU

S

IN

OU

TATM

/DS3

LINK

ATM/E3

STATU

S

IN

OU

TSTATUS

MM

LINK OC-3/STM

-1A

TMSTATUS

SM

LINK OC-3/STM

-1A

TM

RD

YA

CT

RD

YA

CT

AS

I OU

T

1A1B2A2BAUDIO

AV

Cenc

CI/Y

/SD

I

C2/CRDY

ACT

AUDIO

AV

Cenc

CI/Y

/SD

I

C2/CRDY

ACT

RD

YA

CT

RD

YA

CT

AS

I IN

1A1B2A2B

Initial Primary Unit

Initial Hot-Standby Unit Connect the Redundancy Ports together ControlPCNetwork

435


Example Redundant iPlex System (Set up)The following is an example redundant iPlex system.

1 At initial installation, enter the IP address (SCM) and default gateway addressfor each iPlex. In this example, these addresses are:■ iPlex A IP address (SCM): 192.168.21.50■ iPlex A default gateway address: 192.168.21.1■ iPlex B IP address (SCM): 192.168.21.51■ iPlex B default gateway address: 192.168.21.1

NOTEYou must enter these addresses at initial installation using either the LCD keypad or serial port in order to get the units on the local sub-net. Refer to the Installation and Hardware Specification Guide for more information.

iPlex A (Primary [initially])- SCM (192.168.21.50a)- MCM (identical to iPlex B MCM)- Default gateway (192.168.21.1a)- Chassis (192.168.21.52)

iPlex B (Standby [initially])- SCM (192.168.21.51a)- MCM (identical to iPlex A MCM)- Default gateway (192.168.21.1a)- Chassis (leave as 0.0.0.0)

Virtual IP Address(192.168.21.52)

10.1.1.1

10.1.1.2

RedundancyPort Cable

a These IP addresses be set at installation using either the LCD keypad or serial port in order to get the units on the local subnet.(Refer to the Install Guide for more information.)

436


2 From the SCM General Configuration screen for each iPlex unit, enter thevirtual P address for the primary iPlex and the redundancy IP address for eachiPlex. In this example, these addresses are:■ iPlex A (primary) virtual IP address: 192.168.21.52■ iPlex A redundancy IP address: 10.1.1.1■ iPlex B redundancy IP address: 10.1.1.2

3 From the Redundancy Configuration screen of the Primary iPlex, enter theredundancy IP address of the standby iPlex (10.1.1.2 in this example) and thenenable redundancy configuration.

iPlex A (Primary [initially]) iPlex B (Standby [initially])

Redundancy IP Address

Virtual IP Address

192.168.21.52

10.1.1.1 10.1.1.2

0.0.0.0 (leave as is)

10.1.1.2

iPlex A (Primary [initially]) 10.1.1.2(Redundancy IPAddress of Standby[iPlex B])

437


When the system has finished synchronizing, the following Redundancy Config-uration screen appears.

Example Redundant iPlex System (Flip)

NOTEThe two iPlexes must be identical for redundancy to work. If you get an error message when you enable redundancy, make sure both the hardware and the licenses of the two iPlex units are the same.

NOTETANDBERG Television recommends that you log into the virtual IP address of the iPlex pair (192.168.21.52 in this example) rather than the IP address of the iPlex that happens to be primary when manag-ing the redundant iPlex system.

iPlex A (Primary [initially])

438


Click Flip on the Redundancy Configuration screen to switch the iPlex units between primary and standby.

Before Flip (iPlex A is primary)

After Flip (iPlex B is primary)

Redundancy IP address = iPlex B

Redundancy IP address = iPlex A

After Flip (iPlex A is backup)Redundancy IP address = iPlex B

439


Example Redundant iPlex System (Failover)Monitor the Redundancy Statistics screen to determine which iPlex unit is pri-mary and which is standby. The iPlex units will flip automatically when there is an alarm condition. When this happens, replace or repair the resulting standby unit to return it to service as the new functional standby unit.

Before Flip (iPlex A is primary)

After Flip (iPlex B is primary)


Redundancy IP address = iPlex A

After Flip (iPlex A is backup)


440


Example Redundant iPlex System (Upgrade)The basic procedure is as follows:

1 Upgrade the backup unit.

2 Flip the primary and backup units.

3 Upgrade the new backup unit (old primary unit).

Refer to In-service Upgrade on page 61 for the procedure on how to upgrade the software of a redundant iPlex system without disrupting service.

441


Operational Aspects of Redundancy

Configuration Changes and RedundancyConfiguration changes made to a primary unit automatically change configuration of the associated hot-standby unit, as well.

Operating Method Using External Redun-dancy SwitchesThis section explains how you can use external redundancy switches in conjunc-tion with the iPlex platform. The external redundancy switches switch between redundant ASI Outputs. You can use any hardware switch that provides at least one of the modes of operations described in the following sections.

Automatic Mode When you configure an external switch in automatic mode, it does not need oper-ator intervention for switching to the redundant output in the event of failure of the output from the primary blade. The switch is capable of detecting the alarm on the primary chain and able to switch to the output of the hot-standby unit auto-matically. The iPlex supports this mode and handles the transition seamlessly with-out user intervention in the event of failures.

When you decide to use this operation mode, you must set the iPlex redundancy Mode to “Automatic.”

Manual Mode When you configure an external switch in manual mode, it does require manual intervention for switching to the redundant output in the event of failure of the output from the primary unit. In this mode, the external redundancy switches are capable of detecting and sounding the alarm on the primary chain but they will not switch to the backup output until you manually activate the switch. The iPlex sup-ports this mode in the same way as automatic, and handles the transition to the backup blade internally. However, remember that you still need to switch to output of the standby unit on the external switch.

When you decide to use the manual operation mode, you must set the iPlex Redundancy Mode to “Manual.”

NOTEIt is very important that you save all configuration changes to the startup config file, as changes are not automatically saved. See Copy Startup on page 122 and Copy Running on page 123 on how to save the running-config to the startup.

442


AlarmsThe iPlex supports three configurable alarms: Loss of Encoder Sync, Loss of ASI Input, and Loss of ATM Link.

When you enable Loss of Encoder Sync alarm, a primary unit reboots if its encoder submodule detects loss of input. Rebooting the primary unit results in a redundancy flip; the primary unit’s associated hot-standby unit becomes the pri-mary. In a similar fashion, when you enable the Loss of ASI Input alarm, a primary unit reboots if its ASI input submodule detects a loss of input. When you enable the Loss of ATM Link alarm, a primary unit reboots if its ATMInput submodule detects loss of link.

Sync FilesSelecting the Sync Files button results in the synchronization of file systems between the primary SCM and the backup SCM. Then the files contained in the flash directory, the pcmcia/data directory, and the config directory transfer from the primary SCM to the hot-standby SCM. The exception to this is the star-

443


tup-config file in the config directory. The startup-config file transfers automati-cally to the backup SCM at initialization.

NOTEThe Sync Files button is only available if you have redundant iPlexes.

444

Packet Formats

Appendix A

445


Packet FormatsThis appendix describes the method that the TANDBERG Television data input devices use to partition framed or unframed data into MPEG-2 packets. This description is directed to developers who are responsible for a DVB decoder that must reconstruct an original packet at the receiving end.

The table below provides references to the packet formats available through the iPlex.

MPEG Section Packet FormatMPEG-2 private_sections and all derivatives of the MPEG-2 private_section including MPEG-2 Program Specific Information (PSI) sections and DSMCC_sections ( all sections) may be provided as input to the iPlex by selecting the MPEG-2 Section packetizer. MPEG-2 PSI sections include the PAT (program_association_section), the CAT (CA_sections) and PMT (TS_program_map_section).

The private_section format allows data to be transmitted with the minimum of structure while enabling a decoder to parse the stream. The sections may be used in two ways:

■ Set the ‘section_syntax_ indicator’ to ‘1’, to signal the whole structure (“long”section format). This format is common to all MPEG-2 private_sectionsincluding PSI tables.

■ Set the field to ‘0’ when only the fields ‘table_id’ through ‘section _length’ arepresent (“short” section format).

UI Name See Reference

MPEG-2 Transport Standard MPEG-2 (ISO 13818-1)

DVB MPE MPE Packetizer

Data Piping Other Packet Formats — Data Piping

MPEG-2 Section Sections as standard MPEG-2 (ISO 13818-1)

446


Refer to ISO/IEC 13818-1 (MPEG-2 Systems) and ISO 13818-1 (2.4.4) for fur-ther details.

Section formats carried in the MPEG-2 Transport Stream are:■ CAS sections■ EIT sections■ MPE Datagram sections■ NIT sections■ PAT sections■ PMT sections■ SDT sections

MPE PacketizerMultiprotocol Encapsulation routes IP datagrams from multiple native data-link-layer formats to MPEG transport format.

Format No. of bitstable_id 8section_syntax_indicator 1private_indicator 1reserved 2section_length 12if (section_syntax_indicator == ‘1’) {

table_id_extension 16reserved 2version_number 5current_next_indicator 1section_number 8last_section_number 8

}private_data_byte 8

if(section_syntax_indicator == ‘1’) {CRC_32 32

}

447


MultiprotocolEncapsulation

The following diagram illustrates the IP datagram encapsulation.

For detailed information, see EN 301 192 V1.1.1 (1997-12) European Standard (Tele-communications series) Digital Video Broadcasting (DVB).

Transport Header A 4-byte MPE compliant header that consists of:■ Eight sync bits having a field value of 0x47

SyncByte

(8)

TransportError

Indicator(1)

PayloadUnit StartIndicator

(1)

TransportPriority

(1)

PID

(13)

TransportScrambling

Control(2)

AdaptationField

Control(2)

ContinuityCount

(4)

Header4

TableID

(8)

AddressScrambling

Control(2)

LLCSNAPFlag(1)

CurrentNext

Indicator(1)

SectionNumber

(8)

LastSectionNumber

(8)

MACAddress

4(8)

MACAddress

3(8)

MACAddress

2(8)

MACAddress

1(8)

SectionSyntax

Indicator(1)

PrivateIndicator

(1)

Reserved

(2)

Reserved

(2)

PrivateSectionLength

(12)

PayloadScrambling

Control(2)

MACAddress

6(8)

MACAddress

5(8)

Datagram Section41<=n<=1512

IP Datagram Data Bytes

46<=n<=1500

StuffingBytes

(0)

CRC-32Checksum

(32)

Padding

1<=n<=183

IPHeader

20

UDPHeader

8

UDP Payload

1<=n<=1472

Padding

1<=n<=17

Key(n) = bitsn = bytes

Pointer(8)

Payload184

Header4

Payload184

Header4

Payload184

448


■ A 1-bit Transport Error Indicator set to 0b■ A 1-bit Payload Unit Start indicator set to 1b in the first MPEG transport frame

and 0b in the remaining MPEG transport frames comprising the encapsulateddatagram. In the case of back to back sections this bit also sets when the newsection starts in the MPEG payload.

■ A 1-bit Transport Priority having a field value of 0b.■ A 13-bit PID.■ A 2-bit Transport Scrambling Control having a field value 00b. This is not

scrambled.■ A 2-bit Adaptation Field Control having a field value of 01b. The transport

consists only of payload and has no adaptation field.■ A 4-bit Continuity Count (increments for each packet) using 0x0 — 0xF.■ An 8-bit pointer having field value 0x00. Sections always start as the next byte.

Only the first MPEG transport frame of the encapsulation include the Pointer.In back-to-back sections the Pointer field appears with the PUSI bit set. Thepointer value equals the number of bytes until the new section starts in theMPEG payload.

For format, see ISO 13818-1.

Datagram Section ■ Eight-bit Table ID having a field value of 0x3E. The Table ID defines a DSM-CC section with private data.

■ One-bit Section Syntax Indicator having a field value of 0b if the CRC_32/Checksum field contains a checksum. A 1b indicates the field contains a CRC-32.

■ A 1-bit Private Indicator having a field value of 1b if the indicator complimentsthe section_syntax_indicator flag.

■ A 2-bit Reserved field having a field value of 11b.■ A 12-bit Section Length indicating the number of bytes from MAC_address_6

to the end of the datagram_section.■ The sixth-byte of the MAC address.■ The fifth-byte of the MAC address.■ A 2-bit Reserved field having the field value of 11b.■ A 2-bit Payload Scrambling Control having a field value of 00b. This field is

unscrambled.■ A 2-bit Address Scrambling Control having a field value of 00b. This field is

unscrambled.■ A 1-bit Current Next Indicator field having a field value of 1b.■ An 8-bit Section Number field having a field value of 0x00. Section_number

fields are limited to one per datagram_section.■ An 8-bit Last Section Number having a field value of 0x00.■ The fourth-byte of the MAC address.

449


■ The third-byte of the MAC address.■ The second-byte of the MAC address.■ The first-byte of the MAC address.■ An 8-bit IP Datagram Data field. A maximum MTU of 4080 bytes without the

LLC_SNAP header. A maximum MTU of 4072 bytes with the LLC_SNAPheader.

■ An 8-bit Stuffing Bytes field. TANDBERG Television does not use thisoptional field, which has no specified value.

■ A 32-bit CRC-32 Checksum field. The checksum value is calculated over theentire datagram section. If the section syntax indicator is one then this is aCRC_32. If the indicator is zero, then the field is a checksum. A checksumvalue of zero indicates the checksum was not calculated. A true zero checksumis set to 0xFFFFFFFF.

The MAC AddressField

The MAC address field contains the destination MAC address. The MAC address is stored in the format required by the MPE specification. The MAC_address_6 field contains the lowest byte of the MAC address, and the MAC_address_1 field contains the most significant byte of the MAC address. If the least significant bit of MAC_address_1 is “1”, it indicates a multicast MAC address. (Everything is dis-cussed in terms of bytes in memory not on the wire. Internet standard bit order. Thus, 01:XX:XX:XX:XX:XX is a multicast address.)

TANDBERG Television allows the user to enter the MAC address from the user interface in case no other method exists to obtain the destination MAC address. Note the following information concerning the MAC address field:

You must input the destination MAC address for a directed IP address. Any MAC address, including the MAC broadcast address (FF:FF:FF:FF:FF:FF), a multicast MAC address, or a directed MAC address may be input. (TANDBERG Television does not recommend the MAC broadcast address.)

For a class D, multicast IP address (224.0.0.0 to 239.255.255.255), either input the value or use the multicast address conversion proposed in RFC 1112. The IP address to MAC address mapping occurs as follows:48-bit MAC Address 00000001 00000000 01011110 0XXXXXXXX XXXXXXXX XXXXXXXXClass D IP Address 1110YYYY YXXXXXXXX XXXXXXXX XXXXXXXX

The RFC maps the lower 23 bits of the class D, IP address (X) to the Ethernet MAC address. With the next five bits of the IP address (Y) unused in forming the MAC address, multiple IP addresses can map to the same MAC address. The upper 25 bits of the MAC address are set to 01:00:5E:XX:XX:XX an address owned by the Internet Assigned Numbers Authority for multicast host group mapping.

Broadcast IP address can map in the same manner as directed IP addresses. Do not forward limited broadcast IP addresses (255.255.255.255).

450


IP Datagram Data Each IP datagram stores in one MPE datagram section. Thus, each MPEG trans-port packet containing the Payload Unit Start Indicator (PUSI) bit set indicates the beginning of a new section and a new IP datagram. (See the diagram.) Datagrams are limited to one per section, resulting in a limit of one datagram construction per datagram_section.

LLC_SNAPHeader

The eight byte IP LLC_SNAP header appears as: 0xAA 0xAA 0x03 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x08 0x00.

Data PipingA packetizer used for encapsulating either a proprietary byte protocol or a syn-chronous bit stream.

Transport Header A 4-byte MPEG-2 compliant header: refer to ISO 13818-1 for more information.

Data Source data (payload only). The maximum number of bytes is 184 per packet.

If the data piping timeout is not enabled, the packetizer will wait until it collects 184 bytes from the data source before issuing a transport packet.

If the timeout is enabled, the packetizer may issue a partially-filled transport packet, if the source does not provide 184 bytes within the timeout period. In this case, the remaining bytes will be presented as an adaptation field filled with 0xFF as padding.

Transport header

4 bytes

Payload

Up to 184 bytes

Sync byte

(8)

Transport Error

Indicator (1)

Payload Unit Start Indicator

(1)

Transport Priority

(1)

PID

(13)

Transport Scrambling

Control(2)

Adaptation Field Con-

trol(2)

Continuity Count

(4)

451


452

Video Traffic Shaping

Appendix B

453


Video Traffic ShapingThis appendix discusses the basic application, issues, and underlying techniques used by video traffic shapers. The examples given here mainly apply to com-pressed audio-visual programs carried via the MPEG-2 transport protocol.

What is Traffic Shaping?

Traffic shaping is the general term given to a broad range of techniques that enforce prioritization policies on the transmission of data over a network link. Conceptually, data traffic shaping is the real-time modification or shaping of the dynamic bit rate profile of data traffic. The implementation of traffic shaping involves determining the sequence of departure times of incoming packets to match the specified egress rate profile. In almost all cases of interest, the desired profile is a lower average bit rate than the input; this gives rise to methods for alter-ing the rate profile using packet buffering. By buffering incoming packets and streaming them out after applying an appropri-ate scheduling algorithm, it is possible to match a variety of rate shapes that are independent of the input arrival pattern. In particular, when the long-term average bit rate of the input and desired profiles are sufficiently close, the combination of buffering and scheduling allows successful traffic shaping with reliable data trans-fer. However, if the discrepancy between the input and desired profiles is too high, practical networking devices with finite buffers resort to packet dropping. The delay of offending packets in the shaping buffers causes an increased average delay with higher variance. The state of variances in the delay experienced by different packets is called “jitter.” This is the result of forwarding compliant packets with lower delay than offending packets.

Why Use Video Traffic Shaping?Video traffic shaping is necessary because of the high cost involved in transmitting the high bit rates typically required for transmitting video programs. To under-stand the economics of compression better, refer to the key concept of the digital video that requires a large quantity of bits every second to adequately represent the video content. TV viewers prefer—and would pay more—to have more channel selections, but physical broadcast television transmission channels have limited capacity. Thus providers of broadcast television services have a direct economic incentive to provide the maximum number of TV channels on their existing trans-mission facilities. This directly translates into a never-ending demand for greater video compression. Of course, TV viewers want TV programs to look good as well! Therefore, there is a clear trade-off between the number of video programs available on a transmission channel and the perceptual quality of those programs. This trade-off is the classic problem addressed by video traffic shaping.

In general, video traffic shaping is necessary whenever real-time video traffic—uncompressed or pre-compressed—must be transmitted over physical channels. The four following scenarios require video shaping:

Traffic Policers enforce trafficpolicies using an instantaneous

approach, by immediately discardingdata packets which violate the policy,

while forwarding compliant packets.

Traffic Shapers enforce trafficpolicies using a longer term

approach, by smoothing incomingpackets using packet buffers, anddiscarding packets only when the

input violates the policy overprolonged intervals.

Thus traffic shapers result in lowerdata loss, while traffic policers exhibitlower average delay and jitter due to

absence of buffering.

454


• Maximizing the number of video traffic flows—and hence revenues—sent over a givenchannel at a given quality.

• Forwarding video traffic from a higher capacity network into a lower capacity network whileminimizing the impact on quality. The economic case here is the revenue obtainable fromvideo delivery services to destinations that are not serviced by expensive high-capacitynetworks.

• Shaping the rate profile from a variable rate profile into a smooth constant bit rate; preferablywith no quality degradation. This makes video delivery possible over networks that are simplerand cheaper to engineer than those supporting variable rate traffic.

• Lowering the bandwidth allocated to video on existing transmission channels, if the freedbandwidth can be used for more lucrative forms of content, such as enterprise data delivery.

Classes of RequirementsThe iPlex implements single stream video traffic shaping.

Single StreamMPEG-2 Traffic

Shaping

Given:• An uncompressed or MPEG-2 SPTS compressed input stream, and

• A traffic descriptor specificationShape the stream such that:• The output bitstream complies with the MPEG-2 SPTS syntax and buffer models.

• The traffic profile of the stream satisfies the given traffic specification.

• The perceptual distortion between the decompressed output and corresponding input isminimized.

Video TrafficDescriptors

Typical examples of traffic descriptors include CBR and VBR descriptors.

CBR Output Traffic DescriptorAttributes:

• Constant output bit rate

• Maximum output buffering delay

SPTS (Single Program TransportStreams) contain transport

packets corresponding to each ofthe elementary streams

comprising the program, as wellas packets carrying the required

PSI table sections, all multiplexedtogether according to the rules

specified in the MPEG-2 Systemsspecification.



very narrow range.

455


VBR Output Traffic Descriptor

The VBR output traffic descriptor has the following attributes:

• Long-term average bit rate

• Short-term average peak rate


Alternate VBR descriptors exist with the following attributes:

• Minimum short-term bit rate

• Maximum short-term bit rate




456

Finding MAC Addresses

Appendix C

457


Finding the MAC Address of a Network DeviceThe procedure to find the MAC address of a network device (that is installed in the network and active) is to ping it and look it up in the dynamic ARP table of the device from which you performed the test. The format of these commands are:

Windows:ping IP_Addressarp -a

Unix:ping -c 1 IP_Addressarp -a -n

In both cases, the arp command will dump a list of all known entries in the host being used for the test. You then must identify the one that corresponds to the desired IP address.

This procedure can also be performed in the SCM shell. An example is provided below where the MAC address corresponding to IP Address 192.168.200.2 is determined. The commands to be typed at the prompt are shown in blue, the iPlex responses are in black, and the resulting MAC address is in red.

[root@iplex] shellsh-2.04# ping -c 1 192.168.200.2PING 192.168.200.2 (192.168.200.2): 56 data bytes64 bytes from 192.168.200.2: icmp_seq=0 ttl=255 time=4.6 ms

--- 192.168.200.2 ping statistics ---1 packets transmitted, 1 packets received, 0% packet lossround-trip min/avg/max = 4.6/4.6/4.6 mssh-2.04# arp -a -n | grep 192.168.200.2? (192.168.200.2) at 00:03:47:07:E8:31 [ether] on vlan_2sh-2.04# exitexit[root@iplex]

458

Former Media RoutingConfiguration

Appendix D

459


Configuring Media RoutingThe Media Routing Configuration page contains several display frames for con-figuration purposes. Routing tools allow you to designate Program Routes, Add Programs, Stream Routes, and Remove Selected items.

Display Frames The top-left frame on the page displays the Output or Input List. There are two options to view the information below, either as Programs or Streams. Clicking the Streams radio button will give you a display of PIDs present in the Transport Stream. The top-right frame, Media Routing, will display the choices available. Beneath the Media Routing frame, you will see Routing Tools and Media Routing Information. When you want to create a program route, you must first select the desired output in the Output/Input List (top-left). The Media Routing frame will display your options (top-right). For example, “You can add a program route, cre-ate a new program or add a stream route.”

Navigating MediaRouting

When inside Media Routing, do not use the browser’s navigation tools. Instead, use the Back button that appears in the top-right frame, when required. To return to the original port values, just click the name of the port in the dark blue rectangle under Output/Input List.

Media Routing TextColors

.

NOTEIf your program is listed in yellow, this indicates a route exists butthere is no program present. You may have a disconnected inputcable or the program may have been stopped at the source.

460


Color plays an important role in understanding text within Media Routing:

Red means “inactive” (you must click Apply to activate).

Blue means “active” (for programs, stream routes, and user created programs).

Green is an active element within a program.

Yellow is a ghost program (created route with no program on the input).

Basics of MediaRouting

A Transport Stream, containing unique packet identifiers (PIDs), received by the iPlex via ASIIn (two per submodule), may contain many elementary streams multi-plexed together. The iPlex software analyzes the content and allows you to reorga-nize the stream elements into new programs, which it can then route to multiple output ports. To understand this complex process, the following definitions of the Transport Stream content will help you configure the iPlex’s routing features.

Transport Stream: One or more programs, each of which contains one or more elementary streams and other streams, such as data, multiplexed together.

Program: A number given to a service that is used to reference one or more ele-ments.

Element: An entity, such as video or audio data, which is put together with other elements to make up a program.

To have a better understanding of these definitions, look at the Statistics page for ASIIn, which displays information that the iPlex gathers from the Transport Stream. Program information is as follows: MPEG program number, DVB name, DVB original network ID, and DVB service type. That is, the program identifier number, the name of the program, the original network number assigned to it, and the service type; for example, Digital Television Service and Data Broadcast Ser-vice. If you click the Element radio button, it will display the PIDs associated with the program and element type. Clicking Stream will display all the PID informa-tion in the Transport Stream along with DVB table information. Stream statistics gives you a detailed view of the Transport Stream.

There is a direct correlation between the Program and Element information that comes from Program Specific Information (PSI) as described in the MPEG speci-fication. Stream statistics gives PID information also contained in the Element sta-tistics and other data existing in the Transport Stream.

The method for routing media is to start by creating a program route using pro-grams already existing in the Transport Stream, or creating new programs for rout-ing. However, first you need to select an output device, and if required, add element streams to the new program. PIDs must be unique and are associated with a specific element. More than one program can share the same element. If there are PID conflicts, you can configure the iPlex to fix them automatically.

Program Routingvs. Stream

Routing

The iPlex provides two types of media routing: program routing and stream rout-ing.

The simpler of the two is stream routing. It is used to route individual PIDs from inputs to outputs, optionally remapping the PID value. This means that the iPlex will take all packets of PID X on the specified input and transmit them on the

461


specified output, changing the PID to Y. No changes are made to any output tables.

Program routing is more intelligent, but relies on the input PSI tables. Program routing means that the iPlex takes all the elements from Program X in the speci-fied input and routes them to the specified output as Program Y, resolving any conflicts. In this mode, the iPlex parses the PMT for the input, identifies all of the program elements, routes these program elements, and copies any PAT, PMT, and SDT entries (including any descriptors) from the input to the output. The output tables are modified accordingly.

The iPlex will also automatically resolve any PID conflicts. For example, if the routed program has an element on PID 0x200, but PID 0x200 is already in use in the output, the iPlex will automatically remap the incoming PID 0x200 to a free PID and adjust the tables accordingly. As well, if the input program changes (for example, a new PID with an additional audio channel is added), the iPlex will auto-matically adjust by routing any new elements, resolving any PID conflicts, and adjusting the tables.

When to Use StreamRouting

Use stream routing when you want to be in full control of the output PID alloca-tion.

When to UseProgram Routing

Use program routing to have the iPlex manage output PID allocation.

How to set upMedia Routing

The following operations are described in this section:

• Adding a Program Route

• Adding a Program

• Creating a Program

• Adding an Element

• Creating an Element

• Adding a Video Element

• Adding an Audio Element

• Adding a Data Element

• Adding a Stream Route

The section also lists DVB Standard PID Numbers.

Adding a ProgramRoute

If you want to add a program route on a UDPOut port, for example, select the UDPOut port from the drop-down list. If you are already at the port, return to the starting point by clicking the port name in the dark blue bar. This will display the Program Route button in Routing Tools.

Click the Program Route button. Then in the Input List select an input port; for example, ASIIn. This will display all available programs by number along with ele-ments contained in the program. By clicking a program number, you can view pro-

462


gram information. However, to route a program, or programs, you must select the applicable check boxes, and click the Route Selected button. If the program does not have a check box, it means that the program has already been routed.

.

A form containing all the programs you selected will display. This form allows you to optionally change the program number and PMT PID. On a given output port, the program numbers must be unique. If you want the iPlex to automatically resolve program number conflicts, select the check box on the Program Auto Fix column.

The iPlex will only change the program in case of conflicts; otherwise, it will default to the original program number. Multiple programs are allowed to use the same PMT PID. However, if the selected PMT PID is already in use in the output, the route will fail. You can select the check box under the PMT Auto Fix to have the iPlex automatically resolve PMT PID conflicts. Finally, note that the iPlex will always automatically fix any program element PID conflicts. Click on the Route button to complete the process.

NOTEIf the Apply button is visible, it means that your previous configura-tion has not been applied.

463


The Program Routes Output screen displays. There is one line for each route. If the line is green, the route succeeds. If the line is red, there is a problem with the route—either a program number conflict or a PMT PID conflict.

Click OK to acknowledge. In the next screen, click Apply to establish the routes that are OK (marked in green).

.

For the failed routes, you will have to start the process again and fix the problems. Selecting the Program Auto Fix and PMT Auto Fix check boxes guarantees that the route will succeed.

Adding a Program You can add custom programs to output ports. First, you have to select the output port and click Add Program, fill out the form, and click the Create button. The new port appears in the port list in red. At this point, you can click the Apply but-ton to commit the changes and create the program, or Revert to cancel. Clicking Apply will change the entry to blue. Notice that this entry also has (User) next to the program number, meaning that you created it.

Program Number: Enter the desired program number. Program numbers need to be unique in an output port.

PMT PID (hex): Enter the desired PMT PID in hexadecimal. Multiple programs can share the same PMT, or the selected PID must be available.

PCR PID (hex): Enter the desired PCR PID in hexadecimal (enter “1FFF” if the program has no PCR).

NOTEThis is an information box only.

464


.

Enable SDT Info: Select this check box if you want an SDT entry for this pro-gram.

Enable CA Info: Select this check box if you want to specify conditional access for this program.

Creating a Program In the Program Creation form, type values and click Create. Once created, you can configure the program to enable CA and SDT information by clicking the new entry. Select the appropriate check boxes, fill out the resulting form, and click Apply.

The Output List check boxes on the right of a user-created program or program route enable you to delete a selected item when you click the Remove Selected button.

NOTEIf you create a program on an ASI Output and specify a PID that does not contain a valid PCR, none of the elements of this program will be transmitted. The iPlex must see the PCRs to properly sched-ule the PIDs.

465


Program Configuration

SDT InformationOriginal Network ID: Type the Original Network Identifier number.

EIT Schedule: Select check box if you want to flag that an EIT schedule is in the Transport Stream..

EIT Present Following: Select check box if you want to flag that Present Follow-ing information is in the Service Description Table (see EN 300 468).

Free CA Mode: Select check box if the program is scrambled.

Running Status: Select from the following: Undefined, Not running, Starts in a few seconds, Pausing, and Running.


Service Provider Name: Type the name of the service provider.

Service Name: Type the service name.

NOTEiPlex does not generate the EIT. You must provide it through an input port and route it.

466


CA InformationSystem ID: Enter a number for the CA system ID between 0 and 65535.

System PID: Enter the system PID number (hexadecimal), to specify the EMM PID at the program level, between 0x0 - 0x1fff..

Private Data: This is user-specific access criteria in hexadecimal.

Adding an Element You can add new elements for any program on an output port. Select the output port then click the program on which you want to add the element. Then click Add Element. The Element Creation form will display.

In the Element Creation form type the Program Number, PID Number in hexadecimal, and select Stream Type. If the stream type is colored in light blue, you must add a value in the accompanying box. Click Create..

Creating an Element Program Number: Type the program number.

PID Number (hex): Type PID number in hexadecimal for this element.

Stream Type: Select Stream Type from the following list: Reserved, MPEG1 Video, MPEG2 Video, MPEG1 Audio, MPEG2 Audio, Private Sections, PES packet, MHEG, DSM CC, H.222.1, type A, type B, type C, type D, auxiliary, Reserved (add value), DCII, AC-3 Audio, and User Private (add value)..

NOTEWhen entering PID numbers, it is not necessary to type the prefix 0x.

NOTEThis operation only creates the element in the PMT. You still need to route the actual data to the selected PID using a stream route (described later in this section).

NOTEFor information on individual parameters consult EN ISO/IEE 13818-1.

467


Select Enable CA Info check box, if applicable; and select Video, Audio, Data or None from Element Descriptor. Fill out the resulting form and click OK.

If you select CA Info, additional boxes will display.

System ID: Enter conditional access identifier.

System PID: Enter conditional access PID number in hexadecimal. This specifies the ECM PID at the element level.

Private Data: Enter private data.

Adding a VideoElement

Selecting Video from Element Descriptor will display the Video Information form.

Video InformationMultiple Frame Rate: Select check box to use multiple frame rate.

Frame Rate Code: Select Frame Rate Code from the following list: Forbidden, 23.976, 24.000, 25.000, 29.970, 30.000, 50.000, 59.940, and 60.000

Constrained Parameter: Select check box for constrained parameter.

Still Picture: Select check box for still picture.

468


MPEG-1 Only: Selecting this check box will display the following: ■ Profile and Level: Enter a value (0-255).■ Chrominance Format: Select from the following list: 4:2:0, 4:2:2, and 4:4:4■ Frame Rate Extension: Select check box to use frame rate extension.

Adding an AudioElement

Selecting Audio from Element Descriptor will display the Audio Information form.

Audio InformationLanguage Code: Type language code.

Audio Type: Select Audio Type from the following list: Undefined, Clean effect, Hearing impaired, and Visual impaired commentary.

Enable Audio Descriptor: Selecting check box opens the following parameters: Free Format, ID, Layer (select Reserved, Layer 1, Layer 2, Layer 3 or User Defined), and Variable Rate.

CA Information: Enter a System ID, System PID, and relevant Private Data in Hex format, as applicable. For each row, click Add to apply the row, or select the delete check box by the row to be deleted and click Delete. For each additional row to be added, reselect Enable CA Information and repeat the process.

469


Adding a DataElement

Selecting Data from Element Descriptor will display the Data Information form.

Data InformationBroadcast ID: Select Broadcast ID from the following list: User Defined, Data Piping, User Defined (add value), Multiprotocol Encapsulation, Data Carousel, and Object Carousel.

Language Code: Type language code.

Optional Text: Type optional text.

MAC Address Range: Select MAC Address Range from the following list: 6.5.4.3.2.1, 6.5.4.3.2, 6.5.4.3, 6.5.4, 6.5, and 6.

MAC IP Mapping: Select check box to use MAC IP Mapping flag.

Alignment Indicator: Select check box for alignment indicator.

Max Section: Enter the maximum number of sections for each datagram.

470


Adding a StreamRoute

Stream routes allow you to route all packets in a given PID from an input to an output, optionally remapping the PID. First click the Stream Route button from Routing Tools. Then select an Input port from the drop-down list and select the Streams radio button.

Select the check box for the desired service information, and click Route Selected. Fill out the resulting form by specifying an Output PID and Auto Fix, then click the Route button.

Stream Route

Output PID (hex): Enter the PID you want to use in the output stream.

Auto Fix: Select the check box if you want the system to automatically fix output PID conflicts.

Click OK and then the configuration needs to be applied by clicking the Apply button or click Revert.

471


DVB Standard PIDNumbers

The following table is a listing of standard DVB PID numbers. In the example below, PID numbers 0x0-0x14 are reserved for specific uses based on the DVB specification. The rest are configurable and customer-specific.

.

Digital video broadcast tables:

• PAT (Program Association Table): A part of PSI, this table indicates the location of thecorresponding PMT. It also gives the location of the NIT.

• PMT (Program Map Table): A part of PSI, this table identifies and indicates the location ofpart of the stream that makes up each service, and the location of the Program ClockReference (PCR) fields for service.

• SDT (Service Description Table): A DVB SI table that contains the services in the system, forexample,. names of services, the service provider, etc.

• NIT (Network Information Table): A DVB SI table that provides physical information aboutthe network.

• TDT (Time and Date Table): A DVB SI table that gives information relating to the presenttime and date. This information is given a separate table due to its frequent updating.

• EIT (Event Information Table): A DVB SI table that contains data concerning events orprograms such as event name, start time, and duration.

PID (hex) Content Description

0x0 PAT Program Association Table

0x1 CAT Conditional Access Table

0x10 NIT Network Information Table

0x11 SDT Service Description Table

0x12 EIT Event Information Table

0x14 TDT Time and Date Table

NOTEOther DVB tables do not have fixed PIDs, including the PMT (Pro-gram Map Table), the EMM (Entitlement Management Message), and the ECM (Entitlement Control Message).

472


Configuration Scenario 1: Routing a Sin-gle Program from ASIIn to UDPOutThe first configuration might be a setup for receiving a Transport Stream contain-ing video information sent to an IP set-top box through the Gigabit Ethernet port as a channel for watching the video content.

Physical SetupMCM: ASIIn cable to ASIIn port


STEPS1 Creating a VLAN—as a point of reference for the Gigabit Ethernet.

2 Configuring ASIIn port.

3 Checking ASIIn statistics.

4 Create a UDPOut port.

5 Configure Media Routing—to direct the program from ASIIn to UDPOut.

6 Check port statistics.

7 Select channel at IP set-top box—and view video content.

NOTEYou can also find this scenario in the Command Line Interface Ref-erence Guide, see section “Single Program Route from ASIIn to UDPOut Using CLI.“

473


STEP 1: Settingup the VLAN

Configuration > IP Routing > VLANIn the VLAN Configuration page enter the following parameters:

• IP address of port—depends on user network. Example: 172.30.1.1

• Subnet mask—depends on user network. Example: 255.255.255.0

• Select GE1 and Untagged from the drop-down box to select the Gigabit Ethernet 1 port, orselect Tagged if your network uses VLAN tags (if you are not sure, ask your networkadministrator).

Click the Add button or use the Delete button in conjunction with the Delete check box to remove the entry. After completing the configuration, click the Apply button.

Check SCMClick Home on the main menu tree or go to the physical iPlex chassis; on the SCM you should see a green light by the selected Gigabit Ethernet if it has an opti-cal fiber connection.




GE (Gigabit Ethernet) AnEthernet technology that raises

transmission speed to 1 Gbps. Itis used primarily for backbones.The first IEEE standard (802.3z)

for Gigabit Ethernet defined itsuse over Multi-mode optical fiber

providing full-duplex operationfrom switch to end station or toanother switch and half-duplex

using CSMA/CD in a sharedenvironment.

NOTEThe first VLAN ID default is “2.”

474


STEP 2:Configuring

ASIIn

Configuration > MCM > ASIIn > ASIIn1/6In the ASIIn Configuration page type a description of the interface and select the active channel (the ASIIn submodule has two physical inputs, A and B—input A is located at the top of that submodule). The stream type must match the incoming stream (GI, MPEG, DVB or ATSC). For this example, we will assume a DVB feed. For DVB feeds, you have the option of parsing the SDT, NIT, and CAT—more information about the stream displays (for example, program names from the SDT). After completing the configuration, click Apply.

STEP 3:Checking ASIIn

Statistics

Statistics > MCM > ASIIn > ASIIN1/6If the Programs List is empty, there is no feed. Check by clicking Stream. If there are no statistics, then there is no signal. Check the port: Statistics > Ports >ASIIn. The port should say “In Sync.” If the port says “No Signal,” there is a problem with the connection or the feed upstream.

STEP 4: Creatingthe UDPOut Port

Configuration > New PortThe first item on the Configuration menu tree allows you to create a new logical network port. Select the Port Type you want use from the Port Parameters drop-down list box: UDPOut.

ASI (Asynchronous SerialInterface) One of DVB’s physical

interfaces used for transmittingMPEG-2 Transport Streams.







475


In the next page, select the blade you want to use for the ASIIn port. Select the Gigabit Ethernet radio button to transmit via the Gigabit Ethernet port(s). Next, you need to select the input that contains the content that you intend to route through that port. Once created, this port will only allow you to route content from the selected input. Click the Create button.

Configure the Port Configuration page as follows:• Type the description of the port (optional).

• Enter a value for the TOS Bit Field (range: 0-255)

• Enter a value for TTL (range: 0-255), which is the number of hops the packet can have beforebeing discarded.

• Type a multicast address in Destination IP Address.

• Type a port number (range: 1024 - 65535).


476


• Select the VLAN you wish this stream to route through.


STEP 5:Configuring

Media Routing

Configuration > Media RoutingThe Media Routing Configuration page contains several display frames for con-figuration purposes. Routing tools allow you to designate Program Routes, Add Programs, Add Elements, Stream Routes, and Remove Selected items.

477


From the Output List select the UDPOut you just created and click the Program Route button.

The ASIIn associated with the UDPOut will display in the Input List. You will see all the programs coming from the ASIIn. For UDPOut you will probably route one program for the destination set-top box. Select the program you want to route by clicking the check box next to the program and click the Route Selected but-ton.

Click the Route button. The Program Routes Output should show the selected program in green. In the ASIIn Input List the program should say (Routed) and the check box will not be present. Click OK and then click Apply. The following message will display: Apply configuration succeeded on UDPOut.

478


Click the Back button to see the UDPOut with the routed programs from ASIIn.


Statistics

Statistics > Ports > UDPOut > UDPOut1/0Look at the Program List. You can also view a graphical representation of the stream by clicking View Chart.

479


STEP 7:Selecting the

Channel at an IPSet-Top Box

You should be able to tune the set-top box to this channel and watch the program you routed.

480


Scenario 2: Routing a Custom Program from ASIIn to UDPOutThe second configuration might have a non-compliant stream from the encoder that lacks tables, or you may just want to change SDT information, the program number or the PID value. The iPlex can compensate for the non-compliant stream as long as the operator knows which kind of stream is in each PID. Given this information, the iPlex can generate the tables and add them to the stream. Addi-tionally, the iPlex can modify existing values within the stream, such as a program number.

In this example, we will assume an encoder connected to ASIIn1/6 with MPEG-2 video on PID 0x20, MPEG-2 audio on PID 0x21, and PCRs in the video PID.

Physical SetupMCM: ASIIn cable to ASIIn port from an external Encoder or a demodulator.


STEPS1 Create a UDPOut port.

2 Configure Media Routing—to create tables and route the stream.■ Program Creation.■ Add a Video Element.■ Add an Audio Element.■ Route the Stream.

3 Check UDPOut port statistics.

4 Select channel at IP set-top box.

NOTEYou can also find this scenario in the Command Line Interface Ref-erence Guide, see section “Custom Program Route from ASIIn to UDPOut Using CLI.”

481


STEP 1: Creatinga UDPOut Port

Configuration > New PortThe first item on the Configuration menu tree allows you to create a new logical network port. Select the Port Type you want use from the Port Parameters drop-down list box: UDPOut.

In the next page, select the blade you want to use for the ASIIn port. Select the Gigabit Ethernet radio button to transmit via the Gigabit Ethernet port(s). Next, you need to select the input that contains the content that you intend to route through that port. Once created, this port will only allow you to route content from the selected input. Click the Create button.

Configure the Port Configuration page as follows:• Type the description of the port (optional).

• Enter a value for the TOS Bit Field (range: 0-255)

• Enter a value for TTL (range: 0-255), which is the number of hops the packet can have beforebeing discarded.

• Type a multicast address in Destination IP Address.

Type a Port Number (range: 1024 - 65535).

• Select the VLAN Name you wish this stream to come through.

• Enter the Transport Stream ID for the stream.

• Select the Output Stream Type (MPEG or DVB), in this example MPEG is selected.

• Enable CAT Generation, if required.


482


STEP 2:Configuring

Media Routing

Configuration > Media RoutingSelect the UDPOut port (you created in step 1) from the Output List drop-down box and click Add Program.

Program Creation The Program Creation window displays on the right side of the screen. Enter the following parameters and click Create.

• Program Number: Type the desired program number. For IP set-top boxes, leave thisnumber as the default of 1000.

• PMT PID: Type a PID that does not conflict with your streams. In this case, there is trafficon PIDs 0x20 and 0x21, so change the default value of 0x21 to something else, for example0x30.

• PCR PID: Type the encoder output PID for the PCR. In most cases, the PCR goes in theVideo PID. In this case, the video PID is 0x20, so replace the default value of 0x1FFF to 0x20.

The Program Configuration form displays two check boxes. If required, you can enable SDT or CA information for editing.

For SDT information, select the parameters or enter the data for each field or set-ting.

The screen capture on the left shows the SDT and CA information areas unexpanded. The screen capture on the right shows both infor-mation areas expanded after the Enable SDT Information and Enable CA Information check boxes are selected.

483


For the CA information, you can enter up to ten rows. Select Enable CA Infor-mation and fill in the data, then click Add. Then, to add another row, reselect Enable CA Information and fill in the information for that row. Click Add again. Repeat for each CA information row that you need to add.

For more information on SDT and CA form areas, see SDT Information on page 106 and CA Information on page 107.

When you finish, click Apply. The program will appear in red under the port num-ber. Red means that it has not been applied.

Add a Video Element On the left-side of the screen, under UDPOut1/0, click the red program number (1000 in this case). Then click the Add Element button from the Routing Tools section in the middle of the screen. The Element Creation screen displays on the right.

Enter the following parameters into the Element Creation screen:■ PID Number: Enter 0x20■ Stream Type: Select MPEG-2 Video depending on your encoder mode.

When complete, click Create. The Element Configuration screen displays. Now you can add an audio, video, or data descriptor, if required; click Apply. The new element will now display on the left window, under UDPOut1/0, also in red.

Add an AudioElement

Click the red program number as you did for the Video Element and click Add Element. Enter the following parameters into the Element Creation screen:

484


■ PID Number: Enter 0x21 the actual PID of the audio stream■ Stream Type: Select MPEG-2 Audio depending on your encoder mode.

When complete, click Create. The Element Configuration screen displays. Now you can add an audio, video, or data descriptor, if required; click Apply. At this point, you should have the two elements listed under the program number in the left window.

The previous steps only created the tables for the output. If you click Apply now, the iPlex will start streaming these tables on the UDPOutput. Now, it is time to route the actual bitstream from the ASI input to the output. Click the Stream Route button.

Route the Stream The stream route screen displays with the appropriate port selected from the Input List. Below, you should see an entry for ASIIn1/7, and underneath the PIDs present on that input, all tagged as Unknown (since there are no tables at the input, iPlex does not know what they are). Select the check boxes next to PIDs 0x20 and 0x21, and click the Route Selected button on the top-right of the page.

The Stream Routes Configuration screen will display in the top-right of the page. This box allows you to remap the PIDs, if desired. Because of the way the tables were built, there is no need to remap the PIDs.

Without making any changes in that page, click the Route button.

485


The next page Stream Routes Output displays, showing the routes in green. This is informational only. Click OK.

This box is now replaced by a message indicating that the configuration needs to be applied. Click the Apply button.

At this point, the stream is transmitting via the Gigabit Ethernet port and the set-top should be able to play the program.


Statistics

Statistics > Ports > UDPOut > UDPOut1/0Look at the Program List at the bottom of the page to view the program that you just created.

Next, select the Elements radio button to display the audio and video elements.

STEP 4:Selecting the

Channel at an IPSet-Top Box

You should be able to tune the set-top box to this channel and watch the program you routed.

486


Scenario 3: Transrating a Program from ASIIn to UDPOutThis section explains the process for transrating a program from ASIIn to UDPOut. The diagram below visually summarizes the process as it applies to a single input (ASIIn1/6) to a single output (UDPOut5/3).

The diagram below visually summarizes the process as it applies to a single input (ASIIn1/6) being transrated to multiple outputs (UPDOut1/0, UDPOut1/1, and UDPOut5/3).

Phase 1 Input To Transrate a program from ASIIn to UDPOutThe first phase to transrate from ASIIn to UDPOut is to select the XrtrOut port. to begin the program route.

1 From the menu pane, select Media Routing. The Media Routing screendisplays.

NOTEThe procedure for multiple outputs is outlined later in this chapter.

487


2 From the Output List dropdown menu, select the configured XrtrOut port(in this case, 5/0). Make sure Programs is selected rather than Streams.

3 The Media Routing screen now displays the Program Tools in the middle ofthe screen, and in the Programs List pane, you will see any availableprograms and elements.

4 Click the Program Route button. The Program Route Xrtr5/0 screendisplays. From the Input List, select the configured ASIIn port (in this case,1/6). From the ASIIn Programs List, select 112.

488


5 Click Route Selected. The Program Routes Configuration screen displays.

6 Confirm that the details in the Routes List table are correct, and if so, thenclick Route.

489


7 Click OK. The Program Route XrtrOut5/0 screen displays with buttons forgoing Back, to Route Selected, to Apply, or to Revert.

8 Click Apply to apply this configuration to this port. The Program RouteXrtr5/0 screen displays. Click Back.

490


Phase 2 Output 9 The Media Routing screen again displays. From the Output List, select theOutput port (in this case UDPOut5/3). Ensure that Programs is selectedrather than Streams. Click Program Route.

10 The Program Route (UDPOut5/3) Screen displays. The XraterOut will havecommunicated the information required to automatically inform the XraterInport of the correct settings. Select the program (112 in this case). Click RouteSelected.

11 The Programs Route Configuration screen displays.

Click Route in the right pane.

NOTEThe program is still selected in the Programs List on the left.

491


12 The Programs Route Output screen displays.

Click OK.

NOTE

The program is still selected but the selection is now routed (theselection box is no longer available to select or clear).

492


13 The Program Route (UDPOut5/3) screen displays with buttons to go Back,Route Selected, Apply, or Revert. Click Apply.

14 The program route is now complete to transrate ASIIn1/6 to UDPOut5/3.To check on the program route, from the menu pane, go to Statistics, andselect Media Routes. With All in the dropdown lists for Input and Output,click Show Routes. You will see the routes you configured listed among themedia routes.

493


Scenario 4: Transrating Stream Routes from ASIIn to UDPOutThis section explains the process for transrating a stream route from ASIIn to UDPOut. The diagram below visually summarizes the process as it applies to a single input (ASIIn1/6) to a single output (UDPOut5/4).

The diagram below visually summarizes the process as it applies to a single input (ASIIn1/6) to multiple outputs.

Phase 1 Input To transrate stream routes from ASIIn to UDPOut,the first phase to transrate a stream route is to configure the input.

1 From the menu pane, under Configuration, click Media Routing. TheMedia Routing screen displays. Select Programs and from the Output List,select the XrtrOut port that has the configured UDPOut port (in this case,XrtrOut5/1).

494


Click Stream Route. The Stream Route screen displays. Notice that ASIIn1/6 is in the Input List and Streams is now selected. Select the video and audio PIDs. In this case, they are 0x1422 and 0x1423 respectively.

2 Click Route Selected. The Stream Routes Configuration screen displays.Confirm that the information in the table is correct.

495


3 Click Route. The Stream Routes Output screen displays. Notice that theselection box is no longer available for the PIDs that you selected. This isbecause they are route. Again confirm that all of the information is correct.

4 Click OK. The Stream Route screen displays with buttons to go Back, RouteSelected, Apply, or Revert.

496


5 Click Apply. Your input configuration is confirmed. The Stream Route screendisplays with buttons for going Back or Route Selected.

Configuring a VideoPID on the XraterOut

Port

6 Configure the XraterOut port (XraterOut5/1) to indicate the video PID totransrate. To do this, from Configuration in the menu pane, click Ports. Thelist of available ports is listed in the Summary Ports List. Click XrtrOut. Thelist of XrtrOut ports displays in the Chassis Port List Configuration screen.Click the XrtrOut port to use (XrtrOut5/1 in this case). The PortConfiguration screen displays. In this screen, enter the Video PID toTransrate (0x1422 in this case) and click Apply.

497


Phase 2 Output 7 Now you can configure your output. Click Configure > Media Routing toview the Media Routing screen. Select the UDPOut port (UDPOut5/4 in thiscase) and Programs from the Output List.

8 Click Stream Route. Note that XrtrIn5/1 and Streams are now selected inthe Input List. Select the video and audio PIDs (0x1422 and 0x1423).

498


9 Click Route Selected. The Stream Routes Configuration screen displays.Confirm that the information is correct.

10 Click Route. The Stream Routes Output screen displays. Again confirm thatthe information is correct. Note that the PIDs are now routed and theselection box is no longer available.

499


11 Click OK. The Stream Route screen displays with buttons for going Back, toRoute Selected, Apply, or Revert.

12 Click Apply. The Stream Route screen confirms that your configuration isapplied. You have completed the transrating of the stream route.

13 To confirm that you have successfully transrated the stream route, view theprograms and streams statistics. From the Statistics menu, click MediaRoutes.

NOTEThe ALL selection will display all streams and routes for all ports.

500


Your new transrated stream route’s streams are listed in the Stream Routes part ofthe table.

501


Scenario 5: Defining a Program without Setting the PID to TransrateThis section explains how to create a user-defined program in an XrtrOut port without setting the video PID to transrate.

The diagram below visually summarizes the process involved in creating a user-defined program in an XrtrOut port without setting the video PID to transrate.

The diagram below visually summarizes the same process, but for multiple out-puts.

To create a user-defined program without setting the video PIDto transrate1 From the menu, click Configuration > Media Routing. In the Media

Routing screen, select Programs and select the XrtrOut port that you want towork with (in this case, XrtrOut5/1).

502


2 Click Add Program.

3 In the Program Creation table, enter the Program Number (112) andconfirm that the PMT PID and PCR PID are correct. Click Create.Optionally select Enable SDT Information and Enable CA Information if youwant to configure these features.

4 Click Apply. The Program is listed in Red in the Programs List.

503


Create VideoElement

5 Click the program number (112 (User)) then click Add Element.

6 The Element Creation table displays. Enter the video PID (0x1422 in thiscase) and from the dropdown Stream Type list, select MPEG-2 Video.

7 Click Create. The Element 0x1422 Configuration table displays with adropdown list for Element Descriptor (select Video) and a checkbox forEnable CA Information.

504


8 Click Apply. The Media Routing screen will confirm that the element wasconfigured successfully.

Create AudioElement

9 Repeat steps 5-8 to configure the audio element for PID 0x1423.

ApplyConfiguration

10 After both elements are created, from the Routing Tools pane, click Apply.

505


11 After you click Apply, the programs and elements are applied andsuccessfully configured (as indicated by the green characters in the ProgramList). The ASIIn stream route is already specified for when you route theprogram for transrating.

Refer to the program route procedure to follow the process to route the programfrom XraterIn to UDPOut.

See Scenario 3: Transrating a Program from ASIIn to UDPOut on page 487 andfollow the necessary steps from this procedure.

506


Scenario 6: Audio-only EncodingFrom the Encoder Input Selection dropdown list, if you select Internal Test Pat-tern, the encoder will produce color bars regardless of whether the input is con-nected. This enables you to run the encoder without a video input.

Some set-top boxes require PCRs in audio-only streams. The encoder PCR PID is configurable. You can put the PCR in one of the two available audio streams. The iPlex allows you to configure a second PCR flow in the encoder, so you can put PCRs in the second audio PID as well. To configure the PCRs, click the Advanced button at the top of the Encoder Plus General Configuration screen.

The procedure to configure audio-only encoding is as follows.

1 From the menu, click Configuration > MCMx > ENC > ENCx/x, wherethe ENCx/x is the specific MPEG Encoder Plus that you want to work with.

2 In the Encoder Plus General Configuration screen, for Encoder InputSelect, click the dropdown list and select Internal Test Pattern.

3 If you require PCRs in both audio streams, click Advanced. Near the bottomof the screen you will find the PCR configuration parameters.

a. Configure the Encoder PCR PID to match the first audio channel PID.

b. Click to select Enable Additional PCR.

NOTEEven though the internal test pattern is selected, the encoder will still show loss of video sync because there is no external video sig-nal. We recommend that you set the encoder to full-D1 resolution (720x480 for NTSC; 720x576 for PAL). If you use a lower resolution, the test pattern will be distorted.

507


c. Once you enable the additional PCR, you will have a new field to choose itsPID. Set it to the second audio channel PID. Click Apply.

4 Stream-route the two audio PIDs the desired output. See Scenario 4:Transrating Stream Routes from ASIIn to UDPOut on page 494 for theprocedures for stream routes. Use the steps of the procedures relevant to theports you will be using, even if not transrating.

5 Create user-defined custom programs in the desired output describing the audio-only streams. See Scenario 5: Defining a Program without Setting the PID to Transrate on page 502 for procedures on configuring user-defined custom programs.

508

Glossary

Appendix E

509


Acronyms, Abbreviations, and DefinitionsThe acronyms, abbreviations, and definitions in this user guide have been modified to accommodate TANDBERG Television applications.

Sources ■ Technical Specification of DVB simulcrypt (sim061)■ European Telecommunication Standard (ETS 300 468)■ Computer Desktop Encyclopedia by TechWeb

A B C D E F G H I J K L M N O P Q R S T U V W X Y Z

A■ AES/EBU (Audio Engineering Society/European Broadcasting Union) is the

name of a digital audio transfer standard. The AES and EBU developed thespecifications for the standard. The AES/EBU digital interface is usuallyimplemented using 3-PIN XLR connectors, the same type connector used in aprofessional microphone. One cable carries both left- and right-channel audiodata to the receiving device. AES/EBU is an alternative to the S/PDIFstandard.

■ AF (Assured Forwarding) is a class of service for applications that require abetter reliability than Best Effort service.

■ ATSC addressable sections (Advanced Television Systems Committeeaddressable sections) Represents Multiprotocol Encapsulation standard (seeMPE).

■ ASI (Asynchronous Serial Interface) One of DVB’s physical interfaces used fortransmitting MPEG-2 Transport Streams.

■ ASIPlus (Asynchronous Serial Interface Plus) A DVB CAS physical interfacethat adds two input and one output port to an ASI board.

■ AT command set A series of machine instructions used to activate features onan intelligent modem. Developed by Hayes Microcomputer Products andofficially known as the Hayes Standard AT Command Set, it is used entirely orpartially by most every modem manufacturer. AT is a mnemonic code forATtention, which is the prefix that initiates each command to the modem.

■ ATM (Asynchronous Transfer Mode) A network technology for both local andwide area networks (LANs and WANs) that supports real-time voice and videoas well as data. The topology uses switches that establish a logical circuit fromend to end, which guarantees quality of service (QoS).

■ AVC (Advanced Video Coding) A digital video codec standard notedfor achieving very high data compression.

B■ Bandwidth The transmission capacity of a communications network expressed

in bits per second.

510


■ BE (Best Effort) is a class of service with no reserved resources.■ Bit Rate The transmission speed of binary coded data.■ BNC bayonet connector A commonly used plug and socket for audio, video

and networking applications. BNCs connect two-wire coaxial cable (signal andground) using a bayonet mount. After the plug is inserted, the bayonetmechanism causes the pins to be pinched into the locking groove when theplug is turned.

■ Broadcast: To transmit to everybody on a network or network segment.■ Byte stream: A contiguous group of untyped data. The iPlex can packetize byte

streams by grouping them into MPEG-2 Transport Stream packets.

C■ CA (Conditional Access) Conditional access system used in iPlex to handle

multiple connections to ECMGs.■ CAS (Conditional Access System) Conditional access system to control

subscriber access to broadcast services and events.■ CAT (Conditional Access Table) A table providing information on the

Conditional Access System used in the multiplex. This information is privateand dependent on the CAS, but includes the location of the EMM stream,when applicable.

■ Canonical name The actual name of a resource. For example, a canonical nameof a server is its true name rather than an alias.

■ CBR (Constant Bit Rate) A stream with constant short term bit rate. The bitrate of these streams may only vary within a very narrow range.

■ CBR-ES (Constant Bit Rate - Elementary Streams) The video ElementaryStream (ES) will have a Constant Bit Rate (CBR). The Transport Stream, ofwhich the video ES is one component, will be somewhat VBR when audio andother overhead is added.Recommendation: This setting is recommended for lower bandwidth accessnetworks (e.g. DSL). This setting seeks to constrain the Transport Stream bitrate to a tight range, while simultaneously minimizing network overhead.

■ CBR-TS (Constant Bit Rate – Transport Stream) The Transport Stream (TS)will have a Constant Bit Rate (CBR).Recommendation: This setting is recommended for network operators whowant to simultaneously transmit the live stream and record it for later playbackon a video server (as most video servers require CBR Transport streams). Therate control is designed to maintain a constant Transport Stream bit rate acrossthe network including servers. CBR-TS does not use Null-packet padding toachieve the bit rate, because most video servers will discard the Null-packets.

■ Checksum A value used to ensure data is stored or transmitted without error. Itis created by calculating the binary values in a block of data using somealgorithm and storing the results with the data. When the data is retrieved frommemory or received at the other end of a network, a new checksum iscomputed and matched against the existing checksum. A non-match indicatesan error.

511


Just as a check digit tests the accuracy of a single number, a checksum tests ablock of data. Checksums detect single bit errors and some multiple bit errors,but are not as effective as the CRC method.

■ Chrominance (U): A color difference signal constructed by subtracting theblue from the Y (luminance).

■ Chrominance (V): A color difference signal constructed by subtracting the redfrom the Y (luminance).

■ Client/Server An architecture in which the client (personal computer orworkstation) is the requesting machine and the server is the supplyingmachine, both of which are connected through a local area network (LAN) orwide area network (WAN).

■ CLI (Command Line Interface) In a command-driven system, the area on thescreen that accepts typed-in commands.

■ Community Strings Similar to a “password”, all SNMP operations haveassociated community strings. If they do not match with the agent settings, theSNMP operation fails.

■ CPU (Central Processing Unit) The computing part of the computer also calledthe processor. It consists of the control unit and Arithmetic Logic Unit (ALU).

■ CRC (Cyclical Redundancy Checking) An error checking technique used toensure the accuracy of transmitting digital data. The transmitted messages aredivided into predetermined lengths which, used as dividends, are divided by afixed divisor. The remainder of the calculation is appended onto the message.At the receiving end, the computer recalculates the remainder. If it does notmatch the transmitted remainder, an error is detected.

■ CSRC (Contributing SouRCe) The source of an RTP stream.■ CVBS (Composite Video Blanking Sync): This video signal has the color,

luminance and synchronization information all combined into one.

D■ Datagram The unit of data, or packet, transmitted in an IP network. Each

datagram contains source and destination addresses and data (see UDP).■ Data Piping A packetizer used for encapsulating either a proprietary byte

protocol or a synchronous bit stream.■ dB Decibel, a logarithmic unit used to describe a ration.■ Discipline An Internet class of service as in Best Effort (BE) and Assured

Forwarding (AF).■ DHCP (Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol) Software that automatically

assigns IP addresses to client stations logging onto a TCP/IP network. Iteliminates having to manually assign IP addresses to individual computers.DHCP software typically runs in servers and is also found in network devicessuch as ISDN routers and modem routers that allow multiple users access tothe Internet.

■ DNS (Domain Name System) Name resolution software that lets users locatecomputers on a UNIX network or the Internet (TCP/IP network) by domain

512


name. The DNS server maintains a database of domain names (host names)and their corresponding IP address.

■ Driver —also called a device driver—A program routine that links a peripheraldevice to the operating system. It is written by programmers who have thedetailed knowledge of the device's command language and characteristics, andcontains the precise machine language necessary to perform the functionsrequested by the application.

■ DSL (Digital Subscriber Line) A technology that dramatically increases thedigital capacity of ordinary telephone lines (the local loops) into the home oroffice. DSL speeds are tied to the distance between the customer and the telcocentral office.

■ DSP (Digital Signal Processor) A special-purpose CPU used for digital signalprocessing. It provides ultra-fast instruction sequences, such as shift and add,and multiply and add, which are commonly used in math-intensive signalprocessing applications.

■ DSP 4PAC The DSP 4PAC (Media Processor) submodule uses four DSPs togive it a wide range of functionality, including MPEG-2 to MPEG-4 AVCTranscoding. As multi-function devices, 4PACs or Media Processors, can dotranscoding or transrating.

■ DSP 6PAC The DSP 4PAC transrating submodule provides the per streamvideo processing capability needed for rate shaping and rate reduction. EachDSP 6PAC submodule provides transrating capability for up to six individualvideo programs.

■ DVB (Digital Video Broadcasting) A European standard for transporting digitalvideo. Essentially a superset of MPEG-2, in which additional PSI tables aredefined which make the MPEG-2 specification commercially deployable bydigital satellite and digital cable service providers.

E■ ECM (Entitlement Control Message) Private conditional access information

that carries the control word in a secure manner along with private entitlementinformation.

■ ECMG (Entitlement Control Message Generator) Produces the ECMmessages, but does not support the ECM repetition.

■ EF (Expedited Forwarding) is a class of service for applications that require ahard guarantee on the delay and jitter.

■ EIT (Event Information Table) A DVB SI table that contains data concerningevents or programs such as event name, start time, and duration.

■ Elementary stream One or more entities, such as video or audio data, which isput together with other elements to make up a program.

■ EMM (Entitlement Management Message) Private conditional accessinformation that specifies the authorization levels of subscribers or groups ofsubscribers for services or events.

■ EMMG (Entitlement Management Message Generator) Produces the EMMmessages.

513


■ Encoder A device that receives analog (audio/video) signals and converts itinto an MPEG-2 Transport Stream.

■ Event A grouping of elementary broadcast streams with a defined start and endtime belonging to a common service.

F■ FDDI (Fiber Distributed Data Interface) An ANSI standard token passing

network that uses optical fiber cabling and transmits at 100 Mbits/sec up to 10kilometers. FDDI provides network services at the same level as Ethernet andToken Ring (OSI layers 1 and 2). FDDI includes its own Station Management(STM) network management standard. The TP-PMD (CDDI) version runsover copper (UTP), although typically limited to distances up to 100 meters. Inaddition, FDDI provides an optional dual counter-rotating ring topology thatcontains primary and secondary rings with data flowing in opposite directions.If the line breaks, the ends of the primary and secondary rings are bridgedtogether at the closest node to create a single ring again.

■ FileIn The iPlex’s FileIn port can play out or carousel data from a file locatedon the flash card. The files injected through FileIn ports would typically bePSI/SI tables. For example: CAT, PAT, PMT, and SDT tables.

■ FIR (Finite Impulse Response) A filter applied to clarify video images.■ Flash Card A small module that contains flash memory such as a PC Card,

Compact Flash, or similar format.

G■ GE (Gigabit Ethernet) An Ethernet technology that raises transmission speed

to 1 Gbps. It is used primarily for backbones. The first IEEE standard (802.3z)for Gigabit Ethernet defined its use over multi-mode optical fiber providingfull-duplex operation from switch to end station or to another switch and half-duplex using CSMA/CD in a shared environment.

■ GI (General Instruments) refers to DigiCipher II (DCII): a proprietary MPEG-2 based distribution system developed originally by General Instruments priorto the completion of the DVB standard. Used by most cable channels in NorthAmerica, it has a major presence in cable head-ends and is widely used insatellite turn-around applications via “Head-end In The Sky” (HITS) systems.

■ GOP (Group of Pictures): A typical GOP structure starts with an I-frame andends with B-frame with frame sequence like IBBPBBPBBPBBPBB. The biggerGOP size in slow motion pictures may give better quality at lower bit rates (I-frame: Intra-frames, B-frame: Bi-directionally predicted frames, P-frames:Predicted frames).

■ GUI (Graphical User Interface) A graphics-based user interface thatincorporates icons, pull-down menus and a mouse. The GUI has become thestandard way users interact with a computer. See User Interface.

514


H■ Header In communications, the first part of the message, which contains

controlling data, such as originating and destination stations, message type andpriority level.

■ Host In network architecture, a client station (user’s machine) is considered tobe a host, because it is a source of information to the network in contrast to adevice such as a router or switch that directs traffic. However, in remotecontrol software a host is a virtual client.

■ HP code rate (High Priority code rate) A high priority bit stream. Twodifferent code rates applied to two different levels of the modulation have theaim of achieving hierarchy. Transmission then starts with the code rate for theHP level of the modulation and ends with the one for the LP level.

I■ IP (Internet Protocol) The network layer protocol in the TCP/IP

communications protocol suite (the “IP” in TCP/IP). IP contains a networkaddress and allows messages to be routed to a different network or subnet.

■ IP Address (Internet Protocol Address) The layer-3 address of a computerattached to a TCP/IP network. Every station must have a unique IP address.Client workstations have a permanent address or one dynamically assigned tothem each dial-up session. IP addresses are written as four sets of numbersseparated by periods; for example, 204.171.64.2.

■ IP Payload The traffic that the iPlex can encapsulate as MPE packets. TheiPlex can receive IP data either from a Gigabit Ethernet interface or from anATMInterface.

L■ LAN (Local Area Network) A communications network that serves users

within a confined geographical area, made up of servers, workstations, anetwork operating system, and a communications link.

■ LP code rate (Low Priority code rate) A low priority bit stream. Two differentcode rates applied to two different levels of the modulation have the aim ofachieving hierarchy. Transmission then starts with the code rate for the HPlevel of the modulation and ends with the one for the LP level.

M■ M2T An abbreviation for the MPEG-2 transport.■ MAC address (Media Access Control address) On a local area network (LAN)

or other network, the MAC address is your interface card’s unique hardwarenumber.

■ MCM (Media Controller Module) The iPlex blade that is responsible for all thevideo/data input, processing, and output under the control of the SCM [5].

■ Modulator A device that receives digital information and converts it into ananalog signal.

515


■ MPC (Multimedia Personal Computer) A software andhardware standard. There are three MPC standards, calledMPC, MPC2, and MPC3, each specifies a minimumhardware configuration for running multimedia software.

■ MPE (Multi-protocol Encapsulation) DVB and ATSC packetization formatthat enables a high-speed gateway to an asymmetric Internet (or private IP-based) network by retransmitting IP information in addition to the payload.

■ MPEG (Moving Pictures Experts Group) Pronounced “em-peg.” Afamily of standards used for coding and decoding audio-visual information in adigital compressed format. An international standard for generic coding(compression) of digital video and/or audio information. There are threeflavors of this standard—MPEG-1, MPEG-2 and MPEG-4. —MPEG-1 was the first standard (ISO/IEC 11172; 1993), and is targetedtowards video CDs and VHS quality, typically at bit rates of about 1.5 Mb/s. Ithas since been superseded by MPEG-2, which is currently the most prevalentstandard (ISO/IEC 13818; 1996). —MPEG-2 is directed towards entertainment and broadcast quality video fortelevision and DVD applications, typically at bit rates ranging from 2 – 8 Mb/s. An MPEG-2 system provides a method for combining (multiplexing) severaltypes of multimedia information into one stream that can be (either):Transmitted on a single communication channel, or stored in one file of adigital storage medium (DSM). —MPEG-4 is a recent standard (ISO/IEC 14496; 2000) which is moreambitious in scope, targeting a wide variety of applications ranging from low-bit rate wireless and Internet streaming video to very high quality DVD video.However, the standard is in continuous flux, and its compression efficiency forentertainment and broadcast quality video has not yet demonstrated significantimprovement over MPEG-2.

■ MPMC (iPlex Management Console) The iPlex’s user interfaces either SNMP,CLI, or Web GUI.

■ MTU (Maximum Transmission Unit) The largest frame size that can betransmitted over the network. Messages longer than the MTU must be dividedinto smaller frames. The layer 3 protocol (IP, IPX, etc.) extracts the MTU fromthe layer 2 protocol (Ethernet, FDDI, etc.), fragments the messages into thatframe size and makes them available to the lower layer for transmission.

■ Multicasting One-to-many transmissions of an IP datagram to a host group—a set of one or more hosts identified by a single IP multicast destinationaddress. A multicast datagram is delivered to all members of a destination hostgroup with the same reliability as unicast IP datagrams.

■ Multiplexer A device that merges several streams of digital data into onetransport stream.

N■ NEBS compliant (Network Equipment Building Systems compliant) Adhering

to standards from Telcordia for equipment used in telco central offices (COs).Most equipment must be NEBS certified before it can be integrated into

516


carrier facilities. NEBS specifications deal with power management, electricalshielding, disaster preparation and hardware interfaces.

■ Nice A UNIX multitasking command that gives each job a basic prioritynumber, called the “niceness.” The higher the nice value, the lower thecommand’s scheduling priority.

■ NIT (Network Information Table) A table that provides physical informationabout the network.

■ NTP (Network Time Protocol) A protocol used to synchronize the real-timeclock in a computer. There are numerous primary and secondary servers in theInternet that are synchronized to the Coordinated Universal Time (UTC) viaradio, satellite or modem. For more information, visit http://www.ntp.org.

■ NTSC (National TV Standards Committee) A color TV standard that wasdeveloped in the U.S. Administered by the FCC, NTSC broadcasts 30interlaced frames per second (60 half frames per second, or 60 “fields” persecond in TV jargon) at 525 lines of resolution.

■ NVOD Near Video On-Demand.

P■ Packet Any block of data sent over a network. Each packet can contain sender,

receiver, and error-control information, in addition to the actual message.Packets can be of fixed-length or variable-length and reassembled, if necessary,when they reach their destination.

■ Packetizer A method for pre-processing data.■ PAL (Phase Alternating Line) A popular European and Asian color TV

standard that was developed in Germany. It broadcasts 25 interlaced framesper second (50 half frames per second) at 625 lines of resolution.

■ PAT (Program Association Table) A part of program system information (PSI),this table indicates the location of the corresponding Program Map Table(PMT). It also gives the location of the Network Information Table (NIT).

■ Payload The bytes that follow the header bytes in a packet.■ PC (Personal Computer) A stand-alone computer that can be used as a

workstation and file server in a LAN (local area network).■ PCI (Peripheral Component Interconnect) or PCI Standard specifies a

computer bus for attaching peripheral devices to a computer motherboard.These devices can take the following forms: an integrated circuit fitted ontothe motherboard itself, called a planar device in the PCI specification or anexpansion card that fits in sockets.

■ PCR (Program Clock Reference) A reference clock (27MHz) located at theMPEG encoder. Samples of the PCR are periodically sent in the MPEG streamto allow the receiver to track the encoder clock, to enable the receiver to playback the video and audio content in a synchronized manner.

■ PDU (Protocol Data Unit) The technical name for a frame of data transmittedover a data link (layer2) in a communications network.

517

http://www.ntp.org


■ PES (Packetized Elementary Stream) A stream of PES packets, all of whosepayloads consist of data from a single elementary stream. A serial byte streamcomprising PES packets carrying the same elementary stream. The firstpayload byte of any PES packet is the first byte in the elementary stream whichfollows the last payload byte of the previous PES packet in the same PESstream.

■ PID (Packet Identifier) A 13 bit packet identifier used to identify different datatypes inside the transport stream. An integer value present in the header ofeach transport packet which is used to identify the type of payload carried inthe packet. Each elementary stream and each table of program specificinformation present in a transport stream is assigned a unique PID.

■ PMC (PCI Mezzanine Card) is a printed circuit board manufactured to theIEEE P1386.1 standard. This standard combines the electrical characteristicsof the PCI (see above) bus with the mechanical dimensions of the CommonMezzanine Card or CMC format (IEEE 1386 standard).

■ PMT (Program Map Table) A part of program system information (PSI), thistable identifies and indicates the location of part of the streams that make upeach service, and the location of the Program Clock Reference (PCR) fields forservice.

■ Port A physical connection such as an ASIIn port or a logical connection suchas a UDPOut port are connections into or out of the iPlex.

■ Program A name given to services that is used to reference one or moreelement streams.

■ Promiscuous Mode The condition in which a node in a network recognizesand accepts all packets on the line regardless of destination.

■ PSI (Program Specific Information) Normative data to be carried in an MPEG-2 transport stream which is necessary for demultiplexers and decoders toidentify each program inside a multi-program transport stream, as well as eachelementary stream contained in the programs. In the simplest sense, PSI maybe viewed as a set of tables mapping PIDs to programs and elementarystreams. Other PSI tables are also defined in the MPEG-2 Systemsspecifications. Tables are carried in the payload of transport packets using datastructures called sections. Provision is also made for privately definable tables,by defining data structures called private sections. Some of the PSI tables arethe Network Information Table (NIT), the Conditional Access Table (CAT),the Program Map Table (PMT) the Program Association Table (PAT) andothers.

■ PTS (Presentation Time Stamp) A sample of the PCR for a presentation unit(video frame or audio sample) in a program which indicates the time instant atwhich that unit must be presented to the viewer of the program.

■ PVC (Permanent Virtual Circuit) A point-to-point connection that isestablished ahead of time. A group of PVCs defined at the time of subscriptionto a particular service is known as a virtual private network (VPN).

518


Q■ QAM (Quadrature Amplitude Modulation) A cable networks’ modulation

technique that generates four bits out of one baud. For example, a 600-baudline (600 shifts in the signal per second) can effectively transmit 2,400 bpsusing this method. Both phase and amplitude are shaped with each baud,resulting in four possible patterns.

■ QPSK (Quadrature Phase Shift Keying) A phase modulation scheme used insatellite data transmission. Bits are encoded in sequential carrier phasetransitions.

■ QoS (Quality Of Service) The ability to define a level of performance in a datacommunications system. For example, ATM networks specify modes of servicethat ensure optimum performance for traffic such as real-time voice and video.

R■ RFC (Request For Comments) A document that describes the specifications for

a recommended technology. The Internet Engineering Task Force (IETF) andother standards bodies use RFCs.

■ RIP (Routing Information Protocol) A simple routing protocol that is part ofthe TCP/IP protocol suite. It determines a route based on the smallest hopcount between source and destination.

■ RTP (Real-time Transport Protocol) An IP protocol that supports real-timetransmission of voice and video. An RTP packet rides on top of UDP andincludes timestamping and synchronization information in its header forproper reassembly at the receiving end.

■ RTCP (RTP Control Protocol) A companion protocol to RTP that is used tomaintain QoS. RTP nodes analyze network conditions and periodically sendseach other RTCP packets that report on network congestion.

S■ SAP (Session Announcement Protocol) An IETF protocol for distributing

session description messages to potential recipients. It is used to send SDPmessages.

■ SCM (Switch Controller Module) The iPlex system controller that isresponsible for booting the whole system and directing the flow of databetween blades.

■ SDH (Synchronous Digital Hierarchy) The European counterpart to SONET. ■ SDI (Serial Digital Interface): Used to transport digital component video.■ SDP (Session Description Protocol) An IETF protocol that defines a text-

based message format for describing a multimedia session. Data such asversion number, contact information, broadcast times and audio and videoencoding types are included in the message.

■ SDT (Service Description Table) A DVB SI table that contains the services inthe system; for example, names of services, the service provider, etc.

519


■ Set-top box The TV box that “sits on top” of the TV set that de-multiplexesand decodes the transport stream; also known as a receiver, decoder, orIntegrated Receiver Decoder (IRD).

■ SI (Service Information) Digital data describing the delivery system, contentand scheduling/timing of broadcast data streams. It includes MPEG-2 PSItogether with independently defined extensions.

■ SMD (TANDBERG Television MPE Decapsulation) MPEG Transport Streamreceived through ASIIn.

■ SME (TANDBERG Television MPE Encapsulation) Transport Stream sentout as IP over DVB through ASIOut.

■ SNMP (Simple Network Management Protocol) A standard protocol tomanage devices on the network. Manageable devices contain an SNMP Agentresponsible for handling the information/control requests.

■ SONET (Synchronous Optical NETwork) A fiber-optic transmissionsystem for high-speed digital traffic. Employed by telephone companiesand common carriers, SONET speeds range from 51 megabits tomultiple gigabits per second.

■ SSH (Secure SHell) A protocol that runs over TCP to cryptographically securelogin sessions.

■ SSL (Secure Sockets Layer) The leading security protocol on the Internet.When an SSL session is started, the server sends its public key to the browser,which the browser uses to send a randomly generated secret key back to theserver in order to have a secret key exchange for that session.

■ Submodule A PCI-based mezzanine card. Small and compact (74mm x 149mm)and providing 32 or 64-bit data paths, submodules enable a large variety of PCIproducts to be retrofitted to other bus environments.

■ Subnet Mask The Subnet Mask is used to divide the IP address space intoranges of addresses called “subnets”. IP hosts in a subnet assume that theyhave a direct connection (for example, connected to the same Ethernet hub)and talk directly to each other. The subnet mask divides the IP address intoparts: a network number and a host number. Hosts whose network number isthe same are in the same subnet. The subnet mask is a 32-bit field where “1”bits indicate what part of the IP address is a network number. Subnet masksare typically expressed in the same quad dotted notation as IP addresses.

T■ TCP/IP The Transmission Control Protocol (TCP) on top of the Internet

Protocol (IP). Enables communication between different types of computersand computer networks. The Internet Protocol is a connectionless protocolthat provides packet routing. TCP, which is connection-oriented, providesreliable communication.

■ TCPIn The TCPIn port receives data for injection via a TCP connection. TCPprovides data reliability and flow control.

520


■ TDT (Time and Date Table) A DVB SI table that gives information relating tothe present time and date. This information is given a separate table due to thefrequent updating of this information.

■ Teletext A popular European broadcasting service that transmits text to a TVset that has a teletext decoder. It uses the vertical blanking interval of the TVsignal (black line between frames when vertical hold is not adjusted) totransmit about a hundred frames.

■ TFTP (Trivial File Transfer Protocol) A version of the FTP protocol that hasno directory or password capability.

■ TOS (Type Of Service) A field in an IP packet (IP datagram) that is used forquality of service (QoS). The TOS field is 8 bits, broken into five subfields.

■ TOT (Time Offset Table) A DVB SI table that contains time zone and timeoffset information in relation to the TDT.

■ Transport Stream: (TS) One or more programs, each of which contains one ormore elementary streams and other streams (such as data) multiplexedtogether. An MPEG-2 transport stream is a standardized system layer ofMPEG-2 that combines video, audio and data in a packetized stream.

■ Traps SNMP traps are unsolicited events sent by the SNMP Agent to themanager stations in their list of trap destinations.

■ TTL (Time To Live) This value decrements each time the IP frame moves through arouter. When the number reaches the value of zero, the stream is discarded.

U■ UBR (Unspecified Bit Rate) An asynchronous transfer mode (ATM) level of

service that does not guarantee available bandwidth. It is very efficient, but notused for critical data.

■ UDP (User Datagram Protocol) A connectionless transport-level protocol usedin the suite of IP-based protocols.- Enables sending of data from one computer to an application running inanother computer. - Like TCP (Transmission Control Protocol), UDP is used with IP (theInternet Protocol).- Unlike TCP, UDP is connectionless and does not guarantee reliablecommunication; the application must deal with lost or out-of-order packets.

■ UDPIn The UDPIn port receives data for injection into the payload of UDPpackets. UDP is a connectionless, unreliable protocol with no flow control;packet loss between the data source and the iPlex is not corrected.

■ UIMSBF Unsigned integer, most significant bit first.■ Unicast To transmit from one station to another, such as from client to server

or server to server.■ Universal Time This time is simply the number of hours, minutes, and seconds

which have elapsed since midnight (when the sun is at a Longitude of 180°) inthe Greenwich time zone. Since the Earth's rotation is irregular on the 0.1-slevel, a local approximation to universal time not corrected for polar motion is

521


often used. This is called UT0, and also referred to as Greenwich Mean Time(GMT). In UT0, 24 universal hours are defined to be a mean solar day.

■ User interface The combination of windows, menus, keypad commands andhelp messages that provides a way for a user to interact with a program.

V■ VBI (Vertical Blanking Interval) A part of a television transmission signal that

is blanked or left clear of viewable content to allow time for the TV¦s electrongun to move from the bottom to the top of the screen as it scans images. Theblank area is now being used to broadcast closed caption and HTML-formatted information.

■ VBR (Variable Bit Rate) A stream with varying short-term and long term bitrates. The bit rate of the stream can vary randomly within a well-defined range. Application: The Transport Stream (TS) will have a Variable Bit Rate (VBR).The bit rate of the TS will never exceed the maximum bit rate selected and itwill fall to lower rates whenever possible, consistent with the selected videoand audio quality settings and the complexity of the audio and video streamsbeing encoded. Recommendation: This setting is recommended for higher bandwidth accessnetworks (e.g. FTTH) where busting to high rates is tolerable and desirable formaximum video and audio quality but constant padding to the maximum ratewould be unacceptably wasteful.

■ VCI (Virtual Channel Identifier) A unique numerical tag as defined by a 16 bitfield in the ATM cell header that identifies a virtual channel, over which thecell is to travel.

■ VLAN (Virtual LAN) A logical subgroup within a local area network that iscreated via software rather than manually moving cables in the wiring closet. Itcombines user stations and network devices into a single unit regardless of thephysical LAN segment they are attached to and allows traffic to flow moreefficiently within populations of mutual interest.

■ VLAN Tagged Packets VLAN tags used to define multiple LANs in the samephysical segment. A tagged packet has an extra header added between the layer2 and the layer 3 headers (the tag) that indicates to which VLAN it belongs.Typically only switches and routers handle tags, not end-hosts.

■ VPI (Virtual Path Identifier) An eight bit field in the ATM cell header whichindicates the virtual path over which the cell should be routed.

■ -VPS (Video Programme System) A system implemented primarily in VCRs tosignal program start/stop. This is used mostly in Europe.

W■ WAN (Wide Area Network) A communications network that covers a wide

geographic area, such as state or country. ■ Watchdog A function inside each iPlex blade that monitors the health of the

software, and restarts the blade in case of problems.

522


■ WSS (Wide Screen Signalling) A type of signalling that indicates a particularvideo stream is in Wide Screen format (typically 16:9). This type of signalling isimplemented in European wide screen TVs and helps match the presentationof the content with its natural aspect ratio.

Y■ Y/C A shorthand term used for luminance (Y) and chrominance (C). Also used

to describe S-Video, which implies the separation of the luminance andchrominance parts of a video.

523


524

Index

Numerics3/2 L, C, R, SL, SR

audio coding mode also known as 5.1Audio support. 224

5.1 Audio channel 3805.1 Audio support, see also Audio CodingMode Ch 1 3735.1 Audio support, see also Audio CodingMode Ch1 224

AAC-3 Pass Through 238access rights 49ACM Mode 335actual-other table correction 286

setting 287Adaptive GOP 230, 261Adaptive Qp 230add audio element 117, 469add element 467add program 462add stream route 471add user 160add video element 116, 118, 468administration 159

add user 160set time 160user list 160

Advanced Encoderadvanced configuration settings 208advanced statistics 213audio configuration 206general configuration

configurationAdvanced Encoder general 200

statistics 207AFD (Active Format Descriptor) 381alarm statistics 69alarms 443all in port list 74

all out port list 74all ports list 73Analog Video Pre Processing 191apply config 121ASI In port list 73ASI Input 26ASI Output 26ASIIn

configure 174statistics 176

ASIIN Input Traffic Shaping 175ASIOut

cable delivery 278, 279cable terrestrial 279configuration 276satellite delivery 278statistics 280

ASIPlus Card 331ATM

configuration 151statistics 96, 328

ATM Interface List 95ATM, IP decapsulation, and IP encapsula-tion ports list 71ATM, SMD, and SME ports interface list 71ATMIn


ATMOutconfigure 326

Audio Coding Mode Ch 1 224, 373audio-only encoding 507AVC Encoder 214

Advanced Statistics 231Dolby Digital AC-3 Audio Configuration

222General Configuration 214MPEG-1 Layer II Audio Configuration

219Pass Through 238PIP 208

Beta Beta

525

iPlex WEB Interface User Guide

AVC Encoder Single HDAAC-HE Audio Configuration 256Dolby Digital AC-3 Audio Configuration

258, 269MPEG-1 Layer II Audio Configuration

255, 268AVC Encoder with SD Interface

AC-3 Pass Through 238VBI Support 239

AVC Ultracompression Encoder 29AVC Ultracompression Single-slot Encoder32AVCEnc Single SD audio channels 266AVCXcdrIn port

advanced configuration 377audio channels 368general configuration 364general statistics 366

AVCXcdrIn Single portadvanced configuration 396advanced statistics 396audio channels 391general configuration 387general statistics 389PIP configuration 394PIP statistics 395

AVCXcdrOut portconfiguration 380statistics 384

AVCXcdrOut Single portconfiguration 398statistics 399

Bbar chart stream view 410blade

port statistics 94statistics 66status 65

Ccable 278, 279cable delivery 177, 279CBR Padding 309

Configuration 309Statistics 310

CCM Mode 344Channel 5.1 220chassis 25

configuration 51diagnostics 51, 161home page 50identification 67information 65login 48maintenance 51, 158utilities 163

Chrominance 196Chrominance Gain 195clear log 161Closed GOP 230, 261color legend 76compare config 75Conditional Access System 40config file 121

apply config 121sections 121

Apply Config Report 122copy running 123copy startup 122download config 124remove config 124upload config 124

configuration 100Advanced Encoder advanced settings

208Advanced Encoder audio 206ASIIn 174ASIOut 276ATM 151ATMIn 305ATMOut 326changes and redundancy 442chassis 51data pipe 404Encoder advanced 191Encoder advanced high and low thresh-

old settings 198encoder advanced high and low thresh-

old settings 198

Beta Beta 526


Encoder Plus Dolby Digital audio AC-3188, 208

Encoder Plus MPEG-1 layer 2 audio 185external data sources to connect to chas-

sis 294FILEIn 307IP tunneling parameters 295M2T parameters 402MCM 149MCM blade 149media routing 103multicast 134questions and answers for scenarios 426redundancy 101RIP 132RTPIn 300RTPOut 320scenarios 416SCM software 139SCM using SNMP 140section 404SMD 152SME 153static ARP 131TCPIn 291teletext support 181UDP backhaul port 319UDPIn 298UDPOut 314VLAN 133XrtrIn 351, 354XrtrOut 351, 354

connectingexternal data sources to chassis 294inputs and outputs 168

controls 410copy running 123copy startup 122create element 467create network port 101create program 465creating logical ports 289

Ddata file 127

download data file 127FTP information 127remove 128

data file statistics 76data inject 40data pipe packetizer 404data piping 451Data Piping Packetizer 40data type packetizers 402

data pipe configuration 404data pipe packetizer 404data pipe statistics 404IP tunneling packetizer 405M2T configuration 402M2T statistics 402section configuration 404section packetizer 404section statistics 404

deliverycable 177, 278, 279satellite 177, 278terrestrial 178, 279

descriptorsDVB list with descriptions 285fields, check boxes, and buttons 283how to add 282how to delete 283MPEG list with descriptions 284statistics 287

diagnostics 51, 161active alarms 166alarms 166clear alarms 166clear log 161log 161log file 161upload log 161

Digital Video Broadcasting 40disciplines 154download config 124download data file 127DSP 4PAC (Media Processor) submodule155Dual Mono Split 221DVB 40DVB standard PID numbers 119, 472

527


DVB-S2 Support 331ACM Mode Ports 335ASI Out Port and Bandwidth Manage-

ment 340ASIPlus Card 331CCM Mode 344Input Ports 333Input Ports and Packetizers 333Traffic QOS 339

EECM 40elements list

statistics 407EMM 40Encoder

advanced statistics 200Encoder advanced configuration 191

analog decoder pre-processing control195

brightness control 195chrominance gain control 195chrominance high threshold 198chrominance hue 196chrominance low threshold 199chrominance saturation 196contrast control 195encoder audio PID 199encoder audio type 199encoder PCR PID 199encoder PMT PID 199encoder program number 199encoder video PID 199high and low threshold settings 198luminance filter control 195luminance high threshold 198luminance low threshold 198median filter type 198noise reduction filters 197notes on spatial linear filter 197notes on temporal filter 197prefilter chrominance control 196prefilter luminance control 196prescaler brightness gain 197prescaler contrast gain 197

prescaler saturation gain 197scaler prefilter controls 196spatial filter auto mode 198spatial filter level 198temporal filter auto mode 198temporal filter level 198

Encoder PlusDolby Digital audio AC-3 configuration

188, 208Dolby Digital audio AC-3 statistics 190general configuration

configurationEncoder Plus general 179

general statistics 183MPEG-1 layer 2 audio configuration 185MPEG-1 layer 2 audio statistics 186teletext support 181

entering static ARP values 131entitlement control messages 40entitlement management messages 40external redundancy switches 442

FFILEIn

configure 307finding MAC addresses 458

GGE statistics 86General ATM, SMD, and SME receiving andtransmitting statistics 72glossary 510guides

other 22

Hhigh and low threshold settings

chrominance high threshold 198chrominance low threshold 199encoder audio PID 199encoder audio type 199encoder PCR PID 199encoder PMT PID 199

Beta Beta 528


encoder program number 199encoder video PID 199luminance high threshold 198luminance low threshold 198

home page 50

Iidentification

chassis 67information

chassis 65inspecting static ARP values 132installation

Java plug-in 409interface configuration

ATM 151SMD 152SME 153

Interface ListATM 95SMD 96SME 95

interface statistics 70, 95interfaces

network 151IP datagram data 451IP encapsulation modes 28IP routing configuration 128

manual ATM route 130manual IP route 129manual MPE route 129network routing 128route type 128

IP routing statistics 77IP Traffic Packetizers 41IP tunneling

statistics 296TCPIn port 294

IP tunneling packetizer 405IP tunneling parameters 295iPlex

chassis 25iPlex temperature statistics 67

JJava plug-in 409

Llicense configuration 144license statistics 90line chart in stream view 411log file 161logical input ports 290logical output ports 309logical ports

creating 289input 290overview 169packets and traffic on 290steps to create 169

login 48access rights by role 49

Luminance Filter 195

MM2T Packetizer 40MAC addresses

finding 458maintenance 51, 158

user interface 159maintenance menu 158

user Interface 159managing licenses for optional features 144manual/automatic IP route 78MCM

also see Media Controller Module 25blade 149blade configuration 149blade statistics 93configure 149configuring a blade 149overview 25ports 150reboot 150reconnect 150statistics 67, 92submodules 25

Media Controller Module

529


also see MCM 25overview 25submodules 25

media processorprocessing function 156

media routes statistics 69media routing

add a program 462add a stream route 471add a video element 116, 118, 468add an audio element 117, 469add an element 467basic concepts 461configure 103create a program 465create an element 467how to set up 462program vs stream 461

Mediaplex-20Transcoder 354

MODCOD 339MPE packetizer 447

IP datagram data 451multiprotocol encapsulation 448

MPEG encapsulation 43MPEG section packet format 446MPEG-2 Section Packetizers 40MPEG-2 Transport Stream Packetizer 40MPEG-4 AVC Ultracompression (SingleSlot) Encoder 248

SD Interface 264MPEG-4 AVC Ultracompression (SingleSlot) Encoder HD Advanced Configuration261MPEG-4 AVC Ultracompression (SingleSlot) Encoder HD audio channels 253MPEG-4 AVC Ultracompression (SingleSlot) Output Port 398MPEG-4 AVC Ultracompression Encoder229

Advanced Configuration 229, 261, 272Audio Channels 218Dolby Digital AC-3 Audio Statistics 226MPEG-1 Layer II Audio Statistics 221

MPEG-4 AVC Ultracompression EncoderPIP 227

MPEG-4 AVC Ultracompression HD En-coder 214MPEG-4 AVC Ultracompression HD En-coder General Statistics 217MPEG-4 AVC Ultracompression SD En-coder 233MPEG-4 AVC Ultracompression SD En-coder Advanced 242MPEG-4 AVC Ultracompression Single-slotEncoder SD General Configuration 265MPEG-4 AVC Ultracompression Single-slotTranscoder 35MPEG-4 AVC Ultracompression Singlr SlotEncoder SD audio channels 266MPEG-4 AVC Ultracompression Transcod-er 34MPEG-4 AVC Ultracomression SD Encod-er

MPEG-1 Layer II Audio Configuration236

multicastconfigure 134

multicast statistics 80multiprotocol encapsulation 448

Nnaming convention 170

NumberUsed 170UnitNumber 170

navigationbuttons 171

navigation buttons 52nCompass

statistics 92nCompass Control 148Network

configuring ATM 151configuring SMD 152

network 151network delivery type 278

cable delivery 279satellite delivery 278terrestrial delivery 279

network interfaces 151network port

Beta Beta 530


create 101network routes statistics 77network routing 128

manual ATM route 130manual IP route 129manual MPE route 129route type 128

network statistics 96noise reduction filters 197

median filter type 198notes on spatial linear filter 197notes on temporal filter 197spatial filter auto mode 198spatial filter level 198temporal filter auto mode 198temporal filter level 198

NTP status statistics 89NumberUsed 170

Ppacket formats 446packets and traffic on logical ports 290Pass Through 238PEG-4 AVC Ultracompression (Single Slot)Encoder

HD interface 248Picture in Picture (PIP) 157PID

DVB 119, 472pie chart in stream view 412ping utility 163port statistics 72ports

IP tunneling for TCPIn 294logical output 309on an MCM 150

Prefilter 196processing function 156progarms list

statistics 406program route chart 413program routes 70program routing 461programs, elements, and streams

list statistics 406

protocolssupported 42

Rreal-time monitoring 409

bar chart stream view 410controls 410line chart in stream view 411pie chart in stream viewl 412program route chart 413sample 414scale 414stream chart button 410type 414view 410

Real-Time MPEG Encoder Plus 29also see RTME Plus 29audio processing 29

rebootMCM 150SCM 139

reconnecting to an MCM 150redundancy

alarms 443configure 101statistics 68sync files 103, 443

remove config 124remove data file 128repetition rate 286

setting 287RIP

configuring 132RIP statistics 78routes

program 70stream 70

routing TCP In data to output ports 297RTME Plus 29

also see Real-Time MPEG Encoder Plus29

audio processing 29RTPIn


531


RTPOutconfigure 320statistics 324

running configuration screen 75

Ssample 414satellite 278satellite delivery 177, 278scale 414Scaler Prefilter Settings 192scan conversion 382scenarios

ASIIn configuration 419, 475audio-only encoding 507check ASIIn statistics 419, 475check port statistics 422, 425, 479, 486configuration 416configure a video PID on XrtrOut 497create UDPOut port 423, 482creating UDPOut port 419, 475custom program from ASIIn to UD-

POut 423, 481media routing 421, 425, 477, 483program without PID set to transrate

502questions and answers 426setting up VLAN 418, 474single program ASIIn to UDPOut 417,

473transrating program from ASIIn to UD-

POut 487transrating stream routes from ASIIn to

UDPOut 494SCM

also see Switch Controller Module 25configuration 137configuring using SNMP 140CPU statistics 88nCompass support 148overview 25reboot 139software configuration 139software statistics 84statistics 82

Screen Navigation ButtonsMode 172

screen navigation buttons 171SD-SDI Interface Video Source 217section packetizer 404sections 41security configuration 146send (technical support information) 165sensors statistics 67Service Information 40set time 160setting up VLAN 418, 474show (technical support information) 164show config 75show data file 76SI 40SMD

configuring 152statistics 97

SMD Interface List 96SME

configuring 153disciplines 154statistics 97

SME Interface List 95SNMP

configuring SCM 140statistics 84

softwarestatistics 82

spanning tree 135configuration 135protocol 136statistics 81

static ARPconfigure 131entering values 131inspecting values 132

statistics 51Advanced Encoder audio 207advanced, Advanced Encoder 213alarm 69ASIIn 176ASIOut 280ATM 96, 328ATMIn 306

Beta Beta 532


blade 66blade port 94data file 76data pipe 404elements list 407encoder advanced 200Encoder Plus Dolby Digital audio AC-3

190Encoder Plus general 183Encoder Plus MPEG-1 layer 2 audio 186GE 86interface 70, 95IP routing 77IP tunneling 296iPlex temperatures 67license 90M2T parameters 402MCM 67, 92MCM blade 93media routes 69multicast 80network 96network routes 77port 72programs list 406programs, elements, and streams 406redundancy 68RIP 78RTPIn 303RTPOut 324SCM 82SCM CPU 88SCM software 84screen 65section 404sensors 67SMD 97SME 97SNMP 84software 82spanning tree 81streams list 408TCPIn 293UDPIn 300UDPOut 318VLAN 79

XrtrIn 353XrtrOut 353

statusblade 65

stream chart button 410stream route

add 471stream routes 70stream routing 461stream types 168

input 168output 168

streams liststatistics 408

Stuffing Frame 340submodules 25

ASI Input 26ASI Output 26Real-Time MPEG Encoder Plus 29RTME Plus 29supported on MCM 25

summary interfaces list 70summary interfaces list-blade slot 95summary port list 73summary ports list-blade slot 95Switch Controller Module

also see SCM 25overview 25

Symbol Rat 340sync files 103, 443

TTandberg

naming convention 170protocols supported 42technical support 164

TCPInconfiguration 291statistics 293

technical support 164check list 23contact 23send 165show 164

Teletext 181

533


teletext support 181terrestrial 279terrestrial delivery 178, 279Traffic QOS 339Transcoder 354transrating

program from ASIIn to UDPOut 487stream route from ASIIn to UDPOut

494type 414

UUDP backhaul port

configure 319UDPIn


UDPOutconfigure 314statistics 318

Unicast traffic delivered over Gigabit Ether-net 290UnitNumber 170upload config 124upload log 161user interface 159user list 160

edit user 160utilities 163

ping utility 163utilities diagnostic 163

VVBI 203VBI Support 203video on demand specification 28video PID configuration on XrtrOut 497Video Quantizer 208video traffic shaping 454

classes of requirements 455definition 454why use? 454

view 410VLAN

configuring 133statistics 79

XXcdrIn

configuration 354XrtrIn

configure 351, 354statistics 353

XrtrOutconfigure 351, 354statistics 353

Beta Beta 534

iplex version 5.0 web gui guide

Documents

dolby trademark license

dolby digital trademark

trademark licensing

dolby digitaltrademark

dolby digital logo

technical data

technical support

unpublished rights